Home

Caution

1. AOF 0 Re B ETA AS AS kal 13HAbEt 19 i gone j Y EN anre 108 9 lt __ 0908082 0909252 aso L L O 10 dW vd 10 0 NOF 3259 gt T 3ZISd gt eazis qu azo 2 Zt 2321Sd gt gt gr 2378 137ISd 1376 gt Ho 3ziS ed 19 93H3Hd 1SID3H4 ML 3d dN 8 Ast 9 34 gsy H ri OF 5 eor e vsi 3d dd AOT O gt vazisd TRIN 20 809 SS A0 0 3 vano dW 020 5 tazisd 21 8951 Jos vo lt anve np NAM NE 292184 1 34 a o a ans 13ZISd TR 0 lt 2044940 VNIO 5 3218 td 2146 WZ20 V1S A Lt ASS 3NIDNA Sd VIN HOLOW G334 Ld 1 6 1 8 9 Ircul lt Figure 3 7 Paper Feed Size SW 9 3 DISPLAY CIRCUIT 3 1 Outline The control panel of this printer has four LED lamps one LCD display and eight switches The control panel is connected to the Main PCB and its functions are as follows 1 The LCD shows the printer status and error message in alpha numeric characters 2 The LED lamps indicate the
2. Q FOST Q Ss gt Gh Scr ws Scr ws Paper hold rear Figure 4 21 3 Release the left cartridge hold roller and remove the cartridge guide L by loosening the screw and releasing the hook then pull out feed flat cable 20P S Ps B 52 em 2 2 Feed flat cable 20 R Hook the rear side KW ZN Cartridge guide L Figure 4 22 IV 10 4 Remove the paper feed chassis unit Paper feed chassis unit Figure 4 23 1 13 Separation Pad Assv 1 Remove the paper pick up roller assv and roller collar Refer to subsection 1 22 2 Remove the separation pad pulling it out from the paper feed guide upper aper feed guide upper Separation pad ROSS Figure 4 24 Paper pick up roller collars 3 Remove the spring from the separation pad assv Separation pad assv pase TO Separation pad spring A Figure 4 25 IV 11 1 14 MP PE Sub Actuator 1 Pull out the actuator upward from the MP trav assv pav attention to the hook because it is fragile MP PE sub actuator Figure 4 26 1 15 Feed Size SW PCB Assy 1 Put the 3 chassis L tabs to their original position Tabs 2 solenoid harness connector 2 m Figure 4 27 2 Unplug the 2 solenoid connector and the paper feed motor harness connector 3 L
3. 18 Iv 990 TH gs By 190 900 givu vat IN 30D gr 192 1 A UA vel 2 ABS EXIWL Se 222 Ti 512 lt 388 1 Tee no 8 ano czy Ed Eg IE Sr ano re DOA rev 94 1 DOA TS 9A Lt 3H cor 8009 818 X 810618 1102ja2v X 2112 e109 1ev 5 v109 128 X 804 620 214 cid vid sid 54 59 9 99 2 5 6 viajar sia vx 19 lt 98 9v 58 sv a v 18 Iv loa av 10 DICLGN 00 e i o o 6002 61 sa vsx ZINSLNV MILQI NOddA S0 v0 ws 2 lt VIV VIOHOA 1 cava vel me 1 9 i 7 LIE X09 498 B 000 AST OLOMIVNIHS NO If 13535 d SvexywL 9 33 OIl 0 INQUHOM VSB 18 1HV2WT0SAS 990 et i 01 6 8 E 9 S 29 Ainoa 82d 8 xipueddy 4 1 HIOS6Z v6TASvA 000 8 0
4. ed e c jana 22A 8 1 53 32571 HEB 10 auo eX 1682 5 lg m 15 20 2 Isa END 1024 S 2 M PE L5 INA3HINI 5 x v 9 INASNSO GIIT B E ev 85 NUMOI GLO CO E 18 9v t gt lt 3538 858 10 689 ano 30 16 SRAKA HEB 10 2090 80 0 22A W L 900 TU 01 94 SvesowL cor st 86 01 ON TI OT an E sw on EIV cr IUE sa sv ON vr vIVX va vv ON Stv a2 One v ON atv et Srva ew vevivi co i 0 1 8 3 458 AGY eat 91 4 01 6 390 902 d 201 AS LI ose TINI IIO CTD CIO 3NINO 8 5 ON LIV 3001 LMS HS Ep lt CANO SMS 91 5 01 c gt A 915101 cass s0 lwo 30 33 SMS HOIH 21907 2048 23 135 MS HOIH 21907 9 gt 2616
5. ea 782 0191 4L88H vera HEB 10 2 Kano Od 6 xipuaddy 1 HIOS6Z v6ZASPA 000787 n 280 10 68 68 gt 10 000 212W 1812860 CAIL CB AWTTILI 120 vas Iv 24 ISSA Ser OLTY 0 Y vat 126 196 s 122 g 29A 1531 T s212 289 C96 gt 6825 812 000 vBEN esi e8lu l eaea 2 KN 4SB C0 002 EX 304 COE HBB 98 pr NUMHEJ 29 1 9 rr NISACO H80 90 NUMOLIJ er JNUMOLQI H8B 98 TT JNIHOLQI 9699700 826 CO0 90 Q2u1v24 pe 2V0 vaz XAPIIVIO 6212 289 BS JLNOLINI 200 81286 311 68 gt 229660 11148080 we 1 0 12 1 T 38 40 X12NY2S 5 31025 1 3097 4108 90 4957 3121 018 90 tL v1 2 sqa21 LL IMS 50097 NILINI 1121 gelviva 1 1 NNIGG 860 CO lt 860 0 860 0 Bus Lem veviva Isms 109 tms 242
6. W L Avon 5 9 anami D ET NOX3H GLO CO b 85 60 NO3HH8 4 NWOVHG 8LO CO odi LIE 001 1 0 EOS 5 AQVadPpuri NAY GLO CUD 6812 1 SLID NI 1 EM BENE or iecava 69 520 0650 60 5 52 171357712 bi 956 68 52 B13SHII 1 Br AISLBU 958 68 2NSI NID 105 278 68 958 68 INSI 958 58 NSI NN3Sn8 8011 uasna 50 9 0 ca jsa 9v 5 21 82H isa sw 90 3535 78 Mi MEAS LOS v NGOI 8140 60 La eer 460 20 1 NUMQX 060 x DEB L0 NYLYT NOGA IIl 0 TA 860 joa ev 3108 8 0 0 gt Y nO 22 NO Ong 60 40 NISU Td t 1HQ1651Sd 29 8 1 lt gt WW N1 NQUHOM 850 Mr 101 12 et i 1 6 8 A 9 5 v 7 1 2 UN xipueddy 2 0 HlIDS62 v678ra 000787 n
7. 398 40 Asng asna 2508 GILB E0 50 40 T NAY NS29N3gz NS29N3 5 U6T22 261222 9613 961222 619 NBlS 97NY IL0 10 2904359 als T 15 150 0 Te NLINI 99 60 ANAYO CLYS 913581 54 NI 3S 96 D NITIS 45 p3o3nvu ASnaH et Tor ASNH 35B 0 39ecsssqan es v22 val EEI 898213331 2242 ji et 1 6 8 L 9 5 Zip Ainoa 82d 9 x pu ddy 2 9 HIOS6Z v6ZASvA 000Z8Zeyn 11358 OL 69X 89 19 39 X ti EM at x vat TEVIVT 9v BCv1vd Qeviva sci EAN 62 1 0 82 1 0 82 1 0 9 LevIVI 12 1 0 se 92 1 0 gevive 52 1 0 52 1 0 veviva veviva 24 eti TR 22 1 0 22 1 0 es 1 12 1 0 ac Qeviva AAN BI X S lt 911 2 3 815 8Ivivd 8Ivivad TIVIVG LTVIVT Ly eN3MMIS 382 SIVIVI pd 4 ENSVUIS YNSVNIS ENSVUIS A EL ees ENSVOIS eL ENSIS ort TNSVIIS INSVIIS TT ONSVIIS ONSVIIS Or cT sv 9 ka Tevive TEV
8. ed oo un co o av a ano 923 M WESTWL Enig 300 10 1 0 02 1 0 8 LW 98 9v 58 wa vv Ltd NIVH TT v ev 18 Iv o e co uo el INS 30 o 9j 29 U L 5925194 LH poo 01190 AAT Qr CL 8 900 cerva 12 5552 BTUQV Study Study 6040 8040 1040 SQuiv vOUTV 2080 N38 160 105 NS T 2 6rudv gruIv CHS Tevive Fe IL VZ BEvIva 510 STAT BEvIvI 62 1 0 t10 82 1 0 BE 82 32 eto 82 1 0 Leviva ve AENA Leviva Seviva Te 118 Seviva 6v 52 1 0 Lia 6T jaro 52 1 0 veviva ey 60 6v CENA veviva 2 1 0 LY ST 80 8v 7 4 evIvi 22 1 0 N be Lo LV 8040 22 1 0 2 1 0 12 90 9v 1040 2 1 0 CHANIA bd 5 so sv Soucy geviva BIVIVT
9. The sizes above are nominal sizes according to ISO An A4 sheet accepts 80 PICA pitch characters 203 2mm 14 Standard interfaces 15 Emulation 16 17 Resident fonts Automatic interface selection Centronics Bi directional parallel e RS 232C serial Baud rate Stop bit Start bit Datalength Paritv Protocol 150 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps 1 bit 1 bit or 2 bits 7 bits or 8 bits Odd Even or None Xon Xoff or DTR Automatic emulation selection HP Laser Jet 5 PCL Level 6 e EPSON 850 IBM Proprinter XL BR Script level 2 HP GL MB86832 PostScript language emulation interpreter 75 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts IM HP Laser Jet 5 EPSON FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL Scalable Fonts Intellitont Compatible Fonts Albertville Extrabold Antique Oakland Oblique Bold Brougham Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Cleveland Condensed Connecticut Guatemala Antique Italic Bold Bold Italic Letter Gothic Oblique Bold Maryland Oklahoma Oblique Bold Bold Oblique PC Brussels Light Light Italic Demi Demi Italic PC Tennessee Roman Italic Bold Bold Italic Utah Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Utah Condensed Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Bitmapped Fonts Portrait and Landscape Letter Gothic 16 66 Medium Italic Bold Bold Italic OCR A OCR B Windows 3 1 Compatible Fonts Tennessee Roman Italic
10. 123 8 4 lt gt 012 __ ABCDefgh123 S o amp lt gt 012 ABCDefgh123 8 0 ABCDefgh123 46968 ABCDefgh 1237 8 amp 0 lt gt 0 ABCDefgh123 amp 0 lt gt 0 ABCDefigh 123248 lt gt 0123456 ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt ABCDefgh123 8 0 gt ABCDefgh123 amp 0 lt gt l _ ABCDefgh123 820 lt gt ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt 01 ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt 0 ABCDetgh123 amp lt gt 01 ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt 0 PRINT FONTS I Fig 2 24 Test Pattern Setting List and Font List 2 23 USER S GUIDE 2 24 Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page After you print out the test pattern or demo page as described in the previous section take a look at the printed sheet to check print quality The printer has been shipped with the print density properly adjusted with the control panel switches If you are not satisfied with the printout too light or dark for example adjust the print density as follows 1 2 9 Turn on the printer Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line state Press the MODE switch Press the A or W switch to scroll through the display until the ADVANCED appears Press the SET switch Press the A or W switch to scroll through the display until the PRINT DENSITY appears Press the SET switch Press the A or W
11. totins 19 4 ewe 21 1 POWER CORDS 8 HARNESSES MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 050 070 2 PAPER FEEDER PCB d MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 090 L POWER CORDS amp HARNESSES UH1052001 UH1053001 UH1055001 UH1054001 UH1051001 U34320001 UK4094001 U34322001 U34342001 UK2502001 UK2505000 UK2506001 UK2507001 UK2508001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DC MOTOR HARNESS 4P NO PR98046 2 PAPER FEEDER PCB REF NO UCEDIS8 DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARK UH2410000 1 SIZE SWITCH SPRING 087320616 2 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 090 3 CONTROL PANEL MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 150 4 PCB ATTACHMENTS MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 450 NO PR98309 3 CONTROL PANEL REF NO 5565 DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARK een 1 SWITCH FLAT CABLE 21 UH2011001 1 PANEL STOPPER GRAY1227 UH1451001 1 PANEL SHEET HL 1660e MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 150 4 ATTACHMENTS EF NO DESCRIPTION REMARK REMOTE SWITCH UH2124001 083313515 UH2144001 UK2826001 UK3213000 UK3214000 UK3215000 UH2123001 2 PS SWITCH WIRE OONDOBRWDN SWITCH ATTACHMENT 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 450 NO PR98309 5 MAIN PCB MODEL HL 1660e 54 003 103 5 UK3799001 MAIN ASSY SP HL1660e 48 294 100 UK4280000
12. 7 Press the SET switch When you enter the character set setting mode the display first shows the current character set with an asterisk 4 57 USER GUIDE US ASC 9 Note The character set varies according to the current emulation mode The above displav shows the factorv setting in the EPSON FX 850 emulation mode 8 Press the A or V switch until the desired character set appears on the display See List of Symbol Character Sets on page 4 60 9 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective Then the display shows the next menu TABLE PRINT 10 Press the SET switch to start printing the code table of the selected font or press the or switch to skip this menu Then the display shows the exit menu 11 Press the SET switch to exit from the setting mode The printer returns to the off line state 4 58 List of Fonts CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL For specific characters in resident bitmapped and scalable fonts see SYMBOL CHARACTER SETS in Appendix Display Message BROUGHAM LETTERGOTHIC OCR A CR B ETTERGOTH16 6 LTRGOTH16 LTN2 LTRGOTH16 LTN5 LTRGOTH16 LTN6 PcTENNESSEE OKLAHOMA CONNECTICUT CLEVELAND Cd PCBRUSSELS UTAH TAH CONDENSED ntiqueOAKLAND UATEMALA ARYLAND E
13. 7m B Paper ejection T Figure 2 23 Jam rear STBY PRINT Main motor EN Paper feed dui 8 1 1 Paper ejection 7 17 sec ia __ 7 17 M Figure 2 24 Il 16 CHAPTER ELECTRICAL SVSTEM Electric signal levels are expressed bv High approximate the supplv voltage or Low approximate OV Signals with hyphen or slash such as FSRD or FSRD are low active and signals without hyphen or slash such as FSRD are high active signals 1 MAIN PCB 1 1 Outline The Main PCB consists of the Video Controller Circuit and the Engine Controller Circuit The Video Controller Circuit performs the following functions 1 Converts data received from an external device such as a personal computer through Centronics parallel interface or RS 232C serial interface into video data and transfers it to the Engine controller circuit 2 Displays the current printer status in LED and LCD and enables settings from the control panel The operation sequence of the printer controlled by a microprocessor in the Engine Controller Circuit The Engine Controller Circuit outputs signals to drive the various loads on the laser diode scanner motor main motor etc according to the print commands and image data from the external device Main PCB Main CPU MB86832 ASIC MASK ROM Video controller MB87F 1610 CDCC bolse IF 32M maskx2 4MB RS 232C IF PC
14. Iv Qv 9i IE OST Issa STA TH Tor 9I IE Ty 66_ 1 12 Bew ISSA Tan 587 unc ISSA 1 1 SON NAT S ty ISSA 198 ov oe gr aN var 8051 6051 et89884 v 55 01081 Y TIONI gt pez o mu cor 741 818 58 SvEXJWL 8LVN BEE 1NI STONI Lv 850 0 NSY TIVIVG Tevive 98 M CN38 15218 JAV LVT 58 09 18319 BOVIVI lt 898 0 gt N38 gv va 28 ev 2118 18 M 5 NUMQU 3HOVONON NEAS zgra 01 CETT aragona BI X vt INS 5 830016
15. 2 16 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Connecting the Printer to Vour Computer This printer has a bi directional parallel interface an RS 232C serial interface and a Universal Serial Bus USB interface HL 1660e only They allow the printer to communicate with IBM PC or compatible computers Before connecting the printer and computer you need to purchase or make a connecting cable specifically for the interface to be used See INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS in Appendix Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set simply connect the interface cable to the printer In some cases you need to turn off the high speed and bi directional parallel communications with the MODE switch For further information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 When you use the serial interface you need to have the same communications settings on both the printer and computer Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain factory settings baud rate 9600 code type 8 bits parity none stop bit 1 Xon Xoff ON ER ON and Robust Xon ON you may simply connect the interface cable if these are the same as the settings on your computer When necessary set the communications parameters with the MODE switch on the printer For further information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 For the settings on the computer see the manual of the computer or software you use Connect the print
16. 23 92 1 0 Leviva 112 92 t 7037 512 82 1 0 902 62 1 0 aCV1VG reviva Niz 1N02 INIT noel anora w HY o 29 gt 4 n i l A my 13 ej os LH vor 412 8829 al H rH 9812 val 1612 9029 vor vos ao set Us coy e 542 ay 288 38 154042 TS NISHINYO Wry 810 90 NOddA 5 99 igudv DR v80 90 938 55934 t E 5 8 1120 Gra ca gt 080 90 5 2 Nastava Nato ES nator Praed peu 38g ANT AN 380 90 915101 915101 NS21N02 97 eNASNSQ 311 50 m Pau IN 01 90 NASLWI S NISLUVI 8220 ssesst NI3S3H 850 109 VIS sp 06 WOSHI ATSH 321 68 lt 958 725 125 2218 201 360 20 NISHOIH FZ INLSUOIH 46B 28 NASOIH re NISOIH L10 91 jazzna sid se3eq vid eem EI 114 1 0 014 395551 _ 2161 AS CLI LO LAH ye 1 H a 1u u u 228 agu p4oanyu punou EUB1S GND IT 10 ICT A
17. 4 002 ID ISOGI Norwegian2 00 1025 French 506 French gt e e e e 15014 ISOST Chinee 8 8 e e 9U Windows 27 19M Symbol 579 Wingdings These symbol sets are variations of the Roman 8 symbol set Appendix 34 APPENDICES PCL Svmbol Set Tvpeface Continued LetterGothic Mary Oklahoma PC Utah Utah SetID Symbol Set 16 66 land Brussels Tennessee Cond 8U Roman 8 ON 1SO8859 1Latinl 000000 2N ISO 8859 2 Latin 5N 150 8859 9 Latins 6N 150859101408 gt gt 0000 9 9 n Omm ewe PC8DN 8 e e e e 12U PCO Ta _ _ 59 26U PAT PCTuk 197 Windows3 1 9E Windows3 latn ee 5T Windows3lla n 88 88 9 PCI00MOSD 00 m oo os 10 PSTett 0 14 VenturaUS 5 9 9 6 Microsoft Publishing gt 4 4 MathS 5M PS Math 6M Ventura Math 150 PI Font lU Legali ISO4 UniedKingdom 00 606 ASCH gt ee e e ISO2 ee e e e e OS ISOIL Swedish names 57 5 OI 16015 Haa lS HPSpansht 4 4 e 5 0 3S 15010 Swedsh ee 9 9 c 4S ISOl6 Portugueser 9 422 400 5S 1508 Potuguse 5 222 42 05 HPGerman cee e e 1G German gt gt e
18. Locations ESC s2T 27 42 115 50 84 2 73 32 54 Internal ESC s3T 27 42 115 5184 2A 73 33 54 Downloaded ESC s4T 27 42 115 52 84 1B 2A 73 34 54 Cartridge ESC 55 27 42 115 53 84 1B 2A 73 35 54 Option ROM Socket ESC s7T 27 42 115 55 84 1B 2A 73 37 54 Set Status Readback Location Unit All Entities of Location Type ESC 500 27 42 115 48 85 1 2 73 30 55 Entity 1 Temporary ESC 510 27 42 115 49 85 2A 73 31 55 Entity 2 or Permanent ESC 520 27 42 115 50 85 1 2 73 32 55 3 ESC 530 27 42 115 51 85 1 2 73 33 55 Entitv 4 ESC 540 27 42 115 52 85 1 2 73 34 55 Inquire Status Readback Entitv Font ESC 501 27 42 115 48 73 1B 2 73 30 49 Macro ESC sII 27 42 115 49 73 2 73 31 49 User defined Pattern ESC s 21 27 42 115 50 73 1 2 73 32 49 Svmbol Set ESC s3I 27 42 115 51 73 1B 2A 73 33 49 Font Extended ESC 541 27 42 115 52 73 2 73 34 49 Function Flush Pages Flush Complete Pages Flush Page Data Free Memorv Space Echo OTHER COMMANDS Push Cursor Position Pop Cursor Position Displav Function ON OFF Transparent Print Perforation Skip ON OFF End of Line Wrap ON OFF Auto Underline ON Fix Float OFF Half Line Feed Line Termination CR CR LF LF FF FF CR CR LF LF LF FF FF CR CR LF LF CR FF FF CR CR CR LF LF LF CR FF FF CR Print Orientation Portrait Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Print Direction Copy Volume Paper Input Contr
19. Cd H STANDARD Si Or To set the alternate character set select the following message ALTERNATE SET Then press the SET switch to show the following message ANSI ASCII Change the character set with A W switch and make the selection effective bv pressing the SET switch For specific character sets see SETS in Appendix 4 27 USER GUIDE Character Sets in HP GL Emulation Mode ANSI ASCII Factory setting 9825 CHR SET FRENCH GERMAN SCANDINAVIAN SPANISH LATIN JIS ASCII ROMANS EXT ISO IRV ISO SWEI ISO SWEI ISO NOR ISO GERMAN K ISO FRI ISO U K ISO ITALIAN ISO SPANISH ISO PORTUGUESE ISO NORWAY 2 RESOLUTION MODE 4 28 The resolution advanced photoscale technology APT and high resolution control HRC can be set in this mode menu Display Message Resolution Mode RESOLUTION Set the resolution of the printer APT SETTING Set the APT function This menu appears only in the BR Script 2 mode HRC SETTING Set the HRC function Select the setting menu and enter the sub setting menu to make the settings as follows Resolution When you select RESOLUTION you can choose a resolution of 300 or 600 dots per inch dpi on this printer You can set the resolution in this mode according to your requi
20. LASER PRINTER SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICS amp ELECTRONICS No part this publication be reproduced in form or bv means without permission in writing from the publisher Trademarks BR Script and DX 1600 are registered trademarks of Brother Industries Ltd Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation PostScrip is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated BM Proprinter XL is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation EPSON FX 850 is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation HP GL and HP Laser Jet 5 are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company PREFACE This service manual contains basic information required for after sales service of the laser printer hereinafter referred to as this machine or the printer This information is vital to the service technician in maintaining the high printing quality and performance of the printer This manual consists of the following chapters ChapterII ChapterIII ChapterIV ChapterV Chapter VI Appendices General Features specifications etc Theory of Operation Basic operation of the mechanical system and the electrical system and their timing Electrical System Theory of the electronics circuit Mechanical System Requirements for a suitable location disassembling and reassembling procedure of mechanical system Maintenance and Se
21. List of Symbol ChaacterS Sets 4 60 Poti Peed i a hi Rent 11 CONTINUE Switch tt E USER S GUIDE vi SWITCHES IN SHIFT MODE 4 64 SHIFT per ae 4 64 EMULATION as B 4 65 About Emulatton Modes acere rentes 4 67 ECONOMY aw 4 69 TONER SAVE MODE te 4 69 POWER SAVE MODE 4 69 FEEDER pett u dp rt a 4 70 FEEDER ib ib e e e u b 4 70 ec er crete 4 72 MENU E RE a 4 73 MP TRAY SET NA ER ae 4 73 MEDIA TYPE ara e 4 74 4 75 CORY 4 77 RESET Svid e i mei DR CU UH REA bU rac dE Hd 4 78 List of Factory cese ert pu ern 4 79 TES FT o 4 85 HEX DUME MODE n s e et eaten Hbi 4 88 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS DISK 5 cancro annee nnn annees 5 1 LOWER TRAY UNIT LT 1200L 5 1 Loading Paper from the Lower Paper 5 1 FONT CARTRIDGE CARD FLASH MEMORY HDD CARD 5 2 Installing a Font Cartridge Card Flash Memory Card and FIDE P 5 2 selecting the Optional Ponts 5 4 MODULAR TOCAR emn 5 6 RAM EXPANS
22. Max paper cassette capacity Approx 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs when duplex unit installed Approx 250 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs A4 letter Tray 1 Multi purpose tray Multi purpose tray capacity Approx 150 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs Printed Output Face down print delivery Approx 250 sheets Face up output delivery Paper Type Cassette Feed Standard upper cassette Tray 1 Plain paper of letter legal A4 ISO B5 A5 ISO B6 A6 and Executive sizes 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ibs e Envelopes of COM10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 sizes Multi purpose tray MP tray Plain paper from 90 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm from 3 5 x 5 8 to 8 5 x 14 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ibs Overhead projector OHP films Colored paper Postcards Label stock Envelopes of COM10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 sizes Optional lower cassette Tray 2 Plain paper of letter legal A4 and Executive sizes 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ibs Appendix 4 APPENDICES Test printing on paper especiallv envelopes is recommended before making a large purchase The following tvpes of envelopes are not recommended for use Envelopes with thick and or crooked edges Damaged curled wrinkled or irregularly shaped envelopes Extremely shiny or highly textured envelopes Envelopes with clasps Envelopes of baggy construction Envelopes not sharply creased Embossed envelopes Envelopes already printed with a laser printer Envelopes pre prin
23. Pressing the SET switch allows you to select certain items on the display or make the displayed menu or setting effective The switch also works as an execute switch to perform the displayed function When you press the SET switch the printer stores the settings you have selected into the memory as User Settings Every time you turn on the printer it is reset according to these user settings They remain effective until you make new settings or restore them to the factory settings For factory reset see RESET Switch in this chapter 9 Note When you press the SET switch to select a setting an asterisk appears at the end of display for a short time Since the asterisk indicates the selection you can easily find the current setting when you scroll through the display A UP or Y DOWN Switch 46 Pressing A UP W DOWN switch scrolls the menus and settings forward or backward respectively on the display Press or keep pressing the switch until you access the desired item CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL MODE Switch Pressing the MODE switch allows vou to enter modes where vou change settings The mode menus and settings varv according to the current emulation mode and options For details refer to the pages indicated in parentheses HP LaserJet
24. e 1S HP Spanish 25 ISO 17 Spanish 35 ISO 10 Swedish 45 ISO 16 Portuguese 55 ISO 84 Portuguese 65 ISO 85 Spanish 0G HP German 1G ISO 21 German e e 0 ISO 60 Norwegian 1 1D ISO 61 Norwegian 2 ISO 25 French 1 ISO 69 French e ISO 14 JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57 Chinese 90 Windows 3 0 Latini 121 Text e 19M Symbol 191 Windows Baltic These symbol sets are variations of Roman 8 symbol set Appendix 36 APPENDICES PCL Svmbol Set Tvpeface Bermuda Script Germanv San Diego US Roman SetID Symbol Set 8U Roman 8 e ON ISO 8859 1 Latini 2N ISO 8859 2 Latin2 5N ISO 8859 9 Latin5 6N ISO 8859 10 Latin6 10U PC 8 110 8 D N 120 850 170 852 260 775 9T PC Turk 19U Windows 3 1 Latini Q 9 Windows 3 1 Latin2 5T Windows 3 1 Latin5 7J DeskTop 97 1004 05 2 107 5 131 Ventura International 141 Ventura US e 61 Microsoft Publishing 8M Math 8 5M PS Math 6M Ventura Math 15U PI Font 10 Legal 1 ISO 4 United Kingdom 00 ISO 6 ASCII 2U ISO 2 IRV 05 ISO 11 Swedish names 01 ISO 15 Italian 15
25. indicates the paper size you have selected with the MODE switch in the PAGE FORMAT mode or through your application software 3 15 USER S GUIDE Multi purpose Tray MP Upper Paper Cassette Tray 1 Lower Paper Cassette Tray 2 Fig 3 5 Cassette Feed Manual Feed When you set paper in the multi purpose tray with the setting MANUAL FEED ON selected with the FEEDER switch the printer loads paper only from the multi purpose tray regardless of the previous feeder selection When you select the setting PAPER IN CONT in the MP TRAY SETTING mode the printer loads paper automatically from the multi purpose tray When you select the setting PAPER IN STOP the printer waits for you to press the SEL key to start printing You can set the paper feed mode and the paper size with the FEEDER switch For further information see FEEDER Switch in Chapter 4 gt Notes When you feed paper manually note the following e If your application software supports a manual feed selection in the print menu you can select it through the software Since the software or command setting overrides the switch setting you do not need to set the manual feed mode and the paper size with the FEEDER switch e If you use pre printed paper in the multipurpose tray please note that it is inserted with the pre printed side face up Insert the top of the page towards the printer in the multi purpose tray 3 16 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING
26. te Mel vv Soucy BIVIVT SIVIVI ev ge co v PONT SIVIVI LIVIVG Iv EL ev LIVIVG ex ST 16 IV EBUIV 9rviva T 24 ISSA 3H8 T ISSA AQ Let 6IVI 117 ISSA 30 30 val 32 32 I TE ISSA 30 30 vot en T a era 32 32 PR 8aagecoceu Sei IL VZ sry LIV IM 2 reuay T Beudv 2 tt staav tIVIvI 5 BE 510 SIVI vC LIATY 10 St Study eIviva ew 82 eto ery I1viva 12 EY ve atv ytuay Biviva By Te 118 uv 8C crudv savivi LT ev jaro ary SC etaty SIVIVI FIVIVI ETVIVI ITVIVG BIVIVI 6IVIVI sovivi ST 60 ready Lovivi 62 LV ST 89 8v BTUQV 9evivi 12 be Lo uv GOUT soviva 52 sy 12 90 EM Saucy v vivq t2 N 52 so sv tovivi 02 AM te vo vv eoviva Be co v SOUCY SIVIVI LOVIVU SOVIVI Saviva Faviva aviva 20 1 0 Tavivd 8T YOYOY Ta
27. Since you can save the current settings in the printer s memory you can easily reset the printer to your necessary settings after they are changed For resetting the printer see RESET Switch in Chapter 4 Use the panel switches to set the configuration of the printer to your needs and then enter this mode menu to save your settings Two sets of user settings can be saved in the printer as follows Display Message User Setting SAVE SETTING 1 Save the current settings as No 1 in the printer s memory SAVE SETTING 2 Save the current settings as No 2 in the printer s memory If you want to check the user settings you can print out a list of the settings with the TEST switch See TEST Switch in Chapter 4 gt Note No user settings have been factory set 4 47 USER GUIDE 4 48 PAGE COUNTER You can check the total number of printed pages with this mode When you enter this mode the display shows the number for a short time and automatically moves to exit MODE menu COUNT 861 EXIT MODE When you finish setting your desired item in the mode menus advance to the following message exit MODI GI Press the SET switch to exit from the mode menus to the off line ready state 9 Note Remember that you can exit from the mode menu any time with the SEL switch After you make a setting effective with the SET switch press the SEL switch You will exit from
28. 106 LETTER LANDSCAPE 136 LEGAL LANDSCAPE 113 4 LANDSCAPE 113 A5 LANDSCAPE 113 A6 LANDSCAPE 0 5 0 33 Non HP 0 5 0 33 Non HP 4 81 USER GUIDE 4 82 continued continued LINES Non HP Switch Item Sub Item Factorv Setting MODE PAGE FORMAT LINES HP 60 LETTER PORTRAIT 78 LEGAL PORTRAIT 64 AA PORTRAIT 64 A5 PORTRAIT 64 A6 PORTRAIT 45 LETTER LANDSCAPE 45 LEGAL LANDSCAPE 43 A4 LANDSCAPE 43 A5 LANDSCAPE 43 A6 LANDSCAPE 62 LETTER PORTRAIT 80 LEGAL PORTRAIT 66 A4 PORTRAIT 66 A5 PORTRAIT 66 A6 PORTRAIT 47 LETTER LANDSCAPE 47 LEGAL LANDSCAPE 45 A4 LANDSCAPE 45 A5 LANDSCAPE 45 LANDSCAPE OFFSET 0 OFFSET 0 FORMAT BR Script 2 X OFFSET X OFFSET 0 OFFSET OFFSET 0 FORMAT MODE HP GL PAGE FORMAT MODE PAPER LETTER For 110 120V model 4 For 220 240V model X OFFSET X OFFSET 0 OFFSET OFFSET 0 GRAPHICS MODE HP GL PEN SETTING SIZE 3 dots 100 Switch Item MODE continued RESOLUTION MODE PAGE PROTECTION Non BR Script2 ADVANCED MODE PAGE COUNTER FONT HP PRIMARY FONT SECONDARY FONT FONT EPSON FONT CHARACTER SET FONT IBM FONT CHARACTER SET EMULATION For AUTO mode Sub Item RESOLUTION APT SETTING HRC SETTING NETWORK MODE LOCK PANEL AUTO FF For AUTO FF ON
29. Line Inspection Procedure 1 Mount the font cartridge the flush memorv card and the optional MIO board Note Use a Hewlett Packard Company C2053A C01 Word Perfect as font cartridge While pressing the A switch turn the power on The LCD will display LINE TEST Press the SET switch to check if the LCD comes on All the LCD elements will come on simultaneously Press the CONTINUE switch to check the pushbutton switch All the LEDs will go out and the LCD will display the characters shown below Press all the switches by turns XXXXXXXX Switch kev numbers 1112 13114 15 16 7 12345678 Press the CONTINUE switch to check RAM size RAM SIZE 8MB 8M standard RAM SIZE XXMB XX SIMM 2 RAM SIZE ERROR In case of error Press the CONTINUE switch to check the fan FAN HIGH SPEED sure that the fan rotates at the high speed Press the CONTINUE switch FAN LOW SPEED Make sure that the fan rotates the low speed Press the CONTINUE switch to check the 1st stage cassette TRAY 1 4 Appears when the cassette is set to 4 size 1 LETTER Appears when the cassette is set to letter size TRAV 1 Appears when no cassette is set CASSETTE ERRORII Appea
30. NN301u as 90 90 5 93 F YA lt 978 90 gt 9455 IA sr 960 90 1703 75 960 90 NS1124 gR Yo LST VY8 90 NN324 SV YO ETT 9050 90 12N0v23 EE A BEN 980 90 N10452 sz Y Ye 982 92 89452 TI JISNVUL 2105 1105 INOLW3H 5431 wen taan JENASUSI JeNASUSI 59 JONASUSI vas 1s ISTOIA3M IPTOIA3H I TOIA3H 2101 34 TTOIASY 2101 LQ01A38 9001434 1 01 1801A3N Naaa 0 INONASA 39041531 121831 NX207IN2S NO3MSA N3301 NOGAN3 INO3300 IH INASAOIH NLO30IH INNSOIH INSV23 1359 INS17124 INSGNI4 INN32 1930v34 102 52 12 52 NOIHMOVI 8191 4L88H 3 2614 01 gat x X get I ULU m 7 ZHUBALT 55 2012 H31SAS 2 8 BEE gcc a 3 sar 1145 8 sce c9EB 20 TEZ NX207N2S 5 leca NOSNSA 879 90 pea 307 0210 40 eca NOQAN3 019 10 NOILMOV NOGAOIH 460 20 460 20 SIT coy Vase Past 310 0 IL0 vBW 38 70 uzz 173 Nusa Ttg axa ZHWeST T 49079 2 8 810 50 LS BINSVU WID S0 Q9 VH WIB SD LE BINSVI NEZAS ZK yor Lnow12n ZHHOBB 429012 650 ec
31. USER GUIDE Expanded Character Rotation a0 or Al Upright default al or Al Rotated 90 degrees a2 or 2 Upside down rotated 180 degrees n a3 or Rotated 270 degrees Bar Code Data Start n or Data that follows is read in bar code data Bar code data must end with the V code 5CH which also terminates this command The acceptable bar code data is subject to the bar code mode selected by t or When CODE 39 is selected with the parameter 0 or TO Forty three characters 0 to 9 A to and 9 can be accepted as bar code data Other characters cause data error The number of characters for bar codes is not limited The bar code data automatically starts and ends with an asterisk start character and stop character If the received data has an asterisk at its beginning or end the asterisk is regarded as a start character or stop character When Interleaved 2 of 5 is selected with the parameter t1 or T1 Ten numerical characters 0 to 9 can be accepted as bar code data Other characters cause data error The number of characters for bar codes is not limited Since this mode of bar codes require even characters if the bar code data has odd characters the zero character
32. When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors hold the connector bodies not the cables If the connector has a lock always slide the connector lock to unlock it After repairs check not only the repaired portion but also that the connectors and other related portions function properly before operation checks Notes On the next page is a disassembly order flow which helps you access the object component e Unless otherwise specified the disassembled parts or components should be reassembled in the reverse order of removal IV 1 PRINNTER DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE PRINTER BODV OF CARTRIDGE LID Sie cover OF FONT COVER 557 O UPRER COVER ASS MIO LID DC FAN SIMM REPLACE LID MIO BOX PCB HOLDER MAIN PCB CONTROL PANEL UNIT BEAM SCANNER UNIT DUCT CARTRIDGE GUIDE L CARTRIDGE LOCK SPRING L R HOLD ROLLER CARTRIDGE STOPPER ASSY SCANNER HOLDER ASSY FEED FLAT CABLE 20P PAPER FEED CHASSIS UNIT IV 2 PAPER DELIVERV HOLDER SPRING 6 16 CARTRIDGE GUIDE R GROUND LEAF SPRING PANEL ARM L R HEAT INSULATION COVER LV HARNESS 8P LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSY PRINTER BODV 1 1 Configuration Toner cartridge lid Upper cover assv 1 Control panel unit Va 2 t aper trav Rear cover assv Font cover assv
33. 1 22 Paper Pick up Roller Assv Bearing 1 Pull out the MP paper pick up gear 35 and the trav paper pick up gear 35 from the paper pick up roller shafts 35 Paper pick up roller shafts Bearings Trav paper pick up gear 35 Figure 4 34 2 Loosen the bearing screws and pull out the paper pick up rollers When only the paper feed rollers are to be replaced they be replaced without removing the paper feed unit with the body assembled Paper pick up roller assy Bearing ZA Paper pick up roller assy Figure 4 35 3 Pull out the paper pick up roller shafts 4 Remove the paper pick up roller collars from the paper pick up rollers assy Paper pick up roller assy Paper pick up roller collars Figure 4 36 15 1 23 Paper Pick up Solenoid 1 Remove each solenoid bv loosening their screw 73 Paper pick up solenoid an Screw Paper pick up solenoid Figure 4 37 1 24 Paper Feed Motor Assv 1 Pull out the paper feed motor assv bv loosening its 2 screws Figure 4 38 2 For each assy loosen a screw and pull out the bearing and the 6 washers See the picture below Paper feed roller assv 70s Washer 2 0 al P Wash E dh DA ac 5 o_O ON b T c P FS Paper feed roller assy 60 ores NL Washer E ZO OF A mA
34. 10 2 ON amp Xon Xoff handshake OFF DTR handshake ON Makes DTR ER low when the buffer is full OFF Doesnot make DTR ER low when the buffer is full DTR ER goes low only when the printer is off line ON Sends Xon while waiting OFF Sends Xon once when the printer status changes from off line to on line Universal Serial Bus USB interface HL 1660e only If your computer has a USB interface you can connect the printer and computer with the USB interface When using the USB interface select the interface on the display as follows Optional Interface If you have installed a commercial modular input output MIO card in the printer you can select the optional MIO interface in this mode If the installed MIO card requires any optional interface settings they appear under this menu Set them referring to the manual of the MIO card gt Note I F OPTION This setting appears only when the MIO card has been installed For installation of the MIO card see MODULAR CARD in Chapter 5 USER GUIDE FORMAT MODE ORIENTATION When you select ORIENTATION you can set portrait or landscape orientation e Note The ORIENTATION selection is effective in the HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes It does not work in other emulation modes This printer can print pages in portrait or landscape orientation You can check the current ori
35. 3 Envelopes with baggy construction or folds that are not sharply creased 4 Envelopes with transparent windows holes cutouts or perforations APPENDICES Envelopes with clasps snaps or tie strings Envelopes made with smooth or shiny paper Envelopes that are rough highly textured or deeply embossed Envelopes which do not lie flat or that are curled wrinkled or irregularly shaped Envelopes having an open flap with an adhesive that seals the envelope USE OF THE ENVELOPES LISTED ABOVE CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR PRINTER SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENT gt Note The manufacturer neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular envelope because envelope properties are subject to change by the envelope manufacturer The entire responsibility for the quality and performance of the envelope lies with the customer LABELS AND OVERHEAD TRANSPARENCIES The printer will print on most type of labels and transparencies designed for use with a laser printer Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic based since such material is more stable at the high temperatures in the fusing unit Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the printer because the label stock may stick to the drum or rollers and cause jams and print quality problems No adhesive should be exposed between the labels Labels should be arranged so that t
36. 3 10 PAPER HANDED i 3 11 l ieli a l 3 11 FAPEE GITE peoia E EPE ESRA plone bie detent 3 11 Usine Envelopes ie i bb be ib bl b 3 13 M idu 3 15 Fegi 3 16 Face Down Print Dele uses toe des 3 17 Face Up Pont Delivety 3 17 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL DISK 4 1 DISPLAY AND LAMPS 4 1 4 1 Printer Status onin 4 2 A 4 4 READT u 4 4 DA m 4 4 abe ance Rieda knis 4 4 ON LENE 4 4 F DOWN Switch ae MODE Switch p in HP is EPSON FX 850 Proprinter XL Modes 4 8 MODE Switch Settings in BR Script 4 11 MODE Switch Settings HP GL Mode 4 13 Basic Operation Procedures iu seas reet jissa tt is 4 18 Operation Example Selecting the Parallel Interface 4 16 FORMAT MODE AUTO MODE ai BUZZER SETTING ib AR er pet M FONT Switch the Font and l Ch acter Set in the EPSON FX 850 or IBM Proprister XL 4 54 List of iksi kai ens A M
37. A S 35 v 31l 431 lt 041 TINO 1G31 1 0 webera AYNI god 1 1044409 OL xipueddy 91999 38748 0007792 ML Y Sly Idl8vdd wv ed 201 65 2710 p 0 Mie MST Sp 114 SdS LEN 1 Ag 089 vi 1 3001 ETA U 14 12 1 Xl MSI ABT OLY 792 9 L 8StUl va M9t01 VS Lg 0 68 8SE01V8 AS L L Ayn god 1euueos L xipueddy Brother Laser Printer HL 1260e HL 1660 series USER S GUIDE Il Trademarks Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries Ltd Apple and LaserWriter are registered trademarks and TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc Centronics is a trademark of Genicom Corporation EPSON is a registered trademark and FX 850 and FX 80 are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation Hewlett Packard HP and PCL are registered trademarks and HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet 4 HP LaserJet Plus HP LaserJet II HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP GL HP GL 2 and Bi Tronics are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company IBM Proprinter XL Proprinter and IBM PC are registered trademarks of I
38. Add SIMM memorv with power off Download font and the fonts saved in the HDD card might cause the error for it occupies the same work area as the RAM Memorv expansion is recommended in that case See page 5 7 When the serial interface is used check the communications parameters such as baud rate code tvpe paritv and handshake protocols When the parallel interface is used check the interface cable connection Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again 7 3 USER S GUIDE 7 4 Message 42 CAR 43 CAR 45 FULL D W ERROR 44 SIMM ERROR ERROR OPT ERROR CARI D R ERROR XX SIZE ERROR IGNORE DATA BR Script 2 mode only Meaning Card overflow Card write error Incorrect installation of SIMMs Error in communication with the MIO card Connection error with optional feeders and duplex unit Card read error Paper of incorrect size is loaded into XX XX is T2 DX Data is ignored because of an error in the PostScript language program Action Delete unnecessary macros or fonts or use a new card See page 4 32 Set the write protect switch of the card to OFF if it has been set to ON Use a new card If the same error occurs consult your dealer or service personnel Install SIMMs correctly referring to the printed error message See page 5 7 Install the MIO card correctly See page
39. Bohr a ANN E21 gt 2 201 Id a 93 vxegt ASt 138Av2 201 I C8520 CTS MAPITILG TID ELAH MAPTTILI 910 OCT AH MAPITOLG LO C920 aver oval 99 Qv2 v2 AL0 278 72 ObB VD 5460 EPIO ser eNS123n3 As ASt 193r30z MOSN3S 12373 02 12d 870 90 ttre AWTTILI Les WAVTTOLE ero 1 MAPTTILI ero 2 80 l 90 8v0 vQ ENVA tee 654620 APTTILI 920 370 76 EM IRL MAPTTILI 60 ILAH Ivl vD D SSESST 5912 920 J cesto ver 1 MdNV4NIS Td l138Av7C L 10540 IMWA L3MAPZH MdNV4Md MOd 814 r 2 519373 55 acg 313 55 ALISN3 978 78 803 75 QE0 0 913 85 960 98 58 QE0 0 203 07 aeg 113 T7 THO 21 60 0 201 25 1 20 83ELAH 1 BINOL 82d NI Ave Ave X20 Ave 13535 d0 Evan ALISN3G 83ELAH EUINOL Ta3NOL
40. Dirt on the 3 Is there any dirt on the transfer roller transfer roller 9V to OV for about 0 8 seconds Clean the contact to assure the continuity Replace the high voltage power supply PCB assy Clean the fixing unit inlet guide Ensure the grounding Replace the fixing unit Dirt on power supply terminal Clean the transfer roller right end bearing the check continuity between the transfer roller power supply spring and the terminal of the Failure in the eue high voltage transfer unit Is there continuity transfer high voltage circuit Dirt the fixing Is there any dirt on the fixing unit inlet guide guide Fixing roller 7 Arethe upper and lower rollers of the fixing grounding failure unit securely connected to the chassis via the diode Fixing unit failure VI 7 1 7 l 8 Black vertical streaks or Blurred vertical line damaged Are there vertical stripes on the drum EP ED cartridge During a printing open the toner cartridge lid Y EP ED id in the printer and pull out the EP ED cartridge zi Zeus Fixing unit Open the drum shutter of the EP ED cartridge and check the toner image on the drum Replace the fixing unit l 9 Black and thin horizontal streaks 1 Beam detection Replace the scanner unit or error the harness and if the problem is not resolved replace the main PCB assv Black and blurred horizontal stripes Drum or charging 1 Do stripes appea
41. M3X6 UH1466001 FEEDER ROLLER ASSY OP UH2960000 BEARING S 048040346 RETAINING RING E4 UH2821001 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 UH1487001 PAPER ROLLER COLLAR LOW UH1477001 COLLAR STOPPER UH1494001 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 5 UH2366000 BEARING 085320616 TAPTITE BIND M3X6 UH1497001 BEARING R 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2967000 SPRING EXTENSION UH1565001 PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2369001 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2911000 PAPER EMPTY SENSOR ACTUATOR UH2381000 PE ACTUATOR LINK UH2913000 FRONT COVER GRAY1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2918001 PAPER PATH FILM UH2914000 SIDE COVER L GRAY1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2915000 SIDE COVER R GRAY1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2957000 FRONT STIFFENER CHASSIS 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2958000 FRONT CHASSIS 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2959000 GUIDE PLATE RELEASE PLATE L UH2356000 UH2409000 RELEASE PLATE MODEL LT 2000 54T X01 630 TI NO PR99087 8 COVERS 99088 REFNO DESCRIPTION LLL 011206500 UPPER COVER ASSY GRAY UH2071001 1 TONER CARTRIDGE LID GRAY1227 UH2072001 1 FONT COVER ASSY GRAY1227 UH2076001 1 JCLEANER BRUSH UH2077001 1 SIDE COVER L GRAY1227 UH2027001 1 SIDE COVER R2 ASSY GRAY1227 UH2082001 1 COVER ASSY GRAY1227 HL 1660 UH2104001 1 COVER ASSY GRAY1227 TMT 17 UH2085001 1 CHANGEOVER GUIDE GRAY1227 UH2103001 1 R
42. Press the A or V switch to scroll through the menus forward or backward Pressing the MODE switch allows forward scroll INTERFACE MODE or A FORMAT MODE lt or A RESOLUTION MODE lt or A gt e Press the SET switch to enter the next lower menu level of the selected menu Mode Menu SET Setting Menu SET Sub Setting Menu Press the or W switch to select the setting on the display I FZPARALLEL lt Y or A I F RS 232C V or I FZOPTION Y or A gt e Press the SET switch to make the selected setting effective Then you move to the next selection or exit to the upper menu level When you see exit and press the SET switch you can exit from the current level of menu to the next higher level of the menu Advance to exit MODE and press the SET switch to exit from the mode menus to the off line ready state Pressing the SEL switch any time in any level of the menus allows you to exit from the mode menus to the on line state The settings you have made with the SET switch before exit are effective USER GUIDE Operation Example Selecting the Parallel Interface For this session select the parallel interface manually as follows 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Press the MODE switch The display shows the first menu INTERFACE MODE 3 Press the SET switch When you enter the interface mode the display first shows the current interfa
43. Ventilate the room where you use the printer Do not place the printer where it is exposed to direct sunlight Use a blind or a heavy curtain to protect the printer from direct sunlight if the printer is unavoidably set up near a window Do not install the printer near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields Do not subject the printer to strong physical shocks or vibrations Do not expose the printer to open flames or salty or corrosive gasses Place the printer on a flat horizontal surface Keep the printer clean Do not install the printer in a dusty place Do not install the printer near an air conditioner 2 4 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED SETTING UP THE PRINTER Opening and Closing the Printer To install the toner cartridge or to access the paper path vou need to open the top cover of the printer Remember the following steps to open and close the printer To open the printer hold both sides of the top cover and raise it upwards until it latches Fig 2 5 Opening the Top Cover To close the printer lower the top cover and push both sides gently until it latches Fig 2 6 Closing the Top Cover 2 5 USER S GUIDE Removing the Protective Parts After checking that you have all of the correct parts temporarily place the printer where vou can easilv reach all sides Remove the protective parts that secure the printer against damage during transportation as
44. When the engine controller circuit receives a print signal PRINT or a pre feed signal PRFD from the video controller circuit the engine controller circuit drives the main motor to rotate the photosensitive drum After the drum surface is charged negativelv bv the primarv charge roller the laser beam modulated by DATA signal scans the drum surface to from a latent image on the drum The latent image formed on the drum surface is converted into a visible image by the toner on the developing cylinder and then image is transferred onto the paper by the transfer roller unit Then the residual toner is removed from the drum surface with the cleaner blade The cartridge also has a toner sensor When the output from this sensor falls below a certain level it warns that the EP ED cartridge will be out of toner with an alarm Scanner unit Reflection mirror Laser beam EP ED cartridge Transfer roller Scanner motor drive signal SDRIVE Laser diode drive signal DATA Primary charge AC drive HV1AC Main Primary charge DC drive HV1DC High voltage PCB Developing bias AC drive DBAC ecd supply Developing bias DC drive DBDC Transfer charger 1 drive HVT1 Transfer charger 2 drive HVT2 Transfer charger 3 drive HVT3 Transfer charger 4 drive HVT4 Toner sensor signal 1 TONER 1 Toner sensor signal 2 TONER 2 Figure 2 17 Il 11 4 PAPER PICK UP FEED SVSTEM 4 1 Outline
45. if the problem is not resolved replace the scanner unit LD failure the harness Failure in the charging high voltage circuit VI 6 5 Polka dots Failure in static 1 Is there any dirt on the static charge eliminator Yes Clean the static charge charge eliminator eliminator Static charge 2 1 1 continuity between the static charge Y Ensure the grounding of the eliminator eliminator and the chassis static charge eliminator grounding failure es Dirt on the Does print quality improve when the transfer Yes Clean the transfer roller Use dry transfer roller roller is replaced lint free paper producing little paper dust to clean the transfer roller Never use solvents and if the dirt remains replace the transfer roller assy l 6 Dirt on back of paper Dirt on the 1 Is there anv dirt on the back of the paper feed Clean the PF guide or the PF guide guide and the jam remove cover near the static jam remove cover charge Open the toner cartridge lid in the printer pull Go to Step 6 out the EP ED cartridge and remove the paper in the printer Is there alreadv dirt on the back of the sheet thus Clean the transfer roller and if the dirt remains replace the transfer roller assv i 5 Transfer input 4 Doesthe voltage at the 6 pin HVT1 of the No Replace the main PCB assy signal error connector P6 on the main PCB change from or the harness 5 No Yes
46. 0 is automatically added to the end of the bar code data When FIM US Post Net is selected with the parameter t3 or Characters A to are valid and 1 digit of data can be printed Uppercase and lowercase alphabet characters can be accepted When Post Net US Post Net is selected with the parameter 44 or TA Characters 0 to 9 can be data and it must be terminated by a check digit 2 be used in place of the check digit Appendix 72 APPENDICES e When 8 EAN 13 or UPC A is selected with the parameter t5 or 5 Ten numerical characters 0 to 9 can be accepted as bar code data The number of characters for bar codes is limited as follows EAN 8 Total 8 digits 7 digits 1 check digit EAN 13 Total 13 digits 12 digits 1 check digit UPC A Total 12 digits 11 digits 1 check digit A number of characters other than above causes data error and the bar code data is printed as normal print data If the check digit is incorrect the printer calculates the correct check digit automatically so that the correct bar code data will be printed When EAN 13 is selected adding and a 2 or 5 digit number after the data can create an add on code When UPC E is selected with the parameter t6 or T6 The numerical characters 0 to 9 can be accepted as bar code data 1 8 digits Standard format The first char
47. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 MODEL HL 1260e 54 001 630 NO PR97037 PR97131 PR98001 PR98202 PR99087 PR99087 12 PAPER FEEDER MODEL HL 1660 TMT 17 54T U02 630 97 P049 PR97037 PR97131 PR98202 PR99087 12 PAPER FEEDER PR99087 REFNO LUQUE DESCRIPTION REMARK mele 0282400 PADDLED DER ETA UN WITH PCB SW SPRING SCREW PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 MP PAPER DETECTION ACTUATOR TAPTITE BIND B M3X8 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR BEARING TAPTITE BIND S M3X6 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 60 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 70 WASHER PLAIN BEARING TAPTITE BIND S M3X6 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID TAPTITE BIND S M3X4 BEARING CALLOR TRAY SENSOR HOLDER PE SENSOR ACTUATOR TRAY PE ACTUATOR LINK DU DETECTION ACTUATOR PE SENSOR ACTUATOR MP REGIST SENSOR ACTUATOR LATCH MP PAPER FEED GUIDE ASSY SP SEPARATION PAD ASSY SEPARATION PAD SPRING MP MP TRAY ASSY MP PE SUB ACTUATOR MP TRAY COVER MP EXTENSION TRAY SPACER MP PAPER GUIDE MP RELEASE PLATE MP RELEASE SUPPORTER MP SPRING PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR 30 RELEASE PLATEL RELEASE PLATE R UH2357001 087320616 UH2359000 085310815 UH2362001 UH2364001 UH2366000 085320616 UH2416001 UH2367001 010633000 UH2366000 085320616 UH2369001 085320416 UH2428000 UH2379000 UH2380000 UH2381000 UH2382000 UH2383000 UH2384000 UH2136001 UH2797
48. 19 The ADM202JRN 35 serves as driver receiver SIMM block SIMM Single Inline Memory Module allows memory extension up to 72MB 2 SIMM sockets are available SIMM should be of 72 pin type and its access time should be less than 70 ns 6 types of SIMM 1MB 2MB 4MB and 8MB can be combined 1MB MH25632BJ 7 MITSUBISHI HB56D25632B 7A HITACHI 2MB MH51232BJ 7 MITSUBISHI HB56D51232B 7A HITACHI 4MB MH1M32EJ 7 MITSUBISHI HB56A132BT 7A HITACHI 8MB MH2M32EJ 7 MITSUBISHI HB56A232BT 7A HITACHI 1 SIMMs have its printed marking on the PCB by silk screen SLOT1 and SLOT2 respectively The SIMMs should be set in the order of SLOT1 SLOT3 III 2 3 The attached Printer SIMM map shows the memory map for 4 SIMMs combined ROM block ROMs store the CPU control program and font data ROMs two 32Mbit masked ROMs Optional sockets are available for two 8Mbit EPROM uPD27C8000DZ 120 NEC or equivalent for expansion ROM access time should be less than 120nsec DRAM block DRAMs are used for receiving buffer or working area of the CPU The DRAM block contains four 16Mbit DRAMs thus having 8MB memory capacity in total The refreshing method is CBR Cas Before Ras DRAM access time should be less than 80nsec 3 0000_0000 There are 4 CS terminals for CSROM 0 CSROM 3 0040 0000 2MB or 4MB is selectable from CSROM 0 CSROM 2 0080 0000 If the both are selected it wil
49. 5 Select FAX MODEM ON by pressing the W switch Default setting is OFF Caution When setting FAX MODEM ZON the RS 232C serial interface is used only for the fax function The printer cannot receive normal print data via the serial interface If you want to use the RS 232C interface for sending print data set FAX 6 Turn off the printer 7 Connect the External Fax Modem to the printer referring to the figure below External Fax Gender Changer IN y Serial Interface 2 RS 232C for z AZ 1 c Z Fig 1 External Fax Modem Connector OPERATION MANUAL gt Note For detailed setup procedure of the External Fax Modem refer to the user s guide supplied with the External Fax Modem 8 Turnon the External Fax Modem 9 Turn on the printer Caution Once installation is completed be sure to turn on the External Fax Modem before turning on the printer so that the printer recognizes the modem OPERATION MANUAL Settings on the Control Panel Xou can make some settings for the fax functions on the printer control panel as in the following steps 1 Press SEL switch to make the printer off line 2 Press the switch to enter the Menu Then INTERFACE is displayed first Press the A or W switch until ADVANCED MODE is displayed Press the SET switch Press the
50. Compatible 8 switches 4 lamps and 16 column liquid crystal display Self diagnostic program APPENDICES Electrical and Mechanical Power Source U S A and Canada AC 110 to 120 V 60 Hz Europe and Australia AC 220 to 240 V 50 Hz Power Consumption lt HL 1260e gt Printing 290 W or less Stand by 75 W or less Stand by in sleep mode 16 W or less lt HL 1660 1660e gt Printing 340 W or less Stand by 75 W or less Stand by in sleep mode 16 W or less Noise lt HL 1260e gt Printing 49 dB A or less Stand by 40 dB A or less lt HL 1660 1660e gt Printing 52 dB A or less Stand by 45 dB A or less Temperature Operating 10 to 32 5 C 50 F to 90 5 F Storage 0 to 35 C 38 F to 95 F Humidity Operating 20 to 80 without condensation Storage 10 to 80 without condensation Dimensions W x H x D 371 6 x 326 5 x 393 mm 14 8 x 12 9 x 15 5 inches 371 6 x 446 5 x 393 mm 14 8 x 17 6 x 15 5 inches with an optional lower tray unit fitted Weight Approx 15 kg 33 165 Approx 21 0 kg 46 3 16 with optional lower tray unit and toner cartridge fitted Appendix 3 USER GUIDE PAPER SPECIFICATIONS Paper Input Cassettes Standard upper cassette Tray 1 Optional lower cassette Tray 2 Paper size TRAY 1 Letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive 5 ISO B6 10 Monarch C5 and DL 2 Letter legal A4 and Executive OPTION e Max stacking height in the cassette 55 mm 2 1
51. D pd US ROMAN ATLANTA COPENHAGEN PORTUGAL CALGARY Font Scalable Brougham Scalable LetterGothic Bitmapped OCR A 12 cpi Bitmapped OCR B 12 cpi Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16 66 cpi Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16 66 cpi ISO 8859 1 Latin2 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16 66 cpi ISO 8859 1 Latin5 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16 66 cpi ISO 8859 1 Latin6 Scalable PC Tennessee Scalable Oklahoma Scalable Connecticut Scalable Cleveland Condensed Scalable PC Brussels Scalable Utah Scalable Utah Condensed Scalable Antique Oakland Scalable Guatemala Antique Scalable Maryland Scalable Alaska Scalable Helsinki Scalable BR Symbol Scalable Tennessee Scalable W Dingbats Scalable Germany Scalable San Diego Scalable Bermuda Script Scalable US Roman Scalable Atlanta Scalable Copenhagen Scalable Portugal Scalable Calgary 4 59 USER GUIDE 4 60 List of Symbol Character Sets The svmbol sets and character sets are subject to the current emulation mode For specific symbol character sets see 5 SETS in Appendix HP LaserJet ROMAN 8 ISO LATINI ISO LATIN2 ISO LATIN5 ISO LATING PC 775 PC 8 PC 8 D N 850 852 8 TURKISH PC 1004 WINDOWS LATINI WINDOWS LATIN2 WINDOWS LATIN5 WI NDOWS BALTIC EGAL ISO 2 IRV ISO 4 UK ISO 6 ASCII 1501 1501 1501 1501 1501 1501 15021 GERMAN 165025
52. DARK Set the high resolution control to the dark level The following figures show jagged print with the high resolution control set to OFF on the left and clear and crisp print with the control set to MEDIUM on the right gt ABC ABC HRC OFF HRC MEDIUM Fig 4 5 High Resolution Control CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL The high resolution control has been factory set to MEDIUM The LIGHT or DARK setting might be better depending on the selected print density Choose the best setting for clear and crisp printouts To check the printout with the high resolution control perform the test print with the TEST switch For operation see TEST Switch When you perform TEST PRINT the printer prints the test pattern including a block of lines If the high resolution control is OFF the lines in the test pattern are unsmoothed or stepped as shown in the left figure below The pattern will be smoother if the high resolution control is set to LIGHT MEDIUM or DARK Choose an HRC setting and perform the test print so that stepped lines become unnoticeable Ze HRC OFF HRC MEDIUM Fig 4 6 High Resolution Control in Test Printout P
53. Figure 2 20 Il 14 4 4 Paper Jam Detection The printer has a registration sensor and paper eject sensor at the paper outlet to detect whether the printed paper has been fed correctly A paper jam is detected by whether the paper is present at the sensor at the check periods programmed in the engine CPU memory If the engine CPU detects a paper jam the main motor paper feed motor and scanner motor is turned off immediately and the jam status is transmitted to the video controller circuit A paper jam is detected in any of following conditions 1 Paper exists at the paper ejection sensor or the registration sensor when power is switched on JAM REAR or JAM INSIDE 2 Paper has not reached the registration sensor within a specified time JAM TRAYS 3 Printed paper has not passed through the registration sensor within a specified time JAM Jam tray Main motor Pick up solenoid Registration sensor Jam check INSIDE 1 4 Printed paper has not reached the paper ejection sensor within a specified time JAM INSIDE 2 5 Printed paper has not passed through the paper ejection sensor within a specified time JAM REAR STBY PRINT 3 75 me 3 75 sec Jam Figure 2 21 Jam inside 1 STBY PRINT Main motor Paper feed motor Registration sensor Jam check 3 67 sec Jam 3 67 sec a Normal Figure 2 22 Il 15 inside 2 STBY PRINT Main motor Paper feed
54. HP Letter Portrait LINES 64L 5 to 128 lines page HP AA Portrait X OFFSET 0 500 left to 500 right dots Y OFFSET 0 500 down to 500 up dots exit Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE exit Exit to FORMAT MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION 300 or 600 dpi HRC SETTING HRC MEDIUM OFF LIGHT MEDIUM or DARK exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE PROTECT AUTO AUTO OFF LETTER 4 or LEGAL When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the HDD card exit Exit to CARD OPERATION 49 USER GUIDE Mode Menu Continued CARD OPERATION mode See 4 32 ADVANCED MODE See 4 41 PAGE COUNTER See 4 48 exit MODE 4 48 Setting Menu Sub Setting Menu Setting When the commercial flash memorv card or the HDD card has been formatted EXECUTE DATA CARD LIST SAVE DELETE exit NETWORK MODE CONTINUE MODE BUZZER SETTING SCALABLE FONT PRINT DENSITV INPUT BUFFER SAVE SETTINGS exit COUNT 0 DATA 1 exit SAVE DATA SET gt END DATA ID SAVE MACRO MACRO PRIMARV FONT FONT ID HHH E SECONDARY FONT FONT ID HHHHE DOWNLOAD FONT FONT ID HHHE exit MACRO 1 DATA FONT FORMAT CARD SET gt DELETE ALL exit LOCK PANEL OFF PASS NO AUTO FF OFF WAIT TIME 5s FF SUPPRESS OFF TONER LOW CONT exit CONTINUE MANUAL BUZZER ON FONT ALL BAREN OOOO S
55. HP GL mode 4 68 HP LaserJet mode 4 67 HP mode 4 67 I IBM Proprinter XL mode 4 68 input buffer 4 46 interface 1 5 interface mode 4 17 Index 2 K KEEP PCL function 4 66 L lamps 4 4 landscape 4 20 language 3 8 LaserJet mode 4 67 left margin 4 23 left side cover 5 8 line feed pitch 4 25 line spacing 4 25 lines page 4 25 lines per page 4 23 list of optional fonts 4 85 list of panel switch settings 4 85 list of permanent download fonts 4 85 list of resident fonts 4 85 lock panel 4 42 lock your settings 1 8 lower paper cassette 3 11 lower tray unit 1 10 5 1 M macro 4 37 manual feed 3 16 manual feed mode 4 73 margin 4 24 media type 4 74 memory 1 6 5 7 memory modules 1 10 MIO card 1 10 4 19 5 6 MIO card slot 2 3 MIO interface 1 5 4 19 MIO interface slot 5 6 MODE switch 4 7 modular input output MIO interface 5 6 modular jack for options 2 3 MP FIRST mode 4 72 MP tray setting 4 73 multi purpose tray 2 3 2 15 3 11 N network mode 4 41 NORMAL mode 3 9 4 5 number of copies 4 77 number of printed pages 4 48 off line 4 5 on line 4 5 ON LINE lamp 4 4 operator call message 7 1 optional fonts 5 4 optional interface 4 19 options l 10 orientation 4 20 page format mode 4 23 page protection 4 32 paper access cover 6 7 7 10 paper capacitv 3 12 paper cassette l 5 2 11 3 15 paper exit 7 7
56. M5 Phillips screwdriver M3 M5 Phillips screwdriver M4 M5 Phillips screwdriver M4 M5 Flat blade screwdriver Precision flat blade screwdriver Allen wrench set File fine Allen hex screwdriver Diagonal cutting pliers Needle nose pliers Pliers Snap ring pliers ext 19 30 mm Crimper Tweezers Ruler Mallet plastic head Brush Penlight Bottle plastic Solder Desoldering wick Oiler Jar plastic Digital logic tester Digital multimeter Soldering iron Digital memory scope or syncroscope 100 MHz or over ROM remover 4 LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND CLEANERS Material name Components Table 5 3 Use Remarks Alcohol ethyl pure or denatured or isopropyl pure or denatured MEK methyl ethyl ketone Lubricating oil silicon grease KS64F C H OH CHOH CH CO C H Cleaning of plastic rubber and external parts Cleaning for oil and toner stains For fuser Purchase locally Purchase locally Highly flammable keep away from flame Tool ZX 43D Equivalent oil may be used Lubricating oil Moly kote EM 30L For drive mechanism Tool No ZX 43N Equivalent oil may be used CHAPTER VI TROUBLESHOOTING 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Initial Check 1 Operating environment Check if 1 The source voltage stays within 10 from the rating voltage shown on the rating label 2 The
57. Spanish 25 ISO 17 Spanish 35 ISO 10 Swedish 45 ISO 16 Portuguese 55 ISO 84 Portuguese 65 ISO 85 Spanish 0G HP German 1G ISO 21 German 0 ISO 60 Norwegian 1 1D ISO 61 Norwegian 2 0 ISO 25 French 1 ISO 69 French ISO 14 JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57 Chinese 9U Windows 3 0 Latin 12 MC Text 19M Symbol 19L Windows Baltic 579L Wingdings These symbol sets are variations of the Roman 8 symbol set Appendix 37 USER GUIDE QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS The following tables show commands sorted bv function For further information about commands refer to the Technical Reference Manual which is optionally available ee Note l represents the lowercase letter Script notation is used because lowercase and the number 1 can be easily confused with each other HP LaserJet Mode PCL Command Sets Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal CONTROL CODE Backspace BS 08 08 Horizontal Tab HT 09 09 Line Feed LF 10 0A Form Feed FF 12 0C Carriage Return CR 13 0 Secondarv Font Select SO 14 Primarv font Select SI 15 ESC 27 1B PAGE FORMAT Page Length ESC amp 27 38 108 80 1B 26 6C 50 lines Top Margin ESC amp E 27 38 108 69 1B 26 6C 45 ff lines Text Length ESC amp 27 38 108 70 1B 26 6C 46 lines Left Margin ES
58. USER GUIDE Appendix 70 Bar Code Human Readable Line On or Off n 0 or Human readable line OFF rl or R1 Human readable line Default Human readable line ON 1 TS or 5 2 or 6 3 T130 or t130 4 T131 t131 Default Human readable line OFF others This parameter specifies whether or not the printer prints the human readable line below the bar code Human readable characters are alwavs printed with OCR B font of 10 pitch and all the current character stvle enhancements are masked Note that the default setting is subject to the bar code mode selected 4 or Quiet Zone onnn Onnn nnn 0 32767 Quiet Zone is the space on both side of the bar codes Its width can be specified using the units which are set by the of U parameter For the description of u U parameter see the next section The default setting of Quiet Zone width is 1 inch Bar Code Expanded Character Unit Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing n 00 or UO Millimeters default n ul or U1 1 10 n u2 or U2 1 100 n 03 or U3 1 12 u4 or U4 1 120 n u5 or U5 1 10 Millimeters n u6 or U6 1 3007 n 07 U7 1 7207 This parameter specifies the measurement units of X axis off
59. a SSA Ae 22 SSA 224 22 SSA 224 501 L PVS9T8TTSHH L PVS9T8TTSHH oce e oo co o A 12 1 0 EAZI 02 1 0 12 1 0 N3MN 40 0 9 01 980 600 INSYI ILB 0 11 001 880 0 1 1 11 107 1T 21 6 8 L A 9 5 Y 2 9 Kano Od Z xipueddy 2 9 19 96 0689 00018451 801 10 0 IM NUMWGI 1 038 T NUMOIII 9v8 v8 30 NOHTI 9 0 301 2035 01030109 90 10 88 9574 H 102 WIL 14V241284S IWTOSH gt LIES PENTAN SEED 060 NuMINVO 98 TOY Visa 160 10 NASLUVI 05 eg 16 NSTIILIVI 58 0793 11 I gi a NI2399 11 N3SQNVO 15 160 NSINILUVI ee 0093 QIT 0 060 NSVLUVI NSY24 2011 60 L 20 ra 98309 38 7 fo IgNIV2d BIl B NUR
60. another tray will be selected according to the command or the FEEDER setting CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL You can set FIRST ON so that you can use the MP tray paper first until it becomes empty and then switch to other paper sources which hold the same size of paper You can set MP FIRST ON for this purpose only when all the trays hold the same type and size of paper When the MP tray paper size is different from paper in other trays you must not select ON if you do not want to use MP tray paper 2 Press the SET switch MANUAL FEED The display shows manual feed mode with an asterisk as follows MANUAL FEED OFF 1 Press the A or V switch to turn the manual feed mode on or off 2 Press the SET switch to make the setting effective gt Note When you select the MANUAL note that the feeder set in the FEEDER HHH menu is ignored and the manual feed mode from the multi purpose tray is selected You must set MANUAL FEED OFF so that the feeder selection in the FEEDER menu can be effective MP TRAY SETTING 1 The display then shows the MP tray setting menu Press the SET switch to enter this menu Then the display shows the current paper size setting for the multi purpose tray with an asterisk MP SIZE LETTER USER GUIDE 2 Press the tray 9 Note When you select the multi purpose tray as a paper so
61. at low temperature and humidity the charge on the back of the paper is reduced by the static charge eliminator after transfer 3 24 Fixing stage The toner image transferred to the paper in the transfer stage is held only by electrostatic attraction and slight physical adhesion so even a light touch will smear the image In the fixing stage the toner image is fixed by heating the paper and applying pressure This fuses the toner particles to the paper to make a permanent image Step6 Fixing Halogen heater Upper fixing roller Toner Paper Lower fixing roller Figure 2 15 The upper roller surface is PFA coated The upper and lower roller surfaces are grounded via a diode to prevent the negative potential of the upper roller becoming higher than that of the lower roller resulting in the toner being drawn to the lower roller and adhering to the lower roller surface 3 2 5 Drum cleaning stage In the transfer stage not all the toner is transferred to the paper Some remains on the photosensitive drum This residual toner is cleaned off in the drum cleaning stage so that the next print image will be clear Step 7 Drum cleaning Cleaning blade Cleaner container Sweeper strip Figure 2 16 Prior to the next printing the residual toner on the drum surface is scraped away by the cleaning blade to clean the drum surface The removed toner is collected in the cleaner container Il 10 3 3 Operation
62. of Lines Page The setting of lines page is subject to the current paper size and orientation For example when letter sized paper is used the printer can print 60 lines per page in portrait orientation If the orientation is changed the line settings are restored to the factory settings in that orientation The following tables show the factory settings in each emulation mode Mode In Non HP Modes Orientation Orientation Portrait Landscape Size Portrait Landscape 60 lines 45 lines Letter 62 lines 47 lines 64 lines 43 lines A4 66 lines 45 lines 78 lines 45 lines Legal 80 lines 47 lines 9 Note When you use application software in the non HP modes the recommended settings are as follows Left margin column 0 Right margin Max value Auto MASK ON GRAPHICS MODE gt Note The settings in this mode menu are effective only in the HP GL mode They do not appear in any other emulation modes Since the HP GL emulation mode is for a plotter you can select the plotter pens the pen size and percentage of gray in this mode menu 4 25 USER GUIDE 4 26 Displav Message Graphics Mode PEN SETTING Set the size and percentage of gray separately for six plotter pens CHARACTER SET Set the standard and alternate character sets 9 Note In most cases the application software controls the above graphics mode settings so you do not need to set them in this menu with the MODE switch
63. paper feed method 4 71 paper guide 6 7 PAPER IN setting 4 74 paper jam 7 6 paper path selector guide 3 17 paper size 3 12 paper source 3 12 4 71 paper type 3 12 paper width guide 2 15 parallel interface 1 5 4 18 parallel interface port 2 18 parity 4 19 pass number 4 42 PCMCIA compatible flash memory card 1 9 pen setting 4 26 pen size 4 26 portrait 4 20 PostScript language emulation 4 68 power cord 2 19 power cord connector 2 3 power save mode 4 69 power saving mode 1 8 power switch 2 3 2 20 primary font 4 50 print density 4 46 print start position 4 23 printer driver 3 1 INDEX printer emulation 3 1 printer settings 3 10 4 86 printer status message 4 2 printer test 4 86 protective parts 2 6 Q quick exit switch 4 6 R READY lamp 4 4 rear access cover 2 3 7 8 rear paper slit 3 17 reprint 1 9 4 61 reset mode 4 78 RESET switch 4 78 resolution 1 4 4 29 resolution mode 4 28 right margin 4 23 robust Xon 4 19 RS 232C interface 1 5 RS 232C serial interface connector 2 3 S scalable font 4 45 secondary font 4 50 SEL switch 4 5 self diagnosis 2 20 serial interface 1 5 4 18 serial interface port 2 18 service call message 7 5 SET switch 4 6 shades of gray 1 4 4 26 SHIFT mode 3 9 SHIFT switch 4 64 side paper stop 2 13 SIMM 5 8 simplex printing 4 75 single in line memory modules SIMMs 5 7 sizes of
64. signals 1 BASIC OPERATIONS 1 1 Mechanical Configuration The printer functions can be divided into four blocks the laser scanner system the image formation system the paper pick up feed system and the control system Optional I O Font cartridge card MIO Expansion memory SIMM Main PCB External Device Control panel CONTROL SYSTEM IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Laser scanner unit Photosensitive drum LASER SCANNER i 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 i Cleaning unit Developing i unit 1 i i 1 i 1 SYSTEM Mb ee UE ee m Ces te E ON PN a a ace o p G 5 2 E LL 2 1 1 1 2 Drive The power necessary for driving the printer is supplied by the main motor the paper feed motor and the scanner motor The main motor is controlled by the main motor drive signal MDRIVE output from the main PCB and the paper feed motor is controlled by the paper feed motor drive signal output from the main PCB and the scanner motor is controlled by the scanner motor drive signal SDRIVE output from the main PCB Main motor T Main motor drive signal MDRIVE Main PCB INA Drum gear Photosensitive drum Paper deliverv rollers m m u Fixing unit Paper feed motor Paper feed motor drive signal r A MP tray pick up roller solenoid drive sign
65. t9 or T9 Codabar n t12 or T12 n t13 or T13 14 or 14 n t130 or T130 n t131 T131 132 or T132 n t133 or T133 n 134 or T134 Code 128 set A Code 128 set B Code 128 set C ISBN EAN ISBN UPC E EAN 128 set A EAN 128 set B EAN 128 set C This parameter selects the bar code mode as above When n is t5 or T5 the bar code mode EAN 8 EAN 13 or UPC A varies according to the number of characters in the data APPENDICES Bar Code Expanded Character Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing n s0 SO 3 1 default n s1 or 1 2 1 n 53 or 53 2 5 1 This parameter selects the bar code stvle as above When the 8 EAN 13 UPC A Code 128 or EAN 128 bar code mode is selected this bar code stvle parameter is ignored Expanded Character S 0 White 1 Black 2 Vertical stripes 3 Horizontal stripes 4 Cross hatch eg S nl n2 nl Background fill pattern n2 Foreground fill pattern If S is followed by only one parameter the parameter is a foreground fill pattern Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing S 1 Black 2 Vertical stripes 3 Horizontal stripes 4 Cross hatch Bar Code n mnnn or Mnnn nnn 0 32767 This parameter specifies the bar code width The unit of nnn is B Appendix 69
66. vLAH MLO 880 dW3ad g 680 13d 7 080 g 280 101042 5 8 11015 Q88 NIIS TT 1 0 10 98H24 g 860 0 1 NY T7 16 1 BT 68 THINOL 57 azg 090 10540 38 IL0 IL0 IL0 Let NLIV 1215 1 015 9 asg waste Ley Td TINA arik VILH 8ILH AZ 4 VILH ASt 1 Ave VILH dH3d 13d 93434d N3sdd 1SI93N 3593 Gees 3215 NaSant vazis 63715 537215 23215 13215 23215 1333 d d IT ar 13215 O 16 83CLAH 2 V9B I6B ALISN3I lt 388 v LAH gT 06 NOTANI cx lt 269 68 gt 3401 OVB 9B 7 11 60 NONASA NA IIS 5 aeg 4 4 NINONIV 3LB 11049 3L0 10018 3L0 NIIS 3L0 Q20 N2014 g2 2 0 4129 T2 89
67. 00 READY 001 1 When the multi purpose tray and the duplex printing mode have been selected the display may look as follows 00 READY 001 The black square indicates that duplex printing mode is selected When vou want to change settings with the FEEDER switch hold down the SHIFT switch and press the FEEDER switch You will then enter the setting mode where you change the feeder manual feed mode etc FEEDER To select the feeder follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the FEEDER switch When you enter the setting mode the display first shows the current feeder setting with the asterisk CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 3 Press the A or V switch until the desired feeder appears on the display Display Message Paper Feed Method Paper Source FEEDER AUTO Auto paper feed FEEDER MP TRAY Cassette feed from multi purpose tray MP tray FEEDER TRAVI Upper paper cassette Trav 1 FEEDER TRAY2 Lower paper cassette Tray 2 e Notes When you select a feeder note the following e The FEEDER TRAY2 message appears only when the optional lower tray unit has been installed The FEEDER AUTO setting allows you to optimize your printing environment This setting allows a print job to continue uninterrupted when a paper out condition occurs The default setting is AUTO This setting allows a
68. 050 0 31411403 EMS NMOQ ZMS N34 092 ter 526154 Cam TMS LIVM LIVM 6S gt 6H 22VW 3021 3021 lt 350 0 Le Lg Lvl sudo 4097 490 78 ON 89 98 9v NNMiNV2 990 02 6 lt 601218 2 990 ON as NSGNDLYVD MAO 5 lt ev 9159 990 on ev r8 is W 95 lt IV vv 1031 Sev 95 lt ay AQV38 9131 13838 13834 8s lt 7 isuaava_ caso r0 CANINO S037 nas 15 v18 X 3584405 Jo zdi Zada 2S1 31 cva 3 1909 stv 328UU0 1ddA X god 2002 s1a 00 91v x vado 918 X 8802 ctv 8802 118 1802 81v lt pus fms 5 5 jns 5 OMS co un o 01031 5 Wavy 8131 o A cji o ol e 22A WL E EQTCCE2VID 5 25794 OIM aa ac x INA Is 1 LV ASE talie 207 evvi sae zajec MAIL 58 20 e g va ear va v saj X IS zu za 8 sa 5 0 seq 19 9X
69. 085320616 UH2416001 UH2367001 010633000 UH2366000 085320616 UH2369001 085320416 UH2428000 UH2379000 UH2380000 UH2381000 UH2382000 UH2383000 UH2384000 UH2136001 UH2797000 UH2393001 UH2433001 UH2397001 UH2400000 UH2406000 UH2407000 UH2823001 UH2401000 UH2402000 UH2403000 UH2404000 UH2821001 UH2822001 UH2356000 UH2409000 imi ii 5 MODEL 1660 54 003 630 T I NO PR98202 PR99087 9 PAPER FEEDER MODEL HL 2060 54T U04 630 TI NO PR99087 9 PAPER FEEDER 99087 REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION VMBOL REMARK A UH1835001 UH1565001 087320616 085310815 UH2821001 UH1487001 UH1477001 UH2366000 085320616 UH1488001 UH1488001 010633000 UH2366000 085320616 UH2369001 085320416 UH2428000 UH2379000 UH2380000 UH2381000 UH2382000 UH2383000 UH2384000 UH2136001 UH1891001 UH2393001 UH2433001 UH2397001 UH2400000 UH2401000 UH2402000 UH2403000 UH2404000 UH2406000 UH2407000 UH2821001 UH1487001 UH1477001 UH1494001 UH2366000 085320616 UH1497001 085320616 UH1837001 UH2410000 087320616 UH1898001 UH2356000 UH2409000 NO PR99087 AH HSH Se Ss Ss Ss Ss a PO AMMIT OD gt H H PAPER FEED UNIT SP PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSV TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 TAPTITE BIND B M3X8 PAPER
70. 15057 CH 15060 NO ISO61 NO 15069 15084 POR 15085 SPANISH SPANISH VENTURA VENTURA INTL VENTURA US PS MATH PS TEXT MATH 8 PI FONT MS PUBLISHING WINDOWS 3 0 MC TEXT DESKTOP 11 Ret Fr mu WAAR O H D H D Z gt Note EPSON US ASC GERMAN UK ASCII FRENCH DANISH ITALY SPANISH SWEDISH JAPANESE NORWEGIAN DANISH II UK ASCII IBM 8 PC 8 D N PC 850 852 HL 1660e only HL 1660e only 860 863 865 8 TURKISH HL 1660e only FRENCH DUTCH SOUTH AFRI PC 8 PC 8 D N 850 852 860 863 865 8 HL 1660e only SH The factory settings are indicated by an asterisk in the table above CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL FORM FEED Switch REPRINT Switch The FORM FEED switch works in two wavs according to the DATA lamp status Form Feed When the printer is off line and there is data remaining in the printer memory the DATA lamp comes on Pressing the FORM FEED switch executes a form feed and prints out the remaining data The display may look as follows 01 PRINT 001 1 If you set the
71. 2060 USER S MANUAL ENG HL 1660e USER S MANUAL GER HL 1660e USER S MANUAL FRA HL 1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET ENG HL1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET GER HL1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET FRA HL1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET DUTCH HL1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET NOR HL1660e SIMM INSERTION SHEET ITA HL1660e CORE ESD SR 25 ASSY For USB REMARK MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 920 NO PR98072 PR98203 PR98204 PR98209 PR98263 PR98269 PR98274 PR98279 PR98280 PR98293 PR98310 PR98316 16 PACKING MATERIALS 54T U03 930 MODEL HL 1660e 17 OPTIONAL PARTS SET MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 940 16 PACKING MATERIALS REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK I 0 0367000 0 0637001 0 0638001 0 0370000 0 0373000 0 0374000 0 0476000 0 0376000 UH2735001 UH2736001 0 0396000 UE0477000 U63969000 U62092001 163528001 U04510001 X60267002 UH1440001 UH1441001 UH1442001 0 0405000 0 0406000 0 0425001 0 2741001 UH3373001 UH3295001 UH2499001 UH2498001 UH2477000 UH2820001 UH1778000 UH1772001 UH2823001 NO PR98065 LA LA lA LA lA LA LA Ss Ss se So a SS USAH CARTON C EUR H STYROFOAM PAD ASSY PAD CARTON TNR CARTRIDGE W EP ED CARTON TNR CARTRIDGE WO EP ED STYROFOAM PAD PLATE HOLDER RELEASE SPACER R RELEASE SPACER L PAD CONTROL PANEL BAG 900X800 BODY BAG 900X800 BS W HOLE BODY CAUTION LABE
72. 31 43 Function PATTERN Horizontal Size Horizontal Size Vertical Size Vertical Size Pattern ID Setting See note below 2 Gray 10 Gray 15 Gray 30 Gray 45 Gray 70 Gray 90 Gray 100 Gray ee Note Command ESC c A dot ESC c H decipoint ESC c B dot ESC c V decipoint ESC c G ID ESC c2G ESC c 10 G ESC c 15 G ESC c 30 G ESC c 45 G ESC c 70 G ESC c 90 G ESC c 100 G Decimal 27 42 99 65 27 42 99 72 27 42 99 66 27 42 99 86 27 42 99 71 27 42 99 50 71 27 42 99 49 48 71 27 42 99 49 53 71 27 42 99 51 48 71 27 42 99 52 53 71 27 42 99 55 48 71 27 42 99 57 48 71 27 42 99 49 48 48 71 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 1B 2A 63 41 1B 2A 63 48 1B 2A 63 42 1B 2A 63 56 1B 2A 63 71 1B 2A 63 32 47 1B 2A 63 31 30 47 1B 2A 63 31 35 47 1B 2A 63 33 30 47 1B 2A 63 34 35 47 1B 2A 63 37 30 47 1B 2A 63 39 30 47 1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47 These gray settings can be expressed in 64 shades with ESC v 130T and ESC 130 P Appendix 41 USER GUIDE Function 1 Horiz Line 2 Vert Lines 3 Diagonal Lines 4 Diagonal Lines 5 Square Grid 6 Diagonal Grid Print pattern Solid Black Erase Solid White Shaded Fill Cross hatched Fill User defined Current Pattern Brother defined Shading Fill 64 steps original Define Pattern User defined Pattern Control Delete Delete Temporarv Delete Current
73. 31 43 1B 28 73 31 32 43 1B 28 73 31 33 43 1B 28 73 31 34 43 1B 28 73 31 35 43 1B 28 73 31 36 43 1B 28 73 31 37 43 1B 28 73 31 38 43 1B 28 73 31 39 43 1B 28 73 32 30 43 1B 28 73 32 31 43 1B 28 73 33 37 43 Appendix 47 USER GUIDE Function PC 8 PC 8 D N 850 860 863 865 Fixed Pitch or P S Fixed P S Character Pitch Selection 1 Character Pitch Selection 2 10 Pitch 16 6 Pitch 12 Pitch Point Size Italics or upright Italics Upright Condensed Condensed Italic Compressed Extra Condensed Expanded Outline Inline Shadowed Outline Shadowed Stroke Weight Ultra Thin Extra Thin Thin Extra Light Light Demi Light Semi Light Medium Normal Semi Bold Demi Bold Bold Extra Bold Black Extra Black Ultra Black Scalable Font Ratio original Set horizontal ratio 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Set vertical ratio 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Appendix 48 Command ESC s 25C ESC 523 ESC s 26C ESC 27 ESC s28 C ESC s29C ESC s 0P ESC 51 ESC s H char inch ESC amp k0S ESC amp 2 5 ESC amp 45 ESC s V point size ESC 15 ESC 05 ESC 45 ESC 355 ESC 385 ESC s 24 S ESC s 32S ESC 5 64S ESC s 128 S ESC 5160 ESC 5 ESC s 7B ESC s 6B ESC s 5B ESC s 4B ESC s 3B ESC s 2B ESC s 1B ESC s0B ESC s1B ESC s2B ESC s3B ESC s4B ESC s5B ESC s6B ESC s7B ESC CR H ESC CR V Decimal 27 40 115 50 53 67 27 40 115
74. 43 1B 26 64 44 1B 26 64 30 44 1B 26 64 33 44 1B 26 64 40 1B 3D 1B 26 6B 30 47 1B 26 6B 31 47 1B 26 6B 32 47 1B 26 6B 33 47 1B 26 6C 30 4F 1B 26 6C 31 4F 1B 26 6C 32 4F 1B 26 6C 33 4F 1B 2661 50 1B 26 6C 58 1B 26 6C 30 48 1B 26 6C 31 48 1B 26 6C 32 48 1B 26 6C 33 48 1B 26 6C 34 48 1B 26 6C 35 48 APPENDICES Appendix 45 USER GUIDE Function Command Decimal Simplex Duplex Print Available when Duplex Unit is installed Simplex Duplex amp Long Edge Binding Duplex amp Short Edge Binding ESC amp IOS ESC amp I1S ESC amp I28S 27 38 108 48 83 277 38 108 49 83 277 38 108 50 83 Paper Side Selection Available when Duplex Unit is installed Next Side Front Side Back Side Long edge Offset Short edge Offset Printer Reset Self test Job Separation Unit of Measure Go to Other Emulations original BR Script 2 Batch Mode BR Script 2 Interactive Mode HP GL IBM Proprinter XL EPSON FX 850 ESC amp a0G ESC amp alG ESC amp a2G ESC amp U 720 inch ESC amp 7 720 2 ESC amp ESC amp u D Units inch ESC CRAB ESC CR AI ESC CRGL ESC CRI ESC CRE High Resolution Control HRC original Set HRC Off Set HRC to Light Level Set HRC to Medium Level Set HRC to Dark Level User Reset original Restore to User Settings Factory Reset original Restore to Factory Settings Execute Card Data origin
75. 5 2 Storage of Unsealed EP ED 1 10 CHAPTER THEORY OF OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERAT ON S 1 1 Mechanical 1 1 1 2 Main Drive d du l Il 2 13 Basic Sequence of Operations 8 8 8 Il 3 LASER ISCANNER SYSTEM it t htt e arcere dt ee etta Il 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM nani Il 5 31 a a en Il 5 3 2 Printing PROCESS uc uiti a En RP ES Il 5 3 2 1 Electrostatic latent image formation stage Il 6 3 2 2 Developing Il 8 3 2 3 Transferstao ee eere dea Il 9 3 2 4 FIXING ia i Ar a Il 10 3 2 5 Drum cleaning Il 10 3 3 Operation a sa I 11 PAPER PICK UP FEED SYSTEM Il 12 a tt Mk Il 12 42 Qassette Feed eer te pt e tt bocca M e tae ric ener te be i Il 13 AS MP Tray die ot e a EA Il 14 4 4 PaperJam Detection E etie e Ace Il 15 ELECTRICAL SVSTEM 1 MAIN PGB e Ta a a 1 EO UII PEEL III 1 1 2 Video Controller III 2 13 Engine Controller Circuit 1 nnne nns III 7 PAPER FEED DRI
76. 5 6 Check the interface cable connection between the printer and the fitted option Use a new card If the same error occurs consult your dealer or service personnel Set the correct size of paper in T2 or for duplex printing See Paper Handling in Chapter 3 Press the RESET switch If the same error occurs you may need to add optional SIMM memory See page 5 7 Service Call Messages Service Call Message 50 51 FUSER MALF LASER BD MALF 52 53 54 55 61 62 63 66 SCANNER MOTOR MALF HIGH VOL MALF PROG ERROR FONT ERROR NV W ERROR 67 68 99 48 49 NV R ERROR NV B ERROR SERVICE DX FAN MALF D RAM ERROR INCORRECT INCORRECT LT DX Meaning Malfunction of fuser Malfunction of laser beam detector Malfunction of laser scanner motor Malfunction of fan motor in the duplex unit Malfunction of main motor Malfunction of high voltage power supply Program ROM checksum error Font ROM checksum error D RAM error NV RAM error NV RAM error NV RAM error System error Your lower tray is an LT 1200 and it is not the correct tray for your 16 17 ppm printer Your duplex unit is a DX 1200 and it is not correct for your 16 17 ppm printer CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Action Turn off the printer Wait 15 minutes then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then tu
77. 50 51 67 27 40 115 50 54 67 27 40 115 50 55 67 27 40 115 50 56 67 27 40 115 50 57 67 27 40 115 48 80 27 40 115 49 80 27 40 115 72 27 38 107 48 83 27 38 107 50 83 27 38 107 52 83 27 40 115 86 27 40 115 49 83 27 40 115 48 83 27 40 115 52 83 27 40 115 53 83 27 40 115 56 83 27 40 115 50 52 83 27 40 115 51 50 83 277 40 115 54 52 83 277 40 115 49 50 56 83 277 40 115 49 54 48 83 27 40 115 66 277 40 115 2D 55 66 27 40 115 2D 54 66 27 40 115 2D 53 66 27 40 115 2D 52 66 277 40 115 2D 51 66 27 40 115 2D 50 66 277 40 115 2D 49 66 27 40 115 48 66 277 40 115 49 66 277 40 115 50 66 27 40 115 51 66 277 40 115 52 66 277 40 115 53 66 277 40 115 54 66 277 40 115 55 66 27 13 33 72 27 13 33 86 Hexadecimal 1B 28 73 32 35 43 1B 28 73 32 33 43 1B 28 73 32 36 43 1B 28 73 32 37 43 1B 28 73 32 38 43 1B 28 73 32 39 43 28 73 30 50 1B 28 73 31 50 1B 28 73 48 1B 26 6B 30 53 26 6B 32 53 1B 26 6B 34 53 1B 28 73 56 1B 28 73 31 53 1B 28 73 30 53 1B 28 73 34 53 1B 28 73 35 53 1B 28 73 38 53 1B 28 73 32 34 53 1B 28 73 33 32 53 1B 28 73 36 34 53 1B 28 73 31 32 38 53 1B 28 73 31 36 30 53 1B 28 73 tHt 42 1B 28 73 45 37 42 1B 28 73 45 36 42 1B 28 73 45 35 42 1B 28 73 45 34 42 1B 28 73 45 33 42 1B 28 73 45 32 42 1B 28 73 45 31 42 1B 28 73 30 42 1B 28 733142 1B 28 73 32 42 1B 28 73 33 42 1B 28 73 34 42 1B 28 73 35 42 1B 28 73 36 42 1B 28 73 37 42 1B OD 21 48 1B OD 21 56
78. A or W switch until FAX MODE is displayed Press the SET switch 3 4 5 6 e Note FAX MODE is not displayed when FAX MODEM OFF is selected in the HIDDEN PANEL menu Refer to the previous section Installing the External Fax Modem You can now make the following settings Descriptions Number of rings before the printer answers when receiving fax data Select from 0 to 4 The factory default setting is 2 Set if the received fax data is reduced for printing or not AUTO reduced automatically factory default setting OFF not reduced automatically 90 reduced to 90 FAX RAM Set the RAM size used for the fax function SIZE After turning the printer off and on the setting is active The factory setting is IMB The maximum size that can be set is 15 MB this depends on the memory size installed into the printer Select if the printer is to receive fax data or not When the printer only sends Fax data select this to OFF ON Receive fax data factory default setting OFF Does not receive fax data INTERVAL Set the interval to print a fax sent received report The factory setting is OFF Select one of the following 7 types OFF No printing every 6 hours 12H every 12 hours 24H every 24 hours 2D every 2 days AD every 4 days 7D every 7 days OPERATION MANUAL USING THE FAX DRIVER Installing the Fax Driver Windows 3 1 1 Choose th
79. Brother Original Fonts Bermuda Script Germany San Diego US Roman Bitmapped Fonts Portrait and Landscape e LetterGothic16 66 Medium Italic Bold BoldItalic OCR A OCR B BR Script 2 Mode Scalable Fonts Atlanta Book BookOblique Demi DemiOblique Alaska Extrabold Antique Oakland Oblique Bold Bermuda Script BR Dingbats BR Symbol Brougham Oblique Bold BoldOblique Brussels Light LightItalic Demi Demiltalic Calgary Mediumltalic Cleveland Condensed Connecticut e Copenhagen Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic Germany e Guatemala Antique Italic Bold BoldItalic Helsinki Oblique Bold BoldOblique Helsinki Narrow Oblique Bold BoldOblique Letter Gothic Oblique Bold Maryland Oklahoma Oblique Bold Bold Oblique e Portugal Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic San Diego e Tennessee Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic US Roman Utah Oblique Bold BoldOblique Utah Condensed Oblique Bold BoldOblique USER S GUIDE High Speed Printing with Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 3 1 Since TrueType compatible fonts are resident in this printer the printer can print them with Microsoft Windows 95 Windows version 3 1 at a high speed without downloading them Because the printer has a TrueType Font rasterizer it can rasterize fonts at a high speed Bar Code Print This printer can print the following 11 types of bar codes Code 39 UPC E nter
80. CHR 12 D PRINT CHR 27 itl2rl RS 27 itl3r1 PRINT 27 itl4r1 ISBN EAN PRINTCHRS 27 it130r1 APPENDICES R 27 it5r100x00y7001234567 N PRINT CHRS 27 it5r100x50y70b12345678901 R 27 it5r100x100y70b123456789012 51 27 it6r100x150y7050123456 R 27 it9r1s000x00y100bA123456A o0x00y120bCODE128A12345 o0x00y140bCODE128B12345 o0x00y160b CHR 1 2 0 00 1806123456789012 12345 PRINT CHR 27 it132r100x00v210b12345678902V Appendix 75 INDEX DOWN switch 4 6 A UP switch 4 6 A adjustment knob for face up down print deliverv 2 3 adjustment lever 2 13 advanced photoscale technologv APT l 4 4 30 ALARM lamp 4 4 angle of control panel 3 7 anti static teeth 6 3 application software 3 1 AUTO CR 4 21 auto form feed 4 42 AUTO LF 4 21 AUTO MASK 4 21 auto mode 4 21 AUTO SKIP 4 21 AUTO WRAP 4 21 automatic emulation selection 3 3 automatic interface selection 3 5 4 17 B bar codes 1 8 Appendix 68 baud rate 4 19 bi directional parallel communications 4 18 bi directional parallel interface connector 2 3 bottom margin 4 23 BR Script 2 mode 4 68 buzzer 4 45 C card operation 4 32 CCITT 1 8 Appendix 51 character set 4 27 4 56 4 57 4 60 Appendix 15 character sets in HP GL emulation INDEX mode 4 28 code table 4 54 4 58
81. COLB 340 450 1V3H 1121 610 F 33 Le MATTTOI1G geo 7098823 sa ssi 7 gt JMIJNIS ul YNI Aver OLOW INVIS eid 1212 5551 I 220 1 81 S 49014 UMANVA 13HAv2 3LIHM 9 NYa eld ULD 4 138Av239 71 s 1 Ave 5 GL9 azg 9 a m 4 w000 NIWNIYW JWHA OLO NISY VEB 1 596561 QL8 9073 1 25 90 1 138Av2 IMS MSII 7 2 Kandi 89d 6x ipueddy Ol V 9 HuIO r L8TH 00072S2 n 3 0 lt w 22 a c N gt N U 6 Lo E C CO OJ Via O a ja gt H E e TAL A CONT je TIE 10 7 00 Oe rss EOS S Oe LA a0 2 a a er ps baa el loon TaN a AS I INO 8MS OW LMS 03 9 5
82. Compan Nis 2 1 2 1 Toner iurat b 2 2 General VIOW uus el 2 3 Operating and Storage Environment 12 uc enisi rede nra 2 4 2 4 BEBVIFOBI GHIL acre 2 4 mG THE PRINTER Se A 2 5 Opening and Closing the Primier 2 5 Removing the Protective PariS 2 6 Installing tlie Toner Cartridges ertet 2 7 Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette 2 11 Connecting the Printer ta Your Computer 2 17 Turning the Printer On and 2 19 Plugging in the Power COR st I e Io rte 2 19 Pressing the POWER Sy ete 2 t std tea eere 2 20 Printing ihe Test Patterns or LISfe iso usc panty aise nis cases sis ipt 2 21 Checking the Printed Test Pattern Demo Page 2 24 lii USER S GUIDE CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER 3 1 SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY ueniet 3 1 AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION eee 3 3 AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION iii eise 3 5 ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL 3 7 Adjusting the Control Panel Angle jie iie e tede beaten 3 7 selecting the Local Language Display urere 3 8 Usus Ihe Panel 3 9 Printer rir M 3 10 ad cl T E 3 10 Puctary
83. DENSITV INPUT BUFFER SAVE SETTINGS exit COUNT 0 Sub Setting Menu LOCK PANEL OFF PASS NO AUTO FF OFF WAIT TIME 5s FF SUPPRESS OFF TONER LOW CONT exit ERROR PRINT OFF CONTINUE MANUAL BUZZER ON BANER OOOO SAVE SETTING 1 SAVE SETTING 2 Setting ON or OFF Enter pass number ON or OFF 1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON ON or OFF CONT or STOP exit to NETWORK MODE ON or OFF AUTO or MANUAL ON or OFF Increase or decrease the print density 15 levels Increase or decrease the input buffer capacity 15 levels Save the current setting as 1 Save the current settings as 2 exit to ADVANCED MODE Shows the number of printed pages Exit MODE MODE Switch Settings HP GL Mode CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL The following table shows all the selections you can make with the MODE switch in the HP GL mode 9 Note The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the current emulation mode printer status and any options that may be installed in the printer Mode Menu INTERFACE MODE Same as LaserJet Mode See 4 17 FORMAT MODE See 4 20 RESOLUTION MODE See 4 28 Setting Menu PAGE FORMAT MODE GRAPHICS MODE exit RESOLUTION HRC SETTING exit Sub Setting Menu PAPER LETTER For 110 120V mode X OFFSET 0 Y OFFSET 0 exit PEN SETTING SETTING PEN1 SIZE 3 dots GRAY 100 exit exit CHARACTER SET STANDARD SET ANSI ASCII ALTERNATE SET ANSI ASC
84. Densitv Bit Image Mode Set Double Speed Double Density Bit Image Mode Set Quadruple Densitv Bit Image Mode Set Scalable Font Ratio original Execute Card Data original Function When n21 subsequent characters including spaces but excluding horizontal tabs are underlined When 0 this effect is canceled When n 1 subsequent characters including spaces but excluding horizontal tabs are overlined When n 0 this effect is canceled Depending on the values of m3 and m4 double height and or double width printing is enabled or disabled Allows printing of the symbols in Character Set II Allows printing of the symbols in Character Set I Allows n1 n2 x 256 characters to be printed from the Characters Table Control codes in the data are ignored Prints one character c from the AII Character Table Allows definition of user defined characters Selects font and print quality 0 or 2 internal fonts 4 6 downloaded fonts Selects and prints single density bit image data Selects and prints double density bit image data Selects and prints double speed double density bit image data Selects and prints quadruple density bit image data Selects horizontal ratio n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Selects vertical ratio n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Execute saved card data Sequence ESC n ESC n 4 000 m3 m4 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC 1 n2 data ESC c ESC nl n2 sp mal a2
85. EPSON BR Script Mode HP GL Mode FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL Modes INTERFACE MODE NTERFACE MODE INTERFACE MODE Set interface parameters 4 17 Set interface parameters 4 17 Set interface parameters 4 17 FORMAT MODE FORMAT MODE FORMAT MODE Set orientation paper size margins amp Set horizontal amp vertical offsets 4 20 Set orientation paper size margins pen others 4 20 setting amp others 4 20 RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE Set resolution amp HRC 4 28 Set resolution amp HRC 4 28 Set resolution amp HRC 4 28 Protect data on a page 4 31 Not available Protect data on a page 4 31 CARD OPERATION CARD OPERATION CARD OPERATION Set a flash memory card or a HDD card in Set a flash memory card or a HDD card Set a flash memory card or a HDD card HP mode 4 32 4 32 4 32 ADVANCED MODI GI ADVANCED MODI GI ADVANCED MOD GI Set network mode print density amp others Set network mode print density amp others Set network mode print density amp others 4 41 4 41 4 41 PAGE COUNTER PAGE COUNTER PAGE COUNTER Show of printed pages 4 48 Show of printed pages 4 48 Show of printed pages 4 48 exit MODE exit MODE exit MODE Exit to off line ready state 4 48 Exit to off line ready state 4 48 Exit to off line ready state 4 48 USER GUIDE MODE Switch Settings in HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM
86. Function Scalable Fonts Command Intellifont compatible Fonts point size Alaska Alaska Extrabold Antique Oakland Antique Oakland Bold Antique Oakland Oblique Brougham Brougham Bold Brougham Oblique Brougham BoldOblique Cleveland Condensed Connecticut Guatemala Antique Guatemala Italic Guatemala Bold Guatemala Boldltalic LetterGothic LetterGothic Bold LetterGothic Oblique Maryland Oklahoma Oklahoma Bold Oklahoma Oblique Oklahoma BoldOblique PC Brussels Light PC Brussels Demi PC Brussels Lightltalic PC Brussels Demiltalic PC Tennessee Roman PC Tennessee Bold PC Tennessee Italic PC Tennessee BoldItalic Utah Utah Bold Utah Oblique Utah BoldOblique Utah Condensed Utah Condensed Bold Utah Condensed Oblique tah Condensed BoldOblique c ESC sl p v0s1b4362T ESC sl p v0s4b4362T ESC slp v0s0b4168T ESC slp v0s3b4168T ESC slp v1ls0b4168T ESC sOp h0sO0b4099T ESC sOp h0s3b4099T ESC sOp h1s0b4099T ESC sOp h1s3b4099T ESC slp v4s3b4140T ESC slp vlsOb4116T ESC slp v0s0Ob4197T ESC slp v0s3b4197T ESC slp v1ls0b4197T ESC slp v1ls3b4197T ESC sOp h0s0b4102T ESC sOp h0s3b4102T ESC sOp h1s0b4102T ESC slp v0s0b4297T ESC slp v0s0b4113T ESC slp v0s3b4113T ESC slp vls0Ob4113T ESC slp v1ls3b4113T ESC slp v0s 3b4143T ESC slp v0s 2b4143T ESC sl p vls 3b4143T ESC slp vls 2b4143T ESC slp v0s0b4101T ESC slp v0s3b4101T ESC slp vlsOb4101T ESC slp vls3b4101T ESC slp v0
87. INTERFACE MODE Same as HP LaserJet Mode See 4 17 FORMAT MODE X OFFSET 0 500 left to 500 right dots See 4 22 Y 0 500 up to 500 down dots exit Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION 600 300 or 600 dpi See 4 28 APT SETTING APT OFF ON or OFF HRC SETTING HRC MEDIUM OFF LIGHT MEDIUM or DARK exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE CARD OPERATION When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted See 4 32 FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the HDD card exit Exit to CARD OPERATION CARD OPERATION When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has been formatted See 4 32 EXECUTE DATA Execute the data on the card DATA ID Execute the selected data exit Exit to EXECUTE DATA CARD LIST Print the contents of the card SAVE SAVE DATA Send data to be saved SET KEY gt END End saving the data DATA ID Set data ID for saved data exit Exit to CARD OPERATION DELETE MACRO ID Delete the selected macro DATA Delete the selected data FONT ID Delete the selected font FORMAT CARD Format the card SET gt DELETE ALL Execute formatting the card exit Exit to FORMAT CARD OPERATION exit Exit to CARD OPERATION USER GUIDE Mode Menu Continued ADVANCED MODE See 4 41 PAGE COUNTER See 4 48 exit MODE See 4 48 4 12 Setting Menu NETWORK MODE ERROR PRINT CONTINUE MODE BUZZER SETTING PRINT
88. LaserJet 4 HL 1260e HP LaserJet 4 HL 1260 HP LaserJet 4 HL 10h HP LaserJet 4 HP LaserJet 4 HP LaserJet 4 HL 1660e BR Script 2 BR Script 2 HL 1660 BR Script 2 BR Script 2 1260 BR Script 2 BR Script 2 HL 1260 BR Script 2 BR Script 2 PostScript level 2 language printer BR Script 2 HL 10h BR Script BR Script 2 HL 10PS DPS BR Script 2 HL 8PS BR Script 2 Apple LaserWriter II NT NTX BR Seript 2 PostScript language printer BR Script 2 HP 7475ATM HP GL HP GL HP GL EPSON 850 EPSON 850 EPSON FX 80TM EPSON FX 850 Proprinter XL IBM Proprinter XL IBM Proprinter 9 IBM Proprinter XL USER S GUIDE 3 2 To get the most out of this printer you need to install the printer driver for this printer or the HP LaserJet and select the HP LaserJet emulation mode this is the best combination When any other HP LaserJet series printer driver is installed select the HP LaserJet emulation mode When any other printer driver is installed select the HP GL BR Script 2 EPSON or IBM emulation mode according to the installed printer driver You may find difficulty in printing EPS file format pictures with the HP LaserJet mode In this case it is better to select the BR Script 2 mode An asterisk indicates the best or recommended combination of the printer driver and emulation mode Be sure to use any of these best or recommended combinations if circumstances permit When an emulation mode other
89. MODE You can control the basic printer operations and make various printer settings also in the SHIFT mode Functions available in the SHIFT mode are labeled with the indications just below the panel switches COPY PAGES DUPLEX ONLINE READY SEL MODE FONT FORMFEED SET W A 1 m DATA ORENTATION FEEDER brother EMULATION ECONOMY FEEDER COPY SHIFT RESET TEST Fig 4 8 Switches in SHIFT Mode gt Note The factory settings are printed in bold in this section SHIFT Switch When you hold the SHIFT switch down with the printer off line you can change settings with the panel switches in the SHIFT mode Since the shift state is not locked you need to hold it down and press the switch to get access to the corresponding shifted function labeled under the switch 4 64 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL EMULATION Switch This printer has been factorv set with the automatic emulation selection function on The printer can select the emulation mode automaticallv when it receives data from the computer When you want to set the emulation mode manually hold down the SHIFT switch and press the EMULATION switch Then you enter the setting mode where you change the emulation To set the emulation mode follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the EMULATION switch When you enter the setting mode the display first shows the
90. Mode Activate 72 Line Spacing Mode set bv ESC A Set n 216 Line Spacing Execute n 2167 Line Spacing Set Horizontal Tab Stops Horizontal Tab Set Vertical Tab Stops Vertical Tab Restore to Default Tab Settings Set Pica Pitch Set Elite Pitch Set Cancel Proportional Spacing Mode Set Condensed Character Mode Set Emphasized Character Mode Cancel Emphasized Character Mode Set Enlarged Character Mode Cancel Enlarged Character Mode Set Cancel Enlarged Character Mode Set Super Subscript Print Mode Cancel Super Subscript Print Mode Appendix 64 Function Cancels the bottom margin setting Sets line spacing to 1 8 inch Sets line spacing to 7 72 inch Sets line spacing mode to n 72 inch 1 lt lt 85 Activated by ESC 2 command Activates line spacing mode set by ESC A Sets line spacing to n 216 inch 1 lt lt 255 Advances the cursor by n 216 inch Sets up to 28 horizontal tab stops terminated by NUL Advances to next horizontal tab if none have been defined default tab stops are set every 8 columns Sets up to 64 vertical tab stops terminated by NUL Advances to next vertical tab stops or LF if none have been defined Clears any vertical tab stops and sets default horizontal tab stops every 8 columns Selects 10 cpi printing Selects 12 cpi printing Sets n 1 or cancels n 0 proportionally spaced printing Selects condensed characters canceled by DC2 Selects emphasize
91. PE on IV 9 1 11 Gartridge Stopper ASSy u dece ten en eset fedes IV 9 1 12 Paper Feed Chassis Unit nanna IV 10 1 13 Separation Pad ASSy cii Een ect tei ead IV 11 1 14 MP PE SUD ActUalor o reca ie ae IV 12 1 15 P Feed Size SW PCB Assy L nanna IV 12 1 16 Side Switch Spring IV 12 137 AREGISUSONSOMACIUALON ene n EU Ee Hr ER e TAS IV 13 1 18 MP Paper DetectionActuator sse IV 13 1 19 PE Sensor Actuator es peti enn bie ait IV 13 1 20 Tray Sensor Holder Lara nanna tannar nannti IV 14 1 21 Roller Molden HE PEEL IV 14 1 22 Paper Pick up RollerAssy IV 15 1 28 Paper Pick up Solenoid aaiae aaa aeaee ada EEEE aa Eee aaa ae TV 16 1 24 Paper Feed 16 1 25 MP ay OOV OT t c ta iet dei e ete ee ea E E to e ead IV 17 1 26 MP Trav ASSy 25 eai ette EE ca teet RR EE ER EE Ee E PR PIS EE ea eed IV 17 1 27 Paper Path Separation Plate Paper Path Separation Film IV 18 1 26 E emet het IV 19 1 29 Fixing Unit for both 120V and 230V the only difference is the halogen heater IV 19 1 30 Transter EE ee ex A ete Pe ERE ian IV 22 TST DG Gear Holdet ASSV ien el
92. PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP COLLAR LOW COLLAR STOPPER BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 72 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 72 WASHER PLAIN BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID TAPTITE BIND S M3X4 BEARING CALLOR TRAY SENSOR HOLDER PE SENSOR ACTUATOR TRAY PE ACTUATOR LINK DU DETECTION ACTUATOR PE SENSOR ACTUATOR MP REGIST SENSOR ACTUATOR LATCH MP PAPER FEED UNIT SP SEPARATION PAD ASSY SEPARATION PAD SPRING MP MP TRAY ASSY MP PE SUB ACTUATOR MP PAPER GUIDE MP RELEASE PLATE MP RELEASE SUPPORTER MP PUSH UP SPRING MP TRAY COVER MP EXTENSION TRAY PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP COLLAR LOW COLLAR STOPPER PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 5 BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 BEARING R TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER FEED PCB ASSY SP SIZE SWITCH SPRING TAPTITE CUP M3X6 PAPER FEED EARTH SPRING 1 RELEASE PLATE L RELEASE PLATE R 12 512011 2 ADD ADD MODEL HL 2060 54T U04 630 PR99087 1 FEEDER UNIT MODEL LT 1200 1600 54 001 002 630 TI NO 97 P049 PR99087 1 FEEDER UNIT PR99087 UH2901001 FEEDER CHASSIS L ASSY UH2952001 FEEDER CHASSIS R ASSY UH2905000 STIFFENER PLATE UPPER 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2906000 STIFFENER PLATE LOWER 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2907000 FEEDER GUIDE 085310615 TAPTITE BIND M3X6 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2954001 FEEDER ROLLER ASSY UH2960000 BEARING 048040346 RETAIN
93. READ MC shows that the printer is in the fax mode MC PRI MC Modem Control Error Messages problem occurs during use of the fax function the following message appears UNKNOWN Fax data was sent although Turn off and on the printer Set FAX LANGUAGE the External Fax Modem MODEM ON on the printer control is not selected Error Print If one of the following errors occurs during use of the fax function the printer prints out an error message on paper In order to recover from the error follow the instructions printed on the paper e Sending memory full Receiving memory full Other memory full e Transmission error OPERATION MANUAL amp This section contains questions and answers for using the fax function with vour printer Question Recommendation The date or time of the sent The clock of the printer is adjusted when sending the fax received report is not correct FAX MODE is not displayed on the control panel I cannot send any fax data although the data is sent from the computer to the printer Fax data is not sent from the computer to the printer and I cannot send any fax data I cannot receive fax data data If the printer is turned off and on the clock of the printer is reset to the default value 01 01 1997 00 00 Enter the HIDDEN PANEL menu by pressing the SHIFT and SEL switches Then select FAX MODEM ON in th
94. Refer to vour software manual if you need assistance When you select fonts with a font selection command embed the font selection command in your program See the Technical Reference Manual which is optionally available for this printer gt Notes When you select the fonts through your software or with a command note the following You do not need to be concerned about the FONT switch setting The software or command setting overrides the switch setting Be sure to install the font cartridge card that has your desired fonts The printer automatically selects the font that has exactly the same or similar characteristics as those you set through the software or with a command If the installed font cartridge card happens to have a font of similar characteristics the printer will print in an unexpected font To select fonts with the FONT switch follow these basic steps 1 Print out the list of optional fonts in the PRINT FONTS C mode with the SHIFT and TEST switches See Printing the Test Pattern or Font List in Chapter 2 5 4 2 Find the font slot and font ID number on the list Font ID Number kell 1D PrTCH SIZE STYLE PORTRAIT LIST WEIGHT TYPEFACE SLOTFONT B FONT S AM P L E 00dpl 8000 8u ROMAN 8 ESC BUESC s1piiv sdbs BOOL ON ESC ONESC sipiiv s bs 002 1 8 ESC 109ESC s1p v0s0b5T 3003 110 8 D N ESC 11UESC s1p v0s0b5T 004 12U PC 850 ESC 12UESC
95. Trav paper emptv sensor If atray1 paper pick up roller solenoid drive signal PUCL1 is input to the circuit while the paper feed motor is rotating the paper pick up solenoid comes on and the paper pick up roller solenoid is engaged As aresult the paper pick up roller rotates to feed paper down to the photosensitive drum The paper position is controlled by the registration sensor so that the leading edge of the paper is aligned with the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum After this operation the paper is deliveried to the face down tray via the fixing unit Paper ejection is detected by the paper ejection sensor if printed paper has not reached or not cleared the paper ejection sensor in a specified time the printer judges that a paper jam has occurred In this case a paper jam is noticed to the external devise by a status signal paper empty sensor MP tray Tray1 Pick up roller solenoid 2 Transfer roller Fixing rollers Paper ejection sensor Ls MP tray paper empty sensor signal PEMP MP tray Pick up roller solenoid MP tray pick up roller solenoid drive signal MPSOL Paper feed motor drive signal m Paper feed motor Tray1 pick up roller solenoid drive signal PUCL1 Travi paper empty sensor signal PETRAY1 drum E Registration sensor signal REGIST Registration sensor Main motor drive signal MDRIVE Photosensitive Main motor s Paper ejec
96. WAIT TIME FF SUPPRESS TONER LOW ERROR PRINT BR Script2 CONTINUE MODE BUZZER SETTING SCALABLE FONT HP EPSON amp IBM PRINT DENSITY For any interfaces INPUT BUFFER SELECT FONT SYMBOL SET SELECT FONT SYMBOL SET TIME OUT EPSON IBM KEEP PCL CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Factorv Setting RESOLUTION 600 APT OFF HRC MEDIUM PROTECT AUTO LOCK PANEL OFF AUTO FF OFF WAIT TIME 5s FF SUPPRESS OFF TONER LOW CONT ERROR PRINT OFF CONTINUE MANUAL BUZZER ON FONT ALL A DET ER ET EN REL ER BROUGHAM PC 8 HL 1660e ROMAN HL 1260 1660 BROUGHAM PC 8 HL 1660e ROMAN HL 1260 1660 ROMAN8 BROUGHAM US ASCII BROUGHAM PC 8 AUTO TIME 5s EPSON IBM EPSON KEEP PCL OFF 4 83 USER GUIDE Switch Item ECONOMV TONER SAVE MODE POWER SAVE MODE FEEDER FEEDER MP FIRST MANUAL FEED MP TRAY SETTING MEDIA DUPLEX MODE LANGUAGE FORM FEED POWER ON 4 84 Sub Item For POWER SAVE ON TIME OUT MP SIZE PAPER IN DUPLEX BIND Factory Setting TONER SAVE OFF POWER SAVE ON TIME OUT 30m FEEDER AUTO For FEEDER AUTO AUTO T1 gt T2 gt MP MP FIRST OFF MANUAL FEED OFF MP SIZE LETTER For 110 120V model MP SIZE A4 For 220V 240V model PAPER IN CONT REGULAR DUPLEX OFF BIND LONG COPY PAGES 1 LANG ENGLISH TEST Switch CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Xou can test the printer or print out the list of fonts with the TEST switch T
97. Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1985 Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript Language Tutorial and Cookbook Menlo Park Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1985 HP GL Mode The HP GL mode is the emulation mode where this printer emulates the Hewlett Packard plotter model HP 7475A Since many graphics and CAD applications support this type of plotter you can get more out of this printer working with your application software EPSON FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL Mode The EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes are the emulation modes where this printer emulates the industry standard dot matrix printers of respective manufacturers Since most applications support these printers you do not have to be concerned about compatibility CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Switch TONER SAVE MODE Xou can turn on or off the toner save mode as follows Displav Message Toner Save Mode TONER SAVE OFF Turn off the toner save mode Factory setting TONER SAVE ON Turn on the toner save mode The amount of toner on the paper decreases and the printed image may look light gray POWER SAVE MODE You can turn on or off the power save mode as follows Display Message Power Save Mode POWER SAVE ON Turn on the power save mode The fixing assembly of the print engine is turned off after the specified time to save power Factory setting POWER SAVE OFF Turn off the power save mode The fixing assembly of the
98. all the paper on the multi purpose tray correctly 3 Open and close the top cover 7 11 USER S GUIDE Unsatisfactory Printouts If you are not satisfied with the printout quality check the problem and take the necessary action to clear it e Note It is possible that paper could meet all of the guidelines listed in the specifications and still not print satisfactorily This may be due to temperature humidity or other variables over which the printer has no control If you cannot clear print problems consult the dealer where you purchased the printer Unclear Printouts The printed page may have white stripes or faint images Fig 7 7 White Stripes or Faint Images If you see these print problems check for the toner empty message The toner may not be distributed evenly in the cartridge or the toner cartridge may be empty 16 TONER EMPTY 7 12 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Follow these steps to clear the problem 1 Open the top cover of the printer Fig 7 8 Opening the Top Cover 2 Remove the toner cartridge from the printer Fig 7 9 Removing the Toner Cartridge 7 13 USER S GUIDE 3 Rock the cartridge gently several times at a 45 angle This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge Fig 7 10 Distributing the Toner Evenly 4 Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover of the printer 5 Print out several pages If you
99. and you press the SET switch at SAVE MACRO the printer prompts you to select the ID of the macro MACRO ID Select the ID with the A or W switch and press the SET switch again so that the printer saves the macro with the selected ID 9 Note When you see an asterisk on the display the ID number has been used for another macro or data If you select the used ID number the old macro or data is erased and replaced with the new macro You can execute a macro with the macro execution command Primary Font or Secondary Font gt Note The PRIMARY FONT and SECONDARY FONT menus appear only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode If you have selected the primary or secondary font with the FONT switch you can save the font on the installed flash memory card or HDD card When you press the SET switch at PRIMARY FONT or SECONDARY FONT the printer prompts you to select the ID of the font FONT 4 37 USER GUIDE 4 38 Select the ID with the or W switch and press the SET switch again so that the printer saves the font with the selected ID 9 Note When vou see an asterisk on the displav the ID number has been used for another font If vou select the used ID number the old font is erased and replaced with the new one Whatever font vou have selected with the FONT switch the printer saves the font as a bitmapped font as long as the print size is no more tha
100. automatically goes on line and the message changes to show the current printer status and settings LJ READY 001 1 LJ The auto emulation selection is set and currently the HP LaserJet emulation mode is selected READY The printer is ready to print 001 The number of copies to print is set to 1 P Portrait print is selected Paper is fed from Trayl 2 20 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Printing the Test Patterns or Lists You can check print quality and print a list of available fonts before you actually start working with the printer To do so follow these steps 1 Make sure that you have already set the toner cartridge and loaded paper into the cassette or the multi purpose tray Turn on the printer Wait until the display shows the message as follows LJ READY 001 1 or LJ READY 001 MP Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line The ON LINE lamp goes off Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch Press the A W switch to scroll through the display until the desired message appears To print your selection press the SET switch Choose from one of the following selections To print out the demo page DEMO PAGE To print out the test pattern TEST PRINT To print out the list of printer settings PRINT CONFIG To print out the list of internal or resident fonts PRINT FONTS I 2 21 USER S GUIDE To print ou
101. card or HDD card See pages 4 32 and 5 2 RAM Expansion Installing commercial memory modules expands the memory capacity up to 72 Mbytes HL 1660e only 66 Mbytes See pages 5 7 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED BEFORE USING THE PRINTER Checking the Components Printer Carton When vou unpack the printer check to see that vou have all of the following parts User s Guide Disk User s Guide Windows Driver TrueType this book Compatible Font Disk 1 Windows Driver TrueType Compatible Font Disk 2 Upper Paper Cassette installed inside the printer Fig 2 1 Components in the Printer Carton gt Note An interface cable is not a standard accessory Please purchase an appropriate cable according to the interface you intend to use The power cord may differ slightly from this figure depending on the country where you purchased the printer USER S GUIDE 2 2 Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is inside the toner cartridge carton Caution The toner cartridge is packed inside a bag Do not open it now Open it immediatelv before vou install the toner cartridge The toner cartridge must not be exposed to light for a long time Fig 2 2 Toner Cartridge CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED General View Face Down Print Font IC Card Slot Top Cover Deliverv Control Panel Font Cartridge Slot Multi purpose Trav Upper Paper Ca
102. data ESCIn ESCK nl n2 data ESCLnl n2 data ESC Y nl n2 data ESC Z n1 n2 data ESCCR nH ESCCR nV ESCCR nE Decimal 2745n 2795n 27 91 644 000 m3 m4 27 54 2755 27 92 1 n2 data 2794c 27 61 nl n2 32 mal a2 data 2773n 27 75 1 n2 data 27 76 1 n2 data 27 89 n1 n2 data 27 90 n1 n2 data 27 13 33 n72 27 13 33 n 86 27 13 33 n69 APPENDICES Hexadecimal IB2Dn 5F n 1B 5B 40 04 00 00 00 m3 m4 1B 36 1B 37 1B 5C nl n2 data 1B 5E c 1B 3D nl n2 20 a2 data 1B 49 n 1B 4B nl n2 data 1B 4C nl n2 data 1B 59 nl n2 data 1B 5A nl n2 data 1B 0 21 n48 1B OD 21 n56 1B 00 21 n45 Appendix 65 USER GUIDE HP GL Mode Command Mnemonic Vector Group ARC ABSOLUTE ARC RELATIVE PLOT ABSOLUTE PLOT RELATIVE PEN DOWN PEN UP Polvgon Group CIRCLE SHADE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE SHADE RECTANGLE RELATIVE EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE SHADE WEDGE EDGE WEDGE Character Group SELECT STANDARD SET SELECT ALTERNATE SET ABSOLUTE DIRECTION RELATIVE DIRECTION ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE CHARACTER SLANT STANDARD SET DEFINITION ALTERNATE SET DEFINITION LABEL DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR CHARACTER PLOT USER DEFINED CHARACTER Line and Fill Attributes Group LINE TVPE PEN WIDTH SELECT PEN SYMBOL MODE FILL TYPE TICK LENGTH X TICK Y TICK PEN THICKNESS Configuration and Status Grou
103. directional parallel communications The above high speed and bi directional settings are used for the bi directional parallel interface of this printer The bi directional parallel interface is compatible with the IEEE 1284 standard bi directional parallel interface Although it uses the same cable hardware and software as the bi directional parallel interface to use its enhanced capabilities such as bi directional communication between the computer and printer and faster transmission of data vou need a printer driver or software that supports these features Check with vour software vendor to see if vour software supports bi directional parallel features Serial Interface When vou intend to use the serial interface be sure to select the same communications parameters on both the printer and computer You must set them for the automatic interface selection too Displav Message BaudRate 9600 CodeType 8 bits Parity Bit 1 bits Stop Xon Xoff ON Effective when Xon Xoff ON Robust Xon OFF Effective when Xon Xoff ON Parameters Baud rate Data transfer speed Code tvpe Data length Paritv Data error check Stop bits Data separator Xon Xoff Handshake protocol Data terminal readv ER Robust Xon CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Settings 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 baud 7 bits or 8 bits None even or odd
104. following commands to select the emulation on the network Commands Hex Emulation ESCCRH 1B0D 48 HP LaserJet ESC CR AB 1B 0D 41 42 BR Script 2 ESCCRGL 1B 0D 47 4C HP GL ESCCRE 1 00 45 850 ESCCRI 1800 49 Proprinter XL About Emulation Modes This printer has the following emulation modes HP LaserJet Mode The HP LaserJet mode or HP mode is the emulation mode where this printer emulates the Hewlett Packard LaserJet laser printer Since a large number of application software packages support this type of laser printer your printer will operate at its optimum performance in this mode USER GUIDE 4 68 BR Script 2 Mode BR Script is a Brother original page description language and it is a PostScript language emulation interpreter This printer supports level 2 The BR Script interpreter of this printer can control text and graphics on pages completely and satisfactorily Average users do not need to know much about PostScript language If you want to obtain technical information about PostScript commands see the following commercial manuals Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript Language Reference Manual 2nd Edition Menlo Park Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript Language Program Design Menlo Park Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc 1988 Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript Language Reference Manual Menlo Park Addison
105. is divided into following three blocks 1 The paper pick up block The LCD display JAM TRAYS 2 separation and feed block The LCD display JAM INSIDE 3 fixing and paper delivery block The LCD display JAM REAR Therefore remedies for paper jam problems are described Respectively for these three blocks TEES Ripa Figure 6 3 VI 19 Paper pick up block Pick miss Adjustment Is the position of the adjustment lever of the No Instruct the user to follow the lever cassette corresponding to the paper sheet size correct method spring pressure switching lever Print paper 2 Is a recommended type of paper being used No Instruct the user to use recommended type of paper 3 Is the print paper deformed curled or wavy Yes Replace the print paper Instruct the user how to storage Maximum Does the amount of paper loaded on the Instruct the user not to load paper load on cassette exceed the specified maximum paper more than the maximum the cassette load amount of paper Pick up rollers Are the pick up rollers defomed or worn Replace the pick up rollers Separation pad Is the separation pad deformed or worn or Yes Replace the pad assy is it detached For solenoid activation no feeder motor operation and no regist sensor activation refer to the item NO PAPER PICK UP FROM THE CASSETTE in the column MALFUNCTIONS Paper pick
106. number of copies with the COPY switch and press the FORM FEED switch during copy printing the printer suspends the form feed operation and the display shows the following message 07 FF PAUSI GI Pressing the SEL switch again resumes the form feed operation When no data remains in the printer memory and you press the FORM FEED switch the printer ignores this switch operation and the display shows the following message No Data e Note If you want the printer to print out the remaining data automatically you can set the auto form feed function with the MODE switch See AUTO FORMFEED in Chapter 4 Reprint Function You can reprint the last job of data without sending it from the computer again When you press the FORM FEED switch with the DATA lamp off the printer reprints the same job with the one you printed last time You can use this function in order to recover printing when a paper jam has occurred After printing is finished set the printer off line and press the FORM FEED switch once so that the printer prints the last job of data USER GUIDE The displav shows the following message during reprinting REPRINT 1 JOB If the printer does not have enough memory to reprint the entire job it reprints the last page only and the display shows the following message during reprinting REPRINT 1 PAGE When you press the FORM FEED switch one or more times during reprinting
107. oad l EA 3 CONNECTING TO THE PRINTER csscisscssscsssnssassssasssnsessnoasssssnsseissaseessessarsssoanionsin 4 Installing the External Fax 4 Settings onthe Control Panel 2 Ie 6 USING THE FAX DRIVER sisocessvssscesinssussstssnsnes tictousoivassdensiedessensseucesseatoovsivansiashiahes 7 Installing the Fax e UP 7 Receiving Fax Messages p Siena 7 mending aie 8 OTHER FUNCTIONS as skid di 10 Report a tab 10 Shannp the Function on Network ieiunii eri eoe i Eee Ha ple EL ELI 11 TEUDBLESHOLITEINUSGU HI bn EPOD inden iment 13 Messages on the Control Patel n esie a REESE RE qe tipa oes OL EL PR 13 OPERATION MANUAL ABOUT THE FAX FUNCTION Features When vou have installed an External Fax Modem onto the printer vou can 1 Print a received fax message on plain paper directiv to the printer RS 232C Telephone Line Cabe gt aie 4 External Fax Modem Gender Changer 2 Send fax message from your computer Telephone RS 232C Line __ Cable Ee 1 00 Fax Parallel I F cable 3 Let multiple users send fax messages from e
108. operating conditions of the printer 3 The printing mode and LCD brightness can be changed by switches gt g B 2 9 5 3 LL ui X a 9 42 p PAD4 PAD7 Figure 3 8 Displav Circuit 3 2 Operation Indicators on the control panel LED lamps and LCD are controlled bv the video controller circuit All the switch signals are input to the video controller circuit Signals Descriptions LED1 LED4 On off control for the respective LED lamps Illuminating when Low and extinguished when High PAD4 PAD7 LCD control signal LCDRS A signal to distinguish PAD4 PAD7 into command and data LCDE A signal to start the operation SW1 SW8 Input signals from the switches Going Low when each switch is pressed III 10 4 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLV ASSV 4 1 The low voltage power supply assy consists of the low voltage generating block hereinafter the DC block and the heater drive circuit block to turn the heater on hereinafter the AC block When the power switch SW1 is turned on AC power is supplied to the low voltage power supply assy The DC block generates 5 VDC and 24 VDC When the heater is turned on AC power is supplied to the AC block under control of the heater on off signal from the engine controller 24V output is reserved in the DC block for the cooling fan for the low voltage power supply assy 4 2 Protection Functions Each of the power supply
109. pages after the toner empty message appears be sure to replace the toner cartridge with a new one before it becomes completely empty gt Note You can select the printer s operation when the Toner Empty message is displayed with the MODE switch The printer continues or stops printing For further information see Toner Low in Chapter 4 For toner cartridge replacement see Toner Cartridge in Chapter 6 2 10 Loading Paper the Paper Cassette CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED The printer usuallv loads paper from the installed multi purpose trav upper cassette or optional lower paper cassette gt Note The lower trav unit is an option for this printer This section refers to the upper paper cassette For information about the lower paper cassette see LOWER UNIT in Chapter 5 Since the paper cassette is a universal tvpe vou can set letter 4 legal ISO 5 executive 5 ISO size cut sheet paper or 10 Monarch C5 DL or ISO 5 size envelopes in the paper cassette The paper sources have the following limitation For more information about paper see PRINT MEDIA in Chapter 3 paper source available size available tvpe and capacitv the multi purpose trav MP the upper paper cassette TI the optional lower paper cassette T2 all sources for duplex printing DX cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive A5 ISO B6 and envelope COM 1
110. paper input ESC EM n 27 25 19 0 Initialize Feeder Mode n 1 Feed From MP Tray n 2 Feed From Upper Cassette Tray 1 3 Feed From Lower Cassette Tray 2 n R Eject Paper Duplex Simplex Print Sets simplex or duplex print mode ESCCRI 27 13 33 1B OD 21 available when duplex n 0 Simplex nD n 68 n 44 unit is installed n 1 Duplex amp long edge binding original n 2 Duplex amp short edge binding Page Side Selection Sets page side selection ESC CR 27 13 33 1B 0 21 available when duplex 0 Next side 15 n 83 n 53 unit is installed 1 Front side original n 2 Back side Initialize Printer Initializes printer and clears print buffer ESC 27 64 1B 40 prints data Set Form Length Sets page length in current line spacing ESC Cn 2767n 1B 43n 1 lt lt 127 Set Left Margin Sets left margin n characters from home ESC n 27 108 IB6Cn position range depends on tvpe size and paper size Appendix 60 Command name Set Right Margin Set Skip over Perforation Cancel Skip over Perforation Function Sets right margin n columns from the left margin range depends on tvpe size and paper size Sets bottom margin at the n th line counting from the bottom Cancels the setting of the bottom margin Set 1 6 Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1 6 inch Set 1 8 Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1 8 inch Set 7 72 Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 7 72 inch Set n 72 Line
111. printer off line 2 Press the TEST switch while holding down the SHIFT switch DEMO PAGE is displayed 3 Press the or V switch until PRINT FAX LOG is displayed 4 Press the SET switch The printer prints the sent received report gt Note e The date and time on the sent received report are changed when the first fax data is sent after turning on the printer e If there is no sending receiving log PRINT FAX LOG is not displayed on the control panel The sending receiving log disappears when the printer is turned off The printer memorizes the last 30 logs OPERATION MANUAL Sharing the Fax Function on a Network When the printer is shared on a network the fax function can be also shared Select the same printer as the one which is used as the network printer lt Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 4 0 Peer to Peer gt Network Printeri Telephone RS 232C Line Cable 1 gt lt e a DE Changer Parallel I F Fig 2 Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Peer to Peer Sample The printer with the External Fax Modem installed is connected to PC2 as shown in the above figure In order to send the fax data from PC1 to Printer1 set Print to the following port in the Properties of Brother FAX Share PC2 Printer1 in the Printer folder on PCI Refer to the illustration
112. right mouse button and select Set As Default To select the driver from the application software 1 Select Printer Setup or Page Setup in the File menu The setting dialog box appears after selecting Print in some application software 2 Change the printer driver to Brother FAX Share in the setting dialog box lt Send the fax message gt 1 Select Print in the File menu of the application software 2 The Print dialog box appears Press the OK button to show the FAX Sending dialog box 3 Enter the telephone number and other items as required and then press the Start button to send the fax data to the printer 4 The printer sends the fax data through the External Fax Modem The FAX SENDING message appears on the control panel while the printer is sending the fax data Caution When the FAX SENDING message appears on the control panel do not turn off the printer as this will result in the fax data not being completelv sent OPERATION MANUAL OTHER FUNCTIONS Report Print The printer automatically prints the sent received report when the selected interval has passed The printing intervals can be specified with the INTERVAL menu on the control panel Refer to Settings on the Control Panel on Page 6 to make the interval setting When you want to print a report on the current sending receiving status carry out the following operations on the control panel 1 Press the SEL switch to make the
113. s1p v0s0b5T 1005 C 1 0 0 5 8006 83 ROVAN 8 ESC BUESC s1pliv s3bs 21 42 11 00 Upright 21 42 11 00 Upright 21 42 11 00 Upright 42 11 00 uplight 21 42 11 00 Upright 42 11 00 Upright 21 42 11 00 Upright Medium 0 Times Roman 5 Medium 0 Times Roman 5 Midium 0 Times Roman 5 Medium 0 Times Roman 5 Medium 0 Times 5 Medium 0 Times Roman 5 Bold 3 Times Roman 5 ABCDefgh12321 4 95 amp 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp lt gt 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp lt gt 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp lt gt 012345 ABCDefgh1232 amp lt gt 01234 Fig 5 3 Font ID Numbers on the Font List 3 Select the font with the FONT switch See FONT Switch in Chapter 4 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS Slot A or B 55 USER GUIDE MODULAR I O CARD This printer has a modular input output MIO interface slot on the rear panel This slot allows you to install a commercial MIO compatible sharing network card For more information about MIO cards consult the dealer where you purchased this printer When you install the MIO card follow these steps 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall socket gt Note Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or removing the MIO card 2 Remove the two screws and cover
114. shown below gt Note Keep all packing materials for transporting or storing the printer later 1 Open the top cover and the upper paper cassette 2 Remove the protective parts from inside the printer and the cassette 3 Remove both spacers from the fixing roller Protective Parts U XJ ARE 4 2 jm l ia Fig 2 7 Removing the Protective Parts Spacers y FAN Fig 2 7 Removing the Protective Parts Fig 2 8 Removing the Spacers 2 6 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Installing the Toner Cartridge This printer uses a toner cartridge to print Xou have one toner cartridge as standard A new cartridge contains enough toner to print approximatelv 9 000 A4 or letter size single sided pages at about 590 coverage if the print densitv is set at level 8 If vou turn on the printer without the toner cartridge installed the displav shows the following operator call message to prompt vou to install the toner cartridge 14 NO CARTRIDGE To install the toner cartridge follow these steps 1 Open the top cover of the printer 2 Open the bag to unpack the toner cartridge Q Caution Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct light Do not stand the toner cartridge on its end or turn it up side down Do not touch the shaded parts shown below Do not open the drum shutter otherwise the ton
115. switch until the desired print density value appears The value can change from 1 light to 15 dark Press the SET switch 10 Press the SEL switch to exit from the mode menus and set the printer on line state For more information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY Before working with your application software you need to set up or install the printer driver in your software Locate the printers that your application software supports and install the desired printer driver Each software package differs in the way the printer driver is selected Read the software manual and follow the setup or installation procedures Be sure to select the printer emulation mode that matches the installed printer driver This printer emulates particular printer models of the following manufacturers Since this printer has been factory set with the automatic emulation selection on you may not need to select the emulation mode When necessary select the appropriate printer emulation mode with the panel switches according to the printer driver installed in your application software See CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Printer Driver Emulation Mode lt HL 1660e gt HL 1660e HP LaserJet 5 HL 1660 HP LaserJet 5 HL 1260e HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet 4 4 HP LaserJet 5 lt HL 1260e 1660 gt HL 1660 HP
116. switch until the desired style appears on the display Display Message Font Style ES Lt Light Bee brenda ats Reg Regular Roman Book or Antique c Bd Bold or Demi ORE EUR Xb Extrabold DER Tt Italic or Oblique 4 56 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 9 Note The stvle indication appears after the font name and the stvle name differs according to the font name The italic or oblique indication can appear after any style indication indicates a bold italic font LtIt indicates a light italic font etc Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective then the display shows the font size setting menu 9 Note When you have selected fixed pitch fonts you set the font size by the character pitch width When you have selected proportional spacing fonts you set the font size in points height The display shows PITCH or POINT accordingly The following displays show PITCH to simplify instructions PITCH 10 00 B Press the A or V switch until the desired font size appears on the display Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective Then the blinking cursor moves to the decimal part of the number Press the A or W switch until the desired decimal number appears the display PITCH 16 66 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The display then shows the character set setting menu CHARACTER SET
117. than the HP mode or BR Script 2 is selected the printout may differ slightly from the printout that the target printer produces For Windows 95 or Windows 3 1 users to get the best performance from your printer install the driver supplied with your printer CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION This printer has an automatic emulation selection function When the printer receives data from the computer it automatically selects the emulation mode This function has been factory set to ON The printer can select the emulation among the following combinations EPSON IBM Priority EPSON default IBM Auto Selection Mode HP LaserJet HP LaserJet BR Script 2 BR Script 2 HP GL HP GL EPSON FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL To get the most out of this laser printer we recommend you use the HP LaserJet emulation mode which is a true laser printer mode Since the HP LaserJet mode takes the highest priority in the automatic emulation selection you can start using the printer as it is with the factory settings in most cases When the automatic emulation selection is active you can check the current emulation on the display When the printer is in ready print or wait states the display reads as follows Emulation Status Display in Ready State HP LaserJet LJ READY 001 1 BR Script 2 BS IDLE 001 T HP GL GL READY 001P EPSON FX 850 FX READY 001 T IBM Proprinter XL PR READY 001
118. the end of the display for a short time Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off line state USER GUIDE RESET Switch 4 78 Xou can reset the printer with the RESET switch The print data that the printer has alreadv received from the computer is cleared and the printer settings are restored to the user settings or factorv settings The temporarv download fonts and macro settings vou set with commands in the HP LaserJet mode are also cleared When you want to reset the printer hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch You then enter the reset mode where you reset the printer To reset the printer follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch When you enter the reset mode the display shows the first reset mode RESET PRINTER 3 Press the A or W switch until the desired reset mode appears on the item display Display Message RESET PRINTER RESET SETTING 1 RESET SETTING 2 FACTORY SETTINGS exit Reset Mode Resets the printer and restores all printer settings including command settings to settings you have previously made with the panel switches Resets the printer and restores all printer settings including command settings to the selected number 1 2 of user settings you have previously made with the MODE
119. to remove the jammed paper Pull the upper paper cassette out of the printer to release the edge of the paper from the paper feed roller or the paper might be torn and difficult to remove 2 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge 3 Raise the paper access cover 4 Remove the jammed paper using the following methods If paper has passed through the paper access cover and toner is on the paper pull it with making paper edge round in direction A toward the upper side of the printer Q Caution Take care not to stain your hands and clothes with toner Wash out toner stains immediately with cold water Direction AR 2 S Paper Access Cover Fig 7 5 Paper Jam at Paper Access Cover 5 Close the paper access cover 6 Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover 7 10 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Paper Jam in the Paper Cassette 13 JAM TRAYS If a paper jam occurs inside the paper cassette follow these steps 1 Pull out the paper cassette 2 Remove the jammed paper Fig 7 6 Paper Jam at Paper Cassette 3 Install the paper cassette Do not pull out the upper paper cassette while paper is being fed from the lower paper cassette or it causes a paper jam Paper Jam in the Multi purpose Tray 13 JAM TRAYS If a paper jam occurs in the multi purpose tray follow these steps 1 Remove the jammed paper in the multi purpose tray 2 Reset
120. to make the displayed selection effective The steps you follow vary according to the font type scalable or bitmapped If you select a resident bitmapped font Letter Gothic 16 66 or optional bitmapped fonts the display shows the symbol set setting menu SYMBOL SET Go to step 9 If you select resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts the display shows the font style setting menu BROUGHAM l The displav changes to the font stvle menu BROUGHAM Reg Press the A or W switch until the desired style appears on the display Displav Message Font Stvle icd Lt Light T Reg Regular Roman Book or Antique Bold T Xb Extrabold T It Italic or Oblique gt Note The style indication appears after the font name and the style name differs according to the font name The italic or oblique indication can appear after other style indication indicates a bold italic font LtIt indicates a light italic font etc 4 52 4 CONTROL PANEL Press the SET switch to make the displaved selection effective then the displav shows the font size setting menu gt Note When vou have selected fixed pitch fonts vou set the font size bv the character pitch width When vou have selected proportional spacing fonts vou set the font size in points height The displav shows PITCH or POINT accordingly T
121. up block Oblique feed jam Adjustment lever Is the position of the adjustment lever of the Instruct the user to follow the spring pressure cassette corresponding to the paper sheet size correct method switching lever Paper front guide Is the paper front guide set in the correct Set the paper front guide position MP feeding 3 Are paper sheets set along the left wall Instruct the user to set paper paper sheet sheets correctly Cassette feeding 4 Is the cassette rear side guide set correctly Instruct the user to set it sheet guide correctly Cassette rear side guide MP feeding Is the MP sheet guide set correctly Instruct the user to set it paper sheet MP correctly sheet guide VI 20 J 2 Separation and feed block Paper jam Print Paper Is a recommended type of paper being used No Instruct the user to use recommended type of paper Static charge 2 Is the static charge eliminator dirty Yes Clean the static charge eliminator eliminator No Replace the transfer base assy J 3 Fixing and paper delivery block Paper jam Fixing unit 1 Is the entrance guide dirty Clean the entrance guide entrance guide Fixing unit 2 Is the separation guide worn or deformed Y Replace the fixing unit Separation guide Ye e Paper delivery 3 15 the paper sensor arm movement smooth Ye Replace the fixing unit N N actuator Changeover 4 Is the changeover guide movement smooth o Replace t
122. with your first name last name and a four digit number for your password Our BBS supports modem speeds up to 14 400 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit Fax Back System For USA only Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all Brother products This is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine not just the one you are calling from Please call 1 800 521 2846 and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and your index of Fax Back subjects DEALERS SERVICE CENTERS USA only For the name of an authorized dealer or service center call 1 800 284 4357 SERVICE CENTERS Canada only For service center addresses in Canada call 1 800 853 6660 INTERNET ADDRESS For technical questions and downloading drivers http www brother com 7 19 APPENDICES APPENDICES PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS Printing Print Method Electrophotographv bv semiconductor laser beam scanning Laser Wavelength 780 nm Pulse duration 80 ns Output 5 mW max Resolution 600 dots per inch The resolution can be enhanced bv using high resolution control feature Print Speed HL 1260e 12 pages minute A4 Letter size HL 1660 1660e 16 pages per minute 4 size 17 pages per minute Letter size Warm Up Max minute at 20 C 68 F First Pr
123. without displaying the message HEX DUMP you did not press the CONTINUE SHIFT switch immediately after pressing the SET switch Try the above steps once again 4 88 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 4 Send data from your computer When the printer receives data it starts printing hexadecimal values of the received data exit from the hex dump mode follow these basic steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Reset the printer with the RESET switch Or turn off the printer wait for a few seconds and turn it on again 4 89 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS LOWER UNIT LT 1200 LT 1600 Loading Paper from the Lower Paper Cassette The lower trav unit is a device that functions as a third paper source which can contain a maximum of 500 sheets of paper 80 g m or 20 Ibs For the optional lower trav unit consult the dealer where vou purchased the printer Lower Trav Unit Fig 5 1 Loading Paper in the Lower Trav Unit With the lower trav unit installed load paper into the lower paper cassette in the same way as you do the upper paper cassette See Installing the Paper Cassette in Chapter 2 The paper sizes available for the lower paper cassette are not the same for the upper paper cassette as shown below paper source available size the optional lower paper cut sheet letter legal A4 and Executive cassette T2 the multi purpose tray cu
124. 0 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 other size wide 90 216mm 3 5 8 5 long 148 356mm 5 8 14 cut sheet letter legal 4 ISO B5 Executive A5 ISO B6 and envelope COM 10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 cut sheet letter legal 4 Executive cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO 5 2 and plain paper 150 envelope 15 film 100 label stock 100 other tvpe weight 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ibs plain paper 500 weight 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ibs envelope 40 plain paper 500 weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ibs The capacitv of TI is reduced from the above specified capacities with the duplex unit installed 2 11 USER S GUIDE 2 12 Follow these steps to set paper install the paper cassette gt Note Be sure to select the same paper size as the paper to be used from vour application software or correct printing cannot be obtained If vour application software does not support paper size selection on its print menu you can change the paper size with the MODE switch in the FORMAT MODE For paper size change see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4 depending upon the final destination of the printer 110 120V model Letter size paper set 220 240V model 4 size paper set Load paper into the paper cassette as follows 1 Pull the paper cassette out of the prin
125. 001 UH2393001 UH2433001 UH2397001 UH2400000 UH2406000 UH2407000 UH2823001 UH2401000 UH2402000 UH2403000 UH2404000 UH2821001 UH2822001 UH2356000 UH2409000 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 6 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 MODEL HL 1660 TMT 17 54T U02 630 NO PR97037 PR97131 PR98001 PR98202 PR99087 99087 12 PAPER FEEDER 54T U03 630 MODEL HL 1660e No PR98202 PR99087 12 PAPER FEEDER PR99087 WITH PCB SW SPRING SCREW PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY TAPTITE CUP M3X6 MP PAPER DETECTION ACTUATOR TAPTITE BIND M3X8 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 60 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 70 WASHER PLAIN BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID TAPTITE BIND M3X4 BEARING CALLOR TRAY SENSOR HOLDER PE SENSOR ACTUATOR TRAY PE ACTUATOR LINK DU DETECTION ACTUATOR PE SENSOR ACTUATOR MP REGIST SENSOR ACTUATOR LATCH MP PAPER FEED GUIDE ASSY SP SEPARATION PAD ASSY SEPARATION PAD SPRING MP MP TRAY ASSY MP PE SUB ACTUATOR MP TRAY COVER MP EXTENSION TRAY SPACER MP PAPER GUIDE MP RELEASE PLATE MP RELEASE SUPPORTER MP SPRING PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR 30 RELEASE PLATE L RELEASE PLATE R UH2357001 087320616 UH2359000 085310815 UH2362001 UH2364001 UH2366000
126. 001 U74234001 UH2250001 UH2252000 UH2254000 31242001 0 2263001 083313015 087320616 8 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 TONER CARTRIDGE Ws 2 COVER ASSV GRAV1227 TAPTITE CUP S M3X10 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 400 CARTRIDGE STOPPER ASSV DC GEAR HOLDER ASSY DC MOTOR ASSY 2 SP TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 GEAR 48 SPRING WASHER PLAIN 10 PAPER DELIVERY GEAR ASSY TAPTITE CUP 4 5 PAPER DELIVERY HOLDER SPRING PCB SPACER F SCANNER FAN MOTOR TAPTITE PAN B M3X30 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 500 10 TRANSFER VB 2 8 2072 MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 600 11 PAPER TRAY MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 650 651 E TRANSFER 787 087321016 98174 1 1 PAPER TRAY UH2806001 UH2799001 UH2802001 UH2487001 UH2841001 UH2360000 UH2459000 UH2469000 UH2463001 UH2465001 085310815 UH2472001 UH2804001 1 A A Sm A mom om Om c lc DESCRIPTION REMARK TRANSFER BASE ASSY SP TRANFER ROLLER A ASSY SP TAPTITE CUP S M3X10 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 600 PAPER TRAY UNIT SO USA SP GRAY 1227 PAPER TRAY UNIT S EUR SP GRAY1227 PAPER TRAY UNIT S CAN SP GRAY1227 SEPARATION PAD ASSY T SEPARATION PAD SPRING 200 ROLLER ROLLER HOLDER PAPER FRONT GUIDE BLUE6155 GEAR 56T LINK SIZE DRUM TAPTITE BIND M3X8 TRAY GUIDE PL
127. 0D 15060 Noweganl t 5 D 15061 Norwegian2 gt 8 88 OF ISO25 French e 4 o 15069 French OK 1501 88 5K 59 0 Ww 8 Ss Owe ee 09S 9U Windows30Lla nl 1 ee 19M Symbol 579 Wingdings These symbol sets are variations of the Roman 8 symbol set LetterGothic 16 66 is a bitmapped font Appendix 35 USER GUIDE Svmbol Sets Supported the Printer 1 Font Compatible and Original Tvpefaces PCL Svmbol Set Tvpeface Atlanta Copen Calgary Helsinki Portugal Tennes SymbolSe Symbol hagen Dingbats 8U Roman 8 Q e ON ISO 8859 1 Latini 2N ISO 8859 2 Latin2 5N ISO 8859 9 Latin5 6N ISO 8859 10 Latin6 100 8 110 8 D N 120 850 170 852 260 775 9T PC Turk 190 Windows 3 1 Latini 9 Windows 3 1 Latin2 5T Windows 3 1 Latin5 7J DeskTop 97 1004 05 2 107 5 e 131 Ventura International Q 141 Ventura US 61 Microsoft Publishing 8 Math 8 5 PS 6M Ventura Math 15U PI Font 1U Legal 1 ISO 4 United Kingdom 00 ISO 6 ASCII 20 ISO 2 IRV 05 ISO 11 Swedish names 01 ISO 15 Italian
128. 0s3b132T San Diego ESC s 1 p v0s5b133T US Roman ESC sl p v0s0b135T Appendix 50 APPENDICES CCITT G3 G4 and TIFF original command One of the unique features of the PCL mode of this printer is it supports CCITT G3 G4 type data compression and TIFF format CCITT G3 G4 Raster Graphic Mode 1152 The printer s PCL mode supports CCITT G3 G4 type graphic data compression This format is popular in optical document storage area as this compression is effective to store black and white type pictures Compression mode for CCITT G3 G4 is 1152 and the command becomes ESC b 1152 As G3 G4 format does not have picture size resolution information the printer requires a header at the beginning of the picture data The header size is 94 byte Both the header and the picture data are transferred by one transfer graphics data command ESC b W Normal PCL transfer graphics data command has a limitation of the data size and should not exceed 32767 Unlike other mode mode 1152 is special and this mode does not have 32767 byte size limitation Print model is not applied to this type of raster graphics The mode 1152 graphic data consists of the following data structure The picture data follows the header Header 94 bytes File length Picture HHH CCITT G3 G4 data of ESC b HHFW Picture Data length Header format is described on the next page You have to specify mode 1152 by sending ES
129. 1 56 1B 2A 70 59 1B 25 30 42 1B 25 31 42 2 63 1t AB 2A 63 1t 4C 1B 2A 63 50 54 2A 63 58 2A 63 59 Appendix 39 USER GUIDE Function RASTER GRAPHICS Resolution Setting 75 dpi 100 dpi 200 dpi 150 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi Raster Graphics Presentation Orientation Oriented Raster Oriented Begin Raster Graphics Left most Position Current Position Transfer Data Set Compression Mode Uncoded Run Length Encoded Tagged Image File Format Delta Row Mode 5 Mode 9 CCITT G3 G4 original TIFF for 600 dpi only original 1200 dpi Image Format for 1200 dpi only original Compress Transfer Raster Y Offset Raster Height Raster Width End Raster Graphics PRINT MODEL Select Pattern Solid Black default Solid White HP defined Shading Pattern HP defined Cross Hatched Pattern User defined Brother defined Shading Pattern 64 steps original Select Source Transparency Mode Transparent Opaque Select Pattern Transparency Mode Transparent Opaque Appendix 40 Command ESC t75R ESC t 100R ESC t 200R ESC 1150 ESC t 300R ESC t 600 ESC r0OF ESC r3 F ESC r0A ESC r1A ESC b W data t byte ESC b0M ESC b1M ESC b2 M ESC b 3 M ESC b 5M ESC b9M ESC b 1152 ESC b 1024 ESC b 1027M ESC b C data byte ESC b Y Line ESC r T Row ESC r S Pixel ESC rB ESC vOT ESC v1T E
130. 1 Naeshiro cho Mizuho ku Nagova 467 Japan This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards 21 CFR chapter 1 subchapter J Figure 1 2 Caution Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual mav result in hazardous radiation exposure 3 3 Additional Information When servicing or adjusting the optical svstem of the printer be careful not to place screwdrivers or other reflective objects in the path of the laser beam Be sure to take off anv personal accessories such as watches and rings before working on the printer A reflected beam though invisible can permanentiv damage the eves Since the beam is invisible the following label is attached to the inside of covers where danger of exposure to laser radiation exist Figure 1 3 4 THE PRINTER 4 1 External Views 1 Upper cover 9 AC inlet 2 Control panel Face up print delivery port 3 MP tray 1 Fan outlet port 4 1 42 Rating label 6 Trav 2 Option 3 Optional I O slot 6 Font card slot RS 232C interface connector 7 Font cartridge slot 5 Centronics interface connector Power switch Optional interface connector Figure 1 4 4 2 Cross Sectional View C 9 9 9 9 9 Registration rollers EP ED cartridge Photosensitive drum Laser scanner unit Transfer unit Face
131. 20 WSB L S 870 18 4IB 90 1 COSO CO 90s lt 970 90 gt 850 0 WEB 50 9 480 20 8 10 90 WIB S0 420 PD 4IB 20 08 850 0 898 20 209 0960 90 310 90 310 0 310 80 80 20 9010 20 WIB 20 0s 01 201 gcyy EPlorvy 410 12 201 x La jsa sa GV LV GeV LV 82 1 0 AAA Leviva 58 5 La i Tat SI ee s Ec loa SEN NT S BANS e Viera Tasa 9i t6 TCI 12 BET SEN YT ost Si EXJWL 5 E i 9i E vt Set T 2 Hs al LV SI tel T SES VT gr SL YF ast pe SV V Vi gr SV Vic 59789 ead 2 9i 6t gei LI E BEVE TI 12 02 LT ISSA ea eit SI Si Issa pa it Issa Si IC S2 SIT T 28 WI eta SEN NY T ie en SI ISSA EUA Si 19 en Si 1 OST ISSA Tor 9i oc 601 LI 12 ISSA TIVELI 12 ra ISSA SATA BEY E LOT 5 i2 ISSA STA SL V I Sar Sr S m Issa saaa Tava Sj V VIE SC vat L V ie DAP u IAEA BC NS bel 18 54 M Bec 16 201 Sr 1 ISSA SATA x
132. 200 baud 7 or 8 bits NONE EVEN or ODD 1 or 2 stop bits ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF Exit to RS 232C Setting Menu Continued INTERFACE MODE Continued FORMAT MODE See 4 20 RESOLUTION MODE See 4 28 PAGE PROTECTION See 4 31 CARD OPERATION HP mode only See 4 32 Setting Menu AUTO Continued ORIENTATION AUTO MODE PAGE FORMAT MODE Sub Setting Menu MIO Setting ORI PORTRAIT AUTO LF OFF AUTO CR OFF AUTO WRAP OFF CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Setting Available only when a commercial MIO card has been installed The settings available on the installed MIO card can appear under the sub setting menu PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE LF CR OFF LF FF or VT CR OFF LF FF or VT only ON Auto wrap on OFF Auto wrap off AUTO SKIP ON ON Auto FF at bottom margin HP mode OFF No FF at bottom margin AUTO MASK OFF EPSON amp IBM modes exit PAPER LETTER Auto mask on OFF Auto mask off Exit to AUTO MODE LETTER LEGAL 4 5 For 110 120V model B5 B6 EXECUTIVE PAPER A4 COM10 MONARCH C5 and For 220 240V model DL LEFT M 0C 0 to 126 columns RIGHT M 80C 10 to 136 columns Letter Portrait RIGHT M 78C 10 to 136 columns 4 Portrait TOP M 0 5 HP mode 0 0 33 0 5 1 0 1 5 or 2 0 BOTTOM M 0 5 0 0 33 0 5 1 0 1 5 or 2 0 HP mode LINES 60L 5 to 128 lines page
133. 56 shades of gray in HP9 LaserJet 57M HL 1660e only LaseJet 4 emulation and BR Script level 2 producing nearly photographic quality CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Universal Paper Cassette and Manual Loading This printer loads paper automaticallv from the paper cassette Since the paper cassette is a universal type a number of different sizes of paper can be used Even envelopes can be loaded from the multi purpose tray and the upper paper cassette In addition the multi purpose tray allows you to load paper sheet by sheet See 3 15 for auto loading and 3 16 for manual loading Four Interfaces This printer has a high speed bi directional parallel interface an RS 232C serial interface a Universal Serial Bus USB HL 1660e only and a modular input output MIO compatible interface If your application software supports the bi directional parallel interface you can monitor the printer status It is fully compatible with the industry standard bi directional parallel interface See page 2 17 The RS 232C serial interface is an industry standard so that you can connect it to any computer using a standard serial cable See page 2 17 The Universal Serial Bus is an interface which allows the printer connect with multiple peripheral devices HL 1660e only The MIO interface allows you to install a commercial MIO compatible card If you install the card you can use one more interface port for features such as networking or printer sharin
134. 6v 8v Lv 9v sv vv v Iv ov NS NS 39 DIJA IIA 22 mcoo x xxmmo 4 E X AE 9INQBI NUMOIH VSQ lg NOGAOIN 960 58 gt 95 40 NASAQIH QIIT 0 NISNOIM 190 70 NO3NQOIH 911 E0 NLOZOIW IIL 8 NINIOIH SB 0 NOIHMOV I6B C0 N3SOIH 490 98 La 98 sv ca sa va En ca cy Len ev Seq Seg ma A Ar 2 999 INS val aa ev o ved 30D gr NN301H 39A NA SPEXJIVL 214 1 82V3 LANKA A ASsO CAE 390 0 801 10 209 H HSV3 000 certa QLO LO 011 0 40 NHMOI 810 0 000 1WLW Ag Scis 000 BPIM T Leta H 5 Hee 008 6 1 340 60 HEB 10 0010 eas 11 0 1 ENS 900 LV i jsa 9v i ETT jsa sv Ei Tvive wa vv vi v 2l Mv 18 TI
135. 8 0 3215 v80 Te NS IIS 80 zy 582 6890 90 EF 4 88 0 59 5y Sy 870 72 Ly NO3HSA GO b0 l gr 585 6890 80 NSLIP3 90 N3sdn 8 x 18 NISdH 80 x 5 35035 V80 C5 N8I1M EBB x 98 NVI1M 882 x 55 811 880 as YILIN 880 i7 85 85 T 1 D ETT tezo 890 90 ZUNVA 890 90 TUNVA t ha l gt uzm gt 1 Mer 10540 224 10540 160 C2 NHIOINIS 889 f NIUVIVI E L 182 L 25 l 85 lt 1 68 gt N3JOA 330 SB 10 NVLVI v1va 460 600 as 9 5 1 u 3571 5 6d HNVIS 0 ELM 3 0 12 25 2 1 Nye E H 69 baned MAPTTOLE 10 35 2 i Ast CAC 9 9 tit ALTTO C92 ear 1 0212 ISB 19 3 IL0 Cm cer i bl lt 3LIHM 39513 eeu
136. 8 0 5115 33 Qv8 v amp INHI 2 368 20 NIB 2 NN340 52 K880 1OSdH 82 68B x 10nd OLO OLO asg os S8 Qse L GL9 os U 250 9 050 15 casg 5 98 5884 E84 jesa 98 9 qu LEd Sta INAS SEd vd ZATYS ELd LNOLSY EEd 126 2244 4 21106 144 Ted eNIS OLd aed ILNV L9d ISNV 99d ISNV S9d IENV C9d jenv 29d INV 19d 999 180 124 vad ved 180 12d 880 824 jeva Lsd Tva ssd TYLNI SSd pH IN2 Sd I INI CSd ELNI 2Sd 21 1 154 54 SIQV LId TIQV E1d 60V TId 8 V 01d L V L8d 90 904 309 984 v V vOd 4 14 104 LAQHS Lvd TW19S 9vd 1 TLNI d LNI ebd Ted 438 55 55 2 ISSA 1n0x NIX IDA 13535 3393690854 tt I8 2943 868 78 as Nama 850 70 gt les 9 3 0 0 lag 858 70 lt 0 K8C0 v0 c aca vo aca vo er 1VH FE Eg l sE NIHNIVH 020 SE 10H 811 IE 3715 lt 80 St eazis vsa 55 2321
137. AGE PROTECTION 9 Note The setting in this mode menu is effective in the HP LaserJet FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL and HP GL modes It does not appear in the BR Script 2 mode If print images are too complex to print the printer may print them out in parts or only on part of the page If this occurs the printer loses print data and shows the following message 31 PRINT OVERRUN 4 31 USER GUIDE The page protection function reserves additional memorv so that the printer can create the entire page image in memory before physically printing it out This function can be set for letter A4 or legal size paper Select the paper size for page protection Display Message Page Protection PROTECT AUTO Page protection on only when it is necessary Factory setting PROTECT LETTER Page protection on for letter size paper PROTECT A4 Page protection on for A4 size paper PROTECT LEGAL Page protection on for legal size paper PROTECT OFF Page protection off To protect pages you need the memory capacity as shown in the following table Protection 300 dpi 600 dpi Off 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes Letter or A4 2 Mbytes 6 Mbytes Legal 3 Mbytes 6 Mbytes Duplex 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes e Notes When you use the page protection function note the following When you want to print at 600 dpi with the page protection function on be sure to expand the memory capacity to a minimum of 6 Mbytes or the res
138. APER FEEDER PR99087 REFNO CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK mele 0282400 PADDLED DER ETA UN WITH PCB SW SPRING SCREW PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 MP PAPER DETECTION ACTUATOR TAPTITE BIND B M3X8 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR BEARING TAPTITE BIND S M3X6 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 60 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 70 WASHER PLAIN BEARING TAPTITE BIND S M3X6 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID TAPTITE BIND S M3X4 BEARING CALLOR TRAY SENSOR HOLDER PE SENSOR ACTUATOR TRAY PE ACTUATOR LINK DU DETECTION ACTUATOR PE SENSOR ACTUATOR MP REGIST SENSOR ACTUATOR LATCH MP PAPER FEED GUIDE ASSY SP SEPARATION PAD ASSY SEPARATION PAD SPRING MP MP TRAY ASSY MP PE SUB ACTUATOR MP TRAY COVER MP EXTENSION TRAY SPACER MP PAPER GUIDE MP RELEASE PLATE MP RELEASE SUPPORTER MP SPRING PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR 30 RELEASE PLATEL RELEASE PLATE R UH2357001 087320616 UH2359000 085310815 UH2362001 UH2364001 UH2366000 085320616 UH2416001 UH2367001 010633000 UH2366000 085320616 UH2369001 085320416 UH2428000 UH2379000 UH2380000 UH2381000 UH2382000 UH2383000 UH2384000 UH2136001 UH2797001 UH2393001 UH2433001 UH2397001 UH2400000 UH2406000 UH2407000 UH2823001 UH2401000 UH2402000 UH2403000 UH2404000 UH2821001 UH2822001 UH2356000 UH2409000 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 6 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
139. ATA Save data that the printer will receive and set its ID SAVE MACRO Save macro This menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode PRIMARY FONT Save the primary font selected with the FONT switch This menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode ECONDARY FONT Save the secondary font selected with the FONT switch This menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode DOWNLOAD FONT Save a download font This menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode and BR Script 2 mode 9 Note If the capacitv of card becomes low while macros and fonts are being saved the display shows the CARD FULL error message and they cannot be saved Use a new card or delete unnecessary macros and fonts from the card The CARD LIST displays the contents and the used capacity 4 35 USER GUIDE 4 36 e Save Data You can send data and save it on the card In this mode any kind of data such as PCL data BR Script 2 data and command strings can be saved When you select SAVE DATA and you press the SET switch the display shows the following guide menus This message prompts you to press the SET switch again so that the printer exits from the data reception status when you finish sending data Send data from your computer e Notes When you send data to be saved on the card it is temporarily stored in the RAM of the printer Note the following e If the received data
140. ATE 1 ADJUST KNOB STOPPER MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 650 651 12 PAPER FEEDER 0 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 63 PR98202 12 PAPER FEEDER REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK 2m Ol gt UH2824001 UH2357001 087320616 UH2359000 085310815 UH2362001 UH2364001 UH2366000 085320616 UH2416001 UH2367001 UL0633000 UH2366000 085320616 UH2369001 085320416 UH2428000 UH2379000 UH2380000 UH2381000 UH2382000 UH2383000 UH2384000 UH2136001 UH2797000 UH2393001 UH2433001 UH2397001 UH2400000 UH2406000 UH2407000 UH2823001 UH2401000 UH2402000 UH2403000 UH2404000 UH2821001 UH2822001 NO PR98202 A CA CA os Ss PND WW PAPER FEED CHASSIS UNIT 2 SP WITH PCB SW SPRING SCREW PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY TAPTITE CUP M3X6 MP PAPER DETECTION ACTUATOR TAPTITE BIND M3X8 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR BEARING TAPTITE BIND M3X6 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 60 PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSY 70 WASHER PLAIN BEARING TAPTITE BIND S M3X6 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID REGIST SENSOR ACTUATOR LATCH MP PAPER FEED GUIDE ASSY SP SEPARATION PAD ASSY SEPARATION PAD SPRING MP MP TRAY ASSY MP PE SUB ACTUATOR MP TRAY COVER MP EXTENSION TRAY SPACER MP PAPER GUIDE MP RELEASE PLATE MP RELEASE SUPPORTER MP SPRING PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY 3 PAPER PICK UP ROLL
141. AVE SETTING 1 SAVE SETTING 2 Execute the data on the card Execute the selected data Exit to EXECUTE DATA Print the contents of the card Send data to be saved End saving the data Set data ID for saved data Save a macro Set macro ID for saved macro Save primary font Set primary font ID for saved font Save secondary font Set secondary font ID for saved font Save download font Set download font ID for saved font Exit to CARD OPERATION Delete the selected macro Delete the selected data Delete the selected font Format the flash card Execute formatting the card Exit to FORMAT CARD Exit to CARD OPERATION ON or OFF Enter pass number ON or OFF 1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON ON or OFF CONT or STOP exit to NETWORK MODE AUTO or MANUAL ON or OFF ALL LJ4 Increase or decrease the print density 15 levels Increase or decrease the input buffer capacity 15 levels Save the current setting as 1 Save the current settings as 2 exit to ADVANCED MODE Shows the number of printed pages Exit MODE CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL MODE Switch Settings BR Script 2 Mode The following table shows all the selections you can make with the MODE switch in the BR Script 2 mode 9 Note The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the current emulation mode printer status and any options that may be installed in the printer Mode Menu Setting Menu Sub Setting Menu Setting
142. B 52 4D 1B OD 52 44 1B OD 21 52 1B OD 46 44 1B OD 21 45 1B 28 30 44 1B 28 31 44 1B 28 31 45 1B 28 39 45 1B 28 30 46 1B 28 31 46 1B 28 30 47 1B 28 31 47 1B 28 30 49 1B 28 36 4A 1B 28 37 1B 28 31 304A 1B 28 31 324A 1B 28 31 33 4A 1B 28 31 344A 1B 28 30 4B 1B 28 32 4B 1B 28 30 4E Function Wingdings PS Math Ventura Math Math 8 Svmbol ISO 8859 2 Latin2 ISO 8859 5 Latin5 ISO 11 Swedish HP Spanish ISO 17 Spanish ISO 10 Swedish ISO 16 Portuguese ISO 84 Portuguese ISO 85 Spanish Windows 3 1 Latin5 PC Turkish ISO 6 ASCH Legal ISO 2 IRV Roman 8 Windows 3 0 Latini PC 8 PC 8 D N PC 850 Pi Font PC 852 Windows 3 1 Latini Character Set original ROMAN 8 US ASCII GERMAN UK ENGLISH FRENCH DUTCH ITALIAN S SPANISH A ENGLISH W P U K ASCII 2 SYMBOL INTERNATIONAL AMERICAN ENGLISH U K ASCII PORTUGUESE SWISS GERMAN AMERICAN SPANISH NORWEGIAN CANADIAN FINNISH SWEDISH SOUTH AFRICA JAPANESE ENGLISH The symbol character set is not available for Tennessee and Helsinki fonts Command ESC 579 L ESC 5M ESC 6M ESC 8M ESC 19M ESC 23 ESC 5N ESC 0S ESC 1S ESC 2S ESC 35 ESC 4S ESC 55 ESC 6S ESC 5 T ESC 9 T ESC 0 U ESC 10 ESC 20 ESC 80 ESC 90 ESC 100 ESC 11 U ESC 12 U ESC 15 U 170 ESC 190 ESC s1C ESC s2C ESC s3C ESC s4C ESC s5C ESC s6C ESC s7C ESC s8C ESC s9C ESC s 10C ESC ESC 12C ESC s 13 C ESC s 14C
143. B5 other size wide 90 216mm 3 5 8 5 long 148 356mm 5 8 14 cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive A5 ISO B6 and A6 envelope COM 10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 cut sheet letter legal A4 Executive cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 except T2 and Executive plain paper 150 envelope 15 OHP film 100 label stock 100 other type weight 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ibs plain paper 500 weight 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ibs envelope 40 plain paper 500 weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ibs The capacity of T1 is reduced from the above specified capacities with the duplex unit installed CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER Using Envelopes Avoid using envelopes with the following characteristics e Smooth or shiny surfaces e Protection cover at envelopes adhesive parts e Sealing flaps that have not been folded at purchase e Sealing flaps as shown below e Three more lavers of paper in marked area e Each side folded as shown below Fig 3 3 Envelope Information 3 13 USER S GUIDE Before loading envelopes in the cassette check the following Envelopes should have a lengthwise sealing flap The sealing flaps should be crisply and correctly folded irregularly cut or folded envelopes may cause paper jams Envelopes should consist of two layers of paper in the following marked area Feeding Direc
144. Bold Bold Italic Helsinki Oblique Bold Bold Oblique BR Symbol W Dingbats BR Script Fonts Atlanta Book Book Oblique Demi Demi Oblique Copenhagen Roman Italic Bold Bold Italic Portugal Roman Italic Bold Bold Italic Calgary Medium Italic Brother Original Fonts Bermuda Script Germany San Diego US Roman BR Script Level 2 Mode Scalable Fonts Atlanta Book Book Oblique Demi Demi Oblique Brussels Light Light Italic Demi Demi Italic Brougham Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Helsinki Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Helsinki Narrow Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Copenhagen Roman Italic Bold Bold Italic Portugal Roman Italic Bold Bold Italic Tennessee Roman Italic Bold Bold Italics Calgary Medium Italic BR Symbol BR Dingbats 18 RAM 19 Font cartridge card slots Two slots PR99017 Albertville Extrabold Antique Oakland Oblique Bold Cleveland Condensed Conecticut Guatemala Antique Italic Bold Bold Italic Letter Gothic Oblique Bold Maryland Oklahoma Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Utah Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Utah Condensed Oblique Bold Bold Oblique Bermuda Script Germany San Diego US Roman 2M bytes expandable to 26M bytes One font cartridge slot and one font card slot USA and Canada Europe and Australia 20 Power souse 21 Power consumption Printing average Stand bv Sleep Note Printing pea
145. C amp a L 27 38 97 76 1B 26 61 4C column Right Margin ESC amp at M 27 38 97 77 1B 26 61 4D column Clear Side Margin ESC 9 2757 39 Line Pitch ESC amp 27 38 108 67 1B 26 6C 43 48 inch Line Spacing ESC amp D 27 38 108 68 1B 26 6C 44 1 line inch ESC amp 1D 27 38 108 49 68 1B 26 6C 31 44 2 lines inch ESC amp 2D 27 38 108 50 68 1B 26 6C 32 44 lines inch ESC amp 3D 27 38 108 51 68 1B 26 6C 33 44 4 lines inch ESC amp 4D 27 38 108 52 68 1B 26 6C 34 44 6 lines inch ESC amp 6D 27 38 108 54 68 1B 26 6C 36 44 8 lines inch ESC amp 8D 27 38 108 56 68 1B 26 6C 38 44 12 lines inch ESC amp 12D 27 38 108 49 50 68 1B 26 6C 31 32 44 16 lines inch ESC amp 16D 27 38 108 49 54 68 1B 26 6C 31 36 44 24 lines inch ESC amp 24D 27 38 108 50 52 68 1B 26 6C 32 34 44 48 lines inch ESC amp 148 D 27 38 108 52 56 68 1B 26 6C 34 38 44 Character Pitch ESC amp k H 27 38 107 72 1B 26 6B 48 3 120 inch ex 10 pitch ESC amp Kk 12H 27 38 107 49 50 72 1B 26 6B 31 32 48 Appendix 38 Function Paper Size Executive Letter Legal 4 5 B6 5 Envelopes Monarch 10 DL C5 CURSOR POSITIONING Horizontal Position Horizontal Position Horizontal Position Vertical Position Vertical Position Vertical Position VECTOR GRAPHICS Enter HP GL 2 Mode Use Previous HP GL 2 Pen Position Use Current PCL CAP HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size Set Picture Frame An
146. C b1152M command for each graphic data transfer About CCITT G3 G4 data format please refer to CCITT THE INTERNATIONAL TELEGRAPH AND TELEPHONE CONSULTATIVE COMMITTEE BLUE BOOK Volume VII Appendix 51 USER GUIDE Mode 1152 graphic data header data structure Position 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 55 56 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Appendix 52 Data Description 6E 6E nn This is header ID 00 reserved Header Version 5E 000000 Picture data start offset from header top File Length File length including 94 byte header If file length is 65 536 byte these 4 bytes become 00 00 01 00 01 00 reserved 01 00 reserved 4A 00 0000 reserved compression 02 00 Fax MH format 03 00 Fax MR format 04 00 Fax G4 format 00 00 All zero Picture Data Length If picture data length is 65 442 65 536 94 byte these 4 bytes become A2 FF 00 00 01 00 bit pixel 01 00 bit pixel Pixels line If picture dot width 2400 these 2 bytes become 60 09 Pixels line Same 64 65 Lines picture If picture line count 3100 these 2 bytes become 1 0 Lines picture Same as 70 71 00 00 reserved Photo metrics 00 00 data 0 white 0100 data 0 black 02 00 reserved Endian format Bit Fill Order 01 00 filled from MSB 02 00 filled from LSB 01 00 reserved 00 00 reserved min p
147. CH 45 MIO ERROR NO MIO BOARD Now initializing Font cartridge error this message is displayed if a font cartridge than a Hewlett Packard Company C2053A C01 Word Perfect is used No font cartridge is set Flash memory error No flash memory is set The Write Protect switch of the flash memory is on MIO error No MIO board is set MIO error if this message remains displayed VI 24 6 2 DRAM Test 1 To start up the test program While pressing the W Switch RESET switch turn the power DRAM CHECK will be displayed Then press CONTINUE switch to start DRAM checking 2 The LCD will display START DRAM TEST and the DATA lamp or ALARM lamp will be flashing 8 On satisfactory completion of all the RAM test the LCD will display DRAM 4 If any DRAM has an error the LCD will display MOOOQQOI RAM address WRITE data READ data The following table is the reference Table 6 1 Video Controller DRAM Address Corresponding Table Replace with SIMM corresponding to memorv map 1 Replace the DRAM on the Main 2 Replace the SIMM Note1 There may be the case that the above sequence doesn t work correctly according to the contents of RAM failure or in faulty assembly such as soldering bride or ineffective soldering etc Note2 PRINT CHECK may be displayed when getting out from TEST m
148. CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO read only variable lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO read only variable CR lt LF gt 1 or more lines of printable characters or WS followed by CR lt LF gt FF EPJL INITIALIZE lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INQUIRE LPARM emulation variable lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INQUIRE LPARM emulation variable CR lt LF gt value lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt PJL JOB NAME job START first page END last page lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL OPMSG DISPLAY message lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY message lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL RESET lt CR gt lt LF gt EPJL SET LPARM emulation variable value lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL STMSG DISPLAY message lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL STMSG DISPLAY message lt CR gt lt LF gt key lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt lt ESC gt 12345X PJL USTATUS variable value lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL USTATUS variable lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 or more lines of printable characters or lt WS gt followed by lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt PJL USTATUSOFF lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Appendix 59 USER GUIDE EPSON FX 850 Mode Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal Null Ignored NUL 0 00 Bell Ignored BEL 7 07 Space Moves the cursor one position to the right SP 32 20 Backspace Moves the cursor one position to the left BS 8 08 Li
149. DRAM 16Mx4 8MB DRAM SIMM 2 slots 64MBmax CARD _ MIO RELAY Gate Array uPD65632GF CONNECTOR CONTROL PANEL Engine controller Low voltage Power Supply Figure 3 1 Main PCB Block Diagram 1 1 2 Video Controller Circuit 1 CPU block lt CPU 33 MB86832 100 manufactured by Fujitsu RISC chip Clock speed 19 6608 MHz Appearance 178 pin QFP Voltage 3V ASIC Gate Array Block 19 MB87F1610 Fujitsu 240 QFP Controls the address decoder timers and interfaces Centronics and RS 232C Controls HRC High Resolution Control GSC Gray Scale Control and economy mode drivened by 3V 3 uPD65632GF 100 pin QFP Controls the I O ports and others Font Cartridge Card Block Fontcartridge option The font cartridge has a 32 memory area and is controlled by the 16 bit bus The address bus a buffer LS245 and the data bus a buffer LCX245 Font Card option The font card has a 32 memory area and is controlled by the 16 bit bus The card is supplied with 12V power because the flash card requires 12V power supply when writing or erasing data The address bus is buffered by LS245 and the data bus is buffered by LCX245 Centronics RS 232C interface block Centronics parallel interface Data transmission and reception are controlled by the MB87F1610 19 RS 232C Data transmission and reception are controlled by the MB87F1610
150. Data 4 Ground Appendix 14 APPENDICES SYMBOL CHARACTER SETS Xou can select the svmbol and character sets with the FONT switch in the LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and Proprinter XL emulation modes See FONT Switch in Chapter 4 When vou have selected the HP GL emulation mode vou can select the standard or alternate character set with the MODE switch See GRAPHICS MODE in Chapter 4 OCR Svmbol Sets When the OCR A or OCR B font is selected the corresponding svmbol set is alwavs used OCR A OCR B Appendix 15 USER GUIDE HP LaserJet Mode Roman 8 8U ISO Latini ON ISO Latin2 2N ISO Latin5 5N Appendix 16 APPENDICES PC 8 10U PC 8 D N 110 PC 850 12U PC 852 17U Appendix 17 USER GUIDE PC 8 Turkish 9T Windows Latini 19U Windows Latin2 9E Windows 5 5 Appendix 18 APPENDICES Legal 1U Ventura Math 6M Ventura Intl 137 Ventura US 147 Appendix 19 USER GUIDE PS Math 5M PS Text 107 Math 8 8M Pi Font 15U Appendix 20 APPENDICES MS Publishing 6J Windows 3 0 9U Desktop 7J MC Text 12J Appendix 21 USER GUIDE Svmbol 19M Windings 579L The following table shows characters available onlv in the corresponding character set The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code values with which characters are to be replaced in the Roman 8 character set For other characters see the Roman 8 char
151. E lamp lights and the printer is ready to receive data from the computer When the printer is off line the ON LINE lamp is off To receive data from the computer set the printer on line To operate the control panel switches set the printer off line When you press the SEL switch when the printer is the on line state it turns off line and the LCD displays the current emulation mode AUTO LaserJet 5 You can enter other emulations in the auto emulation mode by pressing the A UP or W DOWN switch 45 USER GUIDE SET Switch e Notes When vou press the SEL switch remember the following e All other switches except the SEL switch are operational only when the printer is off line If the printer is not in auto emulation mode the LCD displays the current emulation by pressing the SEL key to take it off line but you cannot enter other emulation modes To make settings in other emulation modes press the EMULATION switch and select the emulation The SEL switch works as a quick exit switch If you are lost in the display menus or you want to quickly exit the display menu press the SEL switch You can exit quickly from any depth of the display menu to the on line ready state If you have already made a setting effective by pressing the SET switch and then press the SEL switch to quickly exit your setting whether made by accident or on purpose will remain effective Pressing the SEL switch will not cancel any setting
152. EMOVE COVER GRAY1227 087320616 2 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 087320616 1 M3X6 087320616 1 M3X6 087321016 2 M3X10 MODEL HL 1660 TMT 17 54 001 400 NO PR98175 PR99088 10 GHASSIS 900 R IRID UH2233001 1 JDC GEAR HOLDER ASSY UH2814001 1 DC MOTOR ASSY 2 SP 087320616 3 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2238000 UH2239000 1 JGEAR 20 50 UH2240000 1 JGEAR 24 72 UH2241000 1 JGEAR 22 55 UH2242000 UH2243000 UH2244000 UH2245001 1 JGEAR 48 SPRING 026100136 1 WASHER PLAIN S 10 UH2255001 1 PAPER DELIVERY GEAR ASSY U74234001 4 TAPTITE CUP M4X5 UH2250001 1 PAPER DELIVERY HOLDER SPRING UH2252000 1 SPACER 2 UH2254000 2 SPACER 1 T31242001 2 PCB SPACER F UH2263001 1 SCANNER FAN MOTOR 083313015 2 TAPTITE PAN B M3X30 087320616 1 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 MODEL HL 1660 TMT 17 54T U02 500 8 COVERS 0 UH2071001 UH2072001 UH2076001 UH2077001 UH2027001 UH2082001 UH2104001 UH2085001 UH2103001 087320616 087320616 087320616 087321016 T I NO PR98175 PR99088 9 CHASSIS 90 UH2233001 UH2814001 087320616 UH2238000 UH2239000 UH2240000 UH2241000 UH2242000 UH2243000 UH2244000 UH2245001 026100136 UH2255001 U74234001 UH2250001 UH2252000 UH2254000 731242001 UH2263001 083313015 087320616 PR99088 1 CARTRIDGE LID GRAY1227 1 JFONT COVER ASSV GRAV1227 1 JCLEANER BRUSH 1 JSIDE COVER L G
153. ENDICES Appendix 67 USER GUIDE Bar Code Control Appendix 68 The printer can print bar codes in the HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes Print Bar Codes or Expanded Characters Code ESC i Dec 27 105 Hex 1B 69 Format ESCin n Creates bar codes or expanded characters according to the segment of parameters For further information about parameters see the following Definition of Parameters This command must end with the code SCH Definition of Parameters This bar code command can have the following parameters in the parameter segment n n Since parameters are effective within the single command syntax ESC in n V they don t take effect in the subsequent bar code commands If certain parameters are not specified they take the default settings The last parameter must be the bar code data start or or the expanded character data start T or L Other parameters can be specified in any sequence The prefix of each parameter can be a lower case or upper case character for example t0 53 or 53 etc Bar Code n t0 CODE 39 default n 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 n t3 T3 FIM US Post Net n 4 4 Post Net US Post Net n t5 or 5 EAN 8 EAN 13 or UPC A n t6 UPC E n
154. ER COLLAR 30 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 630 13 SCANNER MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 700 14 FIXING UNIT 120V 230V R nA P CO 98054 98061 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 770 771 13 SCANNER REF NO 5225 TERSSY CIS REMARK SCANNER UNIT ASSY C SP 00000 i SCN FLAT CABLE 6P 087321616 4 TAPTITE CUP S M3X16 UK3254001 1 POLYGON HARNESS 14 FIXING UNIT 120V 230V REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARK UH2816001 NIT 120 SP UH2817001 UH2793001 UH2608001 UK2451001 B48K142 200 085310815 UH2623001 UH2794001 UH2795001 087421015 UH2645001 UH2646001 UH2628001 THERMISTOR ASSY PT7 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 770 771 NO PR98054 PR98061 15 DOCUMENTS NO PR98209 PR98263 PR98280 PR98310 MODEL 198002 15 DOCUMENTS REF NO CODE 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 UK3811001 UK4335001 UK3813001 UK4337001 UK4329001 UH1413001 UH1414001 UH1415001 UH1416001 UH1417001 UH1418001 UH2754001 UE0331001 UH1437001 UH1425001 UH1426001 UH1427001 UH1428001 UH1429001 UH1430001 UK3741001 A LA mm LA LA Ss ss Ss So Ss Ss DESCRIPTION PR DRIVER DISK 1 HL 1660e FIRST PART 1 2 PR DRIVER DISK 3 HL 1660e SPA 1 2 PR DRIVER DISK 2 HL 1660e LATTER PART 2 2 PR DRIVER DISK 4 HL 1660e SPA 2 2 CD ROM ASSY HL 1070 1660E
155. ERROR PRINT ON ERROR PRINT OFF CONTINUE MODE Error Mode Turn on the error mode so that the printer prints an error if it occurs Turn off the error mode so that the printer does not print an error if it occurs Factory setting If any recoverable error occurs including Toner Empty it can be cleared with the CONTINUE switch The CONTINUE switch function is selected with this mode setting Display Message CONTI NU E MANUAL CONTI NU E AUTO Continue Mode Select the manual or auto error recovery mode Press the CONTINUE switch to clear errors Factory setting Select the auto error recovery mode The printer automatically clears recoverable errors You need not press the CONTINUE switch CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL BUZZER SETTING You can turn the buzzer of this printer on or off If any errors occur and the buzzer is turned on the printer beeps to alert you If it is turned off it does not sound to alert you Display Message Buzzer BUZZER ON Turn on the buzzer Factorv setting BUZZER OFF Turn off the buzzer SCALABLE FONT gt Note The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the HP LaserJet mode It does not appear in anv other emulation modes Since this printer has manv scalable fonts some application programs mav not be able to handle them correctly When the HP LaserJet emulation mode has been selected the printer may print a dif
156. ESC s 15C ESC s 16C ESC s 17C ESC s18 C ESC 19C ESC s 20C ESC s21 C ESC s 37C Decimal 27 40 53 55 57 76 27 40 53 77 27 40 54 77 27 40 56 77 27 40 49 57 77 27 40 50 78 27 40 53 78 27 40 48 83 27 40 49 83 27 40 50 83 27 40 51 83 27 40 52 83 27 40 53 83 27 40 54 83 27 40 53 84 27 40 57 84 27 40 48 85 27 40 49 85 27 40 50 85 27 40 56 85 27 40 57 85 27 40 49 48 85 27 40 49 49 85 27 40 49 50 85 27 40 49 53 85 27 40 49 55 85 27 40 49 57 85 27 40 115 49 67 27 40 115 50 67 27 40 115 51 67 27 40 115 52 67 27 40 115 53 67 27 40 115 54 67 27 40 115 55 67 27 40 115 56 67 27 40 115 57 67 27 40 115 49 48 67 27 40 115 49 49 67 27 40 115 49 50 67 27 40 115 49 51 67 27 40 115 49 52 67 27 40 115 49 53 67 27 40 115 49 54 67 27 40 115 49 55 67 27 40 115 49 56 67 27 40 115 49 57 67 27 40 115 50 48 67 27 40 115 50 49 67 27 40 115 51 55 67 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 1B 28 35 37 39 4C 1B 28 35 4D 1B 28 36 4D 1B 28 38 4D 1B 28 31 39 4D 1B 28 32 4E 1B 28 35 4E 1B 28 30 53 1B 28 31 53 1B 28 32 53 1B 28 33 53 1B 28 34 53 1B 28 35 53 1B 28 36 53 1B 28 35 54 1B 28 39 54 1B 28 30 55 1B 28 31 55 1B 28 32 55 1B 28 38 55 1B 28 39 55 1B 28 31 30 55 1B 28 31 31 55 1B 28 31 32 55 1B 28 31 35 55 1B 28 31 37 55 1B 28 31 39 55 1B 28 73 31 43 1B 28 73 32 43 1B 28 73 33 43 1B 28 73 34 43 1B 28 73 35 43 1B 28 73 36 43 1B 28 73 37 43 1B 28 73 38 43 1B 28 73 39 43 1B 28 73 31 30 43 1B 28 73 31
157. Feed Slot 1 Feed From MP Tray n 2 Feed From Upper Cassette Tray 1 3 Feed From Lower Cassette Tray 2 n R Eject Paper Sets simplex or duplex print mode n 0 Simplex n 1 Duplex amp long edge binding n 2 Duplex amp short edge binding Sets page side selection 0 Next side 1 Front side 2 Back side Sets form length to n lines at current spacing 1 lt lt 255 Sets from length to n inches at current spacing 0 lt lt 15 nl is used to set the left margin and n2 the right margin 1 lt 1 lt 2 lt 255 Sets bottom margin at n th line counting from the bottom 1 lt lt 255 Sequence NUL BEL SP BS LF FF CR ESC 5n DCI DC3 ESC Q22 ESC Q3 ESC ESC CR m ESCCRI nR ESC EM ESCCRI nD ESC CR ns ESC Cn ESCCOn ESC X nl n2 ESCNn Decimal 0 7 32 8 10 12 27 53 17 19 27 8150 50 27 5151 27 64 27 13 27 13 33 82 27 25 27 13 33 68 27 13 33 83 27 67 27 67 48 27 88 n1 n2 27 78 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 00 07 20 08 0 0 1 35n 11 13 51 32 32 51 33 1 40 0 1B 0D 21 52 1 19 1B 0D 21 n44 1B 0 21 n53 1B 43 1 43 30 1B 58 nl n2 1B 4E n Appendix 63 USER GUIDE Command name Cancel Skip over Perforation Set 1 8 Line Spacing Mode Set 7 727 Line Spacing Mode Save 72 Line Spacing
158. Figure 4 1 Side cover L Toner Cartridge Lid 1 Remove the supporter from the toner cartridge lid 2 Remove the toner cartridge lid from the upper cover Open the toner Toner cartridge lid 7 MT cartridge lid Upper cover assy ha NAD A lt lt 2 A A NC Supporter 22 E f KN 1 2 SS Figure 4 2 1 3 Side Cover L 1 Release the lock by pinching the lever on the left top surface A and remove the cover aner brush by pulling it rearward Hook lever Side cover L Figure 4 3 IV 3 1 4 Font Cover Assy 1 Remove the font cover assy by loosening the screw on the top and releasing the hooks on the bottom and the side Screw E ae Hook Figure 4 4 1 5 Upper Cover Assv Rear Cover Assv 1 5 1 Upper cover assy rear cover assy 1 Loosen the 4 screws on the rear the upper 2 screws secure also the upper cover Rear cover assy Figure 4 5 2 Loosen the top left screw 3 Remove the upper cover assy A Refer to Figure 4 5 4 Remove the rear cover by pulling it rearward B Refer to Figure 4 5 Upper cover assy Note The hook is released automatically by removing the upper cover assy in the direction of the arrow Figure 4 6 4 1 5 2 Changeover guide jam remove cover 1 Open the jam remove cover by hooking your finger o
159. H gg fo AH ne gu punosg eu6 1s 980 10 ce ovaa 3281 ag 40 2434 punoug 6 5 GND 48B 10 2LAH eg 1 geaeq punoug euis GND 48B 10 Te LAH punoug eu6is GND 9280 10 JV 1 AH P 9e3eq 9 euB is IN 57 103 348 18 164615 ed 060 400 re 99 I3Pgr punou9 16 OLB 10 INHI se NH2 t 3 rTp 3 eaeq punoug 5 INI ILB L8 4199 3s6 4123 3rgr AL0 10 2e2eq punou9 1 5 COLB L pe NATH stas 503 440 10 punowg 5 GND 450 100 NINHd ce NLNIMd 9 03 5 903 4LB 10 8QOJASU punoug euis NI 150 10 2e NAS82 pug SISSEUJ OND 080 10 gar tny 9v3 gr ava 398 0 pug 21607 48B 10 ENV TW3rg 390 40 90 40 Te 2v3hg 398 18 21607 Jag AS 30 10 rg I HNY4 tvilz0 3920 10 V3 g vv3 390 0 a1 173 HIV 010 100 5115 515 svalw 390 0 404 139 3d Nad GL8 C 20 10 Nasas r NAS8s 328189 1216 IDe GUEI 41 NOJYUSA 0355
160. II exit RESOLUTION 600 HRC MEDIUM Setting LETTER LEGAL 4 5 B5 B6 EXECUTIVE COM10 MONARCH C5 and DL 500 left to 500 right dots 500 up to 500 down dots Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE PEN1 to 6 Set size and gray percentage for the selected pen 1 to 10 dots pen size in dots is the selected pen number 15 30 45 75 90 or 100 is the selected pen number Exit to SETTING PEN1 6 Exit to GRAPHICS MODE Standard character set See character sets on page 4 28 Alternate character set See character sets on page 4 28 Exit to GRAPHICS MODE Exit to FORMAT MODE 300 or 600 dpi OFF LIGHT MEDIUM or DARK Exit to RESOLUTION MODE USER GUIDE 4 14 Mode Menu Continued PAGE PROTECTION Setting Menu PROTECT AUTO Sub Setting Menu See 4 31 exit CARD OPERATION Same as BR Script mode See 4 32 ADVANCED MODE Same as HP LaserJet mode See 4 41 PAGE COUNTER See 4 48 exit MODE See 4 48 COUNT 0 Setting AUTO OFF LETTER A4 or LEGAL Exit to CARD OPERATION Shows the number of printed pages Exit MODE CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Basic Operation Procedures When vou operate the MODE switch remember the following basic steps 1 2 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line Press the MODE switch to enter the MODE menus The first mode menu appears on the display NTERFACE MODE
161. ING RING E4 UH2362001 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER ASSY UH2364000 PAPER PICK UP ROLLER COLLAR 048040346 RETAINING RING E4 UH2967000 SPRING EXTENSION UH2357001 PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSV 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2369001 PAPER PICK UP SOLENOID 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2911000 PAPER EMPTV SENSOR ACTUATOR UH2381000 PE ACTUATOR LINK UH2913000 FRONT COVER GRAV1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2918001 PAPER PATH FILM UH2914000 SIDE COVER L GRAV1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2915000 SIDE COVER GRAV 1227 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2957000 FRONT STIFFENER CHASSIS 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2958000 FRONT CHASSIS 087320616 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 UH2959000 GUIDE PLATE UH2356000 RELEASE PLATE L UH2409000 RELEASE PLATE R 7 OTIO NL amp AO 0 34 4 4 BA Ba MODEL LT 1200 1600 54 001 002 630 TI NO PR99087 1 FEEDER UNIT PR99087 MODEL 17 2000 54 01 630 TI NO PR99087 1 FEEDER UNIT PR99087 REF NO DESCRIPTION REMARK UH2901001 UH2952001 FEEDER CHASSIS R ASSY UH2905000 STIFFENER PLATE UPPER 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH2906000 STIFFENER PLATE LOWER 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UH1467000 FEEDER GUIDE OP 085310615 TAPTITE BIND M3X6 087320616 TAPTITE CUP
162. ION 5 7 DUPLEX UNIT 1200 0 1600 20 0 000 5 11 TABLE OF CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE DISK 6 1 MAINTENANCE kiri tase pied A reds Mrd 6 1 Tonor T 6 1 Toner Message iii i ja Pak 6 1 Replacing the Toner aria tati Mee per red nej 6 2 6 5 Cleaning the Printer EXEO sasior reri rper tren kh 6 5 Cleaning the Printer Miter Gh is ap ERR iban 6 6 CHAPTER 7 7 1 TRUE SE ING 5 7 1 Operator ER UI 7 1 7 3 Service M Tu 7 5 Possible el hla 7 6 A 7 6 Unsatistactory PYOMQUIS eia etie ioci ice tesa e beta 7 12 APPENDICES DISK i ien Appendix 1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS Li i bis Appendix 1 A A Appendix 1 a R Appendix 2 Electrical and Mechanical iue a kw ba Appendix 3 PAPER SPECIFICATIONS i pi Mac M A Me A Appendix 4 INTERFACE SPECIFICA TIONS cce le pipe Appendix 8 Bidirectional Parallel ese ipea Per Appendix 8 Pit Assent i Appendix 8 SSE PNM T Appendix 9 Parallel Cable Connection for IBM PC AT or Compatible Computers and IBM PS 2 Comput
163. IVG A 293 Ge ESTERNA st PNSVHIS LT M 95 Levive SNSvuIS ST 25 92 1 0 ao vevive 52 1 0 N ar 30 2 1 0 vat aij BEAT Hd amp tevive tee ERNA o PedL ss Tevive Stvivd Stvive isk Bevive 19 SIVIVT 1V1vd ETVIVO col SIV1VT ENSVJIS 21 1 0 21 1 0 LIVIVC 285 215 TIVIVG TIVIVI SIVIVT 5 215 1 0 1 1 0 SNNT BNSVIIS 0 60 1 0 15 80 1 0 80 1 0 yivivd 641 8VHIS TOVIVU TOVIVU ER TIVHIS Sav1va Seviva AA m SOVINT SOVINT eoviva voviva yOviva Tevive LL TOVIVI covive 9SIVIVG BEVEN 9 8 1 eagviva 20 1 0 10 1 0 Sew 18v1vd 0 1 0 TOVIVC S9gviva 00 1 0 50 1 0 80viva M Sgviva VOV1 VT 28 LV 60 1 ZOV IVT LVHIS 1 ev 10 1 0 Se ee SV gaviva gaviva V TIVHIS EM gt SSA 20 159 22 2VHIS cl Pi 2 22 2 Issa 22 6YWIS FVMIS pl evi 22 ISSA DIJA 22 ISSA 22A BVHIS wuts 2 7 4 OLY ceva L PVSSTBTISHH L PVSSIBTISUH SVHIS INS 20 Lit val veo I SEN SvEJPL BIH WH Loy ive IvuIS BVHIS BOVIVT 810 0 SIVIVT aol LW 2 ISSA 32 ISSA IIN z SSA
164. L 24 US CAUTION LABEL BS IMPORTER LABEL CAN RECYCLE LABEL DEU FRA BAR CODE LABEL 525110 UPC USA BAR CODE LABEL 526371 EAN EUR BAR CODE LABEL 525127 UPC USA GENERIC PAD LETTER SIZE TRAY PAD A4 SIZE TRAY POSITION FIXING SPONGE INSERTION SHEET NO RTN FORM USA RNT FORM CAN ROLLER HOLDER SO ASSY SP TRAY PUSH SPRING ELT SP TRAY PUSH SPRING FILM ELT SP PAPER PICK UP ROLLER UNIT 2 SP SEPARATION PAD SPRING SP SEPARATION PAD DX ASSY SP SPACER 18 ADJUSTING TOOL KIT 43 D N O 54 003 99 MODEL HL 1660e NO PR98047 18 ADJUSTING TOOL KIT TOOL NO REMARK 2 1 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 29 7 31 ZX 43D ZX 43N LUBRICATING GREASE MOLVKOTE EM 30L TKC 0 1KG ZX 430 LUBRICATING GREASE MOLVKOTE D110 1KG ZX 44 ZX 46 TESTER MD 200C 7 78 TENSION GAUGE 0 1 5 ZX 87 THICKNESS GAUGE 0 28 0 38MM ZX 96 IC PULL OUT 42 ZX 164 PF UNIT SETTING JIG OILER MODEL HL 1660e 54 003 99 NO PR98047 13 SCANNER PR99073 8150 UK2503000 1 JSCN FLAT CABLE 6P 087321616 4 TAPTITE CUP S M3X16 UK3254001 1 JPOLVGON HARNESS 5 14 FIXING UNIT 120V 230V REF NO GODE Quy DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARK 000800 XING UN OV 6 0009001 FIXING UNIT 230V T SP LJ0010001 HEAT ROLLER T SP UH2608001 RETAINING RING 25 UK2451001 FIXING PCB ASSY B48K142 200 085310815 TAPTITE BIND B M3X8 UH2623001 PAPER DELIVER
165. LUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA H NAKVMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE KATSO S TEESEEN LUOKAN LASERLAITE ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALING UNNGA DIREKTE KONTAKT MED LASERENHETEN N R TOPPDEKSELET ER PENT KLASSE 3B LASERPRODUKT ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER INVISIBLES QUANDOUVERT ET VERROUILLAGE ENLEVE EVITER EXPOSITIONS DIRECTES AU FAISCEAU PRODUIT LASER CLASSE VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFENT UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG UBERBRUCKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN SICHERHEITSKLASSE 3B ATEN I N RADIACI N LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE LA TAPA Y EL INTERRUPTOR INTERNO ESTA ATASCADO EVITE LA EXPOSICION DIRECTA DE LOS 0 OS PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 3B xi USER S GUIDE For Finland and Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT Varoitus Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin t ss k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle Varning Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i denna Bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 For Your Safety To ensure safe operation the three pin plug supplied must be inserted only into a standard three pin power point which is effectively grounded through the normal household wiring Extension cords used with the equipment must be three con
166. MAN ISO FRENCH ISO U K Appendix 32 APPENDICES ISO ITALIAN ISO SPANISH ISO PORTUGUESE ISO 2 Appendix 33 USER GUIDE Svmbol Sets Supported the Printer Intellifont Compatible Tvpefaces PCL Svmbol Set Tvpeface Alaska Antique Brougham Cleveland Connect Guatemala Letter 8U Roman 8 ON ISO8859 ILatinl eee 2N ISO88502la n i 5N ISO885bOla ns e 4 4 6N ISO 8859 10 Latin gt gt 8 8 107 PCS 4 e IU PC8DNN 5 e e e e e 12U PC850 eee q3U PERSI _ wW 00 09 4004 OT gt P M 58 ee e 19U Windows3lLla nl 54 4 a 9E Windows 3 1 Lain gt gt ST Windows3lLla n e eee 7 DeskTop 8 05e 9 PCIOM OS2 4 4 54 e e TO PSTex e e ev e e 4J 61 Microsoft Publishing gt 5 Mahg ee e e 5M PSMath e e e e e 6M VentuaMath gt gt ee e e 10 PlFott e e e e e e lU Leal 4 4 e 4 504 United Kingdomt 5 8 07 ISOG ASCE s e e e 2U ISO2 IRV e e e e e OS 18011 Swedish name i lS HPSpanish 8 3S 1010 Swedsh 4S 15016 Portuguese 8 ee 5S 15084 Portuguese 88 0G HPGernn 1G Germn 0D 18060 Norwegian
167. MROM23C32000 01 26 UK4281000 MROM23C32000 02 14 UK3785001 MIO CONNECTOR PCB ASSY 48 295 100 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 087320616 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 UK2466000 EPROM 27C8000DZ BLANK EPROM SP 1 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 103 NO PR98017 PR98055 PR98278 6 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLV REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARK UK2702001 1 HIGH VOLTAGE PS ASSY SP B48K186 300E 087320616 2 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 200 UK2753001 LOW VOLT PS ASSY 115VM SP UK2754001 LOW VOLT PS PCB ASSY 230VM SP UK2756001 GLASS FUSE 10A 125VM PS PCB 115VM SP UK2759001 GLASS FUSE 6A 250VM PS PCB 230VM SP UK2757001 GLASS FUSE 5A 125VM PS PCB 115VM SP UK2760001 GLASS FUSE 3A 250VM PS 230VM SP UH2036001 TAPTITE PAN S M3X8 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 300 NO PR98205 8 COVERS MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 400 9 CHASSIS MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 500 8 COVERS REF NO CODE 42 UH2065001 UH2071001 UH2072001 UH2076001 UH2077001 UH2027001 UH2082001 UH2104001 UH2085001 UH2103001 087320616 087320616 087320616 087321016 NO PR98175 9 CHASSIS REF NO CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK gt UH2229001 UH2233001 UH2814001 087320616 UH2238000 UH2239000 UH2240000 UH2241000 UH2242000 UH2243000 UH2244000 UH2245001 026100136 UH2255
168. OPERATION MANUAL Svstem Requirements External Fax Modem The printer can accept the following tvpe of External Fax Modem Interface standards RS 232C Fax compatibilitv Class 2 0 Data transmission 14 400 2 400 bps Fax Speed The following External Fax Modem can be used 3Com U S Robotics 56K Faxmodem Model 5686 e Note Xou cannot use a Class 1 Class 1 0 or Class 2 External Fax Modem PC and 5 The fax driver works on the following tvpes of PC and operating svstems OS PC IBM PC AT or compatible Operating svstem Microsoft Windows 3 1 Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Q Caution e The fax driver works in Windows NT 4 0 with Service Pack 3 0 or higher installed e You cannot use the fax function with later versions of Microsoft Windows OPERATION MANUAL TO THE PRINTER Installing the External Fax Modem 6 Caution Xou have to purchase a gender changer to connect the RS 232C cable connected between the External Fax Modem and the serial interface on the printer as both connectors are female Follow the steps below to connect the External Fax Modem with vour printer 1 Turn on the printer 2 Press the SEL switch on the control panel to set the printer off line 3 Press the SEL switch again while holding down the SHIFT switch HIDDEN PANEL is displayed on the LED 4 Press the A or V switch until EXT FAX MODEM is displayed then press the SET switch
169. P 2 Remove the beam from the bodv loosening the screws 3 Remove the scanner unit from the bodv bv loosening the screws Caution Do not disassemble the scanner unit it can be only adjusted at the factory Scanner unit Screws Screws ba i 524 connector Scanner flat c ble 6P connector Figure 4 18 1 11 Cartridge Stopper Assy 1 Loosen 4 screws and remove the scanner mount plate in the direction of the arrow the ground leaf spring is also released at the same time 2 Release the hook by bending the arm of the cartridge stopper assy slide the cartridge stopper assy to the left and the remove the cartridge stopper assy Rear Right side Left side Cartridge stopper assy Figure 4 19 Cartridge stopper assy Scanner mount plate Figure 4 20 9 1 12 Paper Feed Chassis Unit 1 Pull out the unit bv loosening the 8 screws 4 screws for front and 4 screws for bottom Paper feed chassis unit b 01 bews Note When installing the paper feed chassis unit screw the left chassis of this paper feed chassis unit set the paper trav displace the right chassis of this unit up to the paper trav and screw them 2 Remove the paper hold front and paper hold rear bv pinching the pawl of the paper hold front with pliers uth ji 1 5 3H Paper hold front Pliers
170. Pattern Make Temporarv Make Permanent Set Pattern Reference Point Print Direction Oriented Logical Page Oriented Appendix 42 Command ESC c 1G ESC c 2 G ESC c3G ESC c4G ESC c5G ESC c6G ESC cOP ESC cIP ESC c2P ESC c3P ESC c4P ESC c5P ESC c 130 P ESC c W byte ESC c0Q ESC c1Q ESC c2Q ESC c4Q ESC c5Q ESC pOR ESC pIR Decimal 27 42 99 49 71 27 42 99 50 71 27 42 99 5171 27 42 99 52 71 27 42 99 53 71 27 42 99 54 71 27 42 99 48 80 27 42 99 49 80 27 42 99 50 80 27 42 99 51 80 27 42 99 52 80 27 42 99 53 80 27 42 99 49 51 48 80 1B 2 63 51 1B 2A 63 3051 1B 2A 63 3151 2 63 32 51 2 63 34 51 2 63 35 51 2 70 30 52 1B 2A 70 31 52 Hexadecimal 1 2 633147 1 2 633247 1 2 633347 1 2 63 3447 1 2 63 35 47 1 2 63 36 47 1 2 63 30 50 1 2 63 31 50 1 2 63 32 50 1 2 63 33 50 1 2 63 34 50 1 2 63 35 50 1 2 63 31 33 30 50 27 42 99 87 27 42 99 48 81 27 42 99 49 81 27 42 99 50 81 27 42 99 52 81 27 42 99 53 81 27 42 112 48 82 27 42 112 49 82 Function DOWNLOAD FONT Font ID Set Character Code Set Download Control Delete Delete Temporarv Delete Current ID Delete Current Character Code Make Temporarv Make Permanent Copv Assign Command ESC c D ID ESC c E chara code ESC c OF ESC 1 ESC c2F ESC c3 F ESC 4 ESC c5F ESC c6F Downl
171. Proprinter XL Modes The following table shows all the selections vou can make with the MODE switch in the HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes 9 Note The mode menus and settings that can appear varv according to the current emulation mode printer status and anv options that mav be installed in the printer Mode Menu INTERFACE MODE See 4 17 48 Setting Menu VF PARALLEL 232 I F USB HL 1660e only Sub Setting Menu HIGH SPEED ON BI DIR ON BaudRate 9600 CodeType 8 bits Parity Stop Bit 1 bits Xon Xoff ON DTR ER ON Robust Xon OFF exit Setting ON or OFF ON or OFF 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud 7 or 8 bits NONE EVEN or ODD 1 or 2 stop bits ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF Exit to INTERFACE MODE Available only when a commercial MIO card has been installed MIO Setting exit TIME OUT 5s PRL Setting HIGH SPEED ON BI DIR ON exit RS 232C Setting BaudRate 9600 CodeType 8 bits Parity Stop Bit 1 bits Xon Xoff ON DTR ER ON Robust Xon OFF exit The settings available on the installed MIO card can appear under the sub setting menu Exit to INTERFACE MODE 1 to 99 seconds Bi directional settings for AUTO ON or OFF ON or OFF Exit to PRL Setting Parameters for AUTO mode 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115
172. RAY1227 1 JSIDE COVER R2 ASSY GRAY1227 1 JREAR COVER ASSV GRAY1227 1 JREAR COVER ASSY GRAY 1227 TMT 17 1 JCHANGEOVER GUIDE GRAY1227 1 REMOVE COVER GRAV1227 2 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 1 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 1 TAPTITE CUP S M3X6 2 TAPTITE CUP S M3X10 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 400 1 IDC GEAR HOLDER ASSY 1 IDC MOTOR ASSY 2 SP 3 CUP M3X6 1 JGEAR 20 50 1 JGEAR 24 72 1 JGEAR 22 55 1 JGEAR 48 SPRING 1 WASHER PLAIN 10 1 JPAPER DELIVERV GEAR ASSV 4 TAPTITE CUP 4 5 1 PAPER DELIVERY HOLDER SPRING 1 JSPACER 2 2 SPACER 1 2 PCB SPACER 1 JSCANNER FAN MOTOR 2 TAPTITE PAN M3X30 1 TAPTITE CUP M3X6 MODEL HL 1660e 54T U03 500
173. RIDGE must be removed from the Printer Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge during shipping will cause severe damage to the Printer and will VOID THE WARRANTY brother Laser Printer HL 1260e HL 1660 series USER S GUIDE For USA 8 CANADA Only For technical and operational assistance please call In USA 1 800 276 7746 outside California 714 859 9700 Ext 329 within California In 1 800 853 6660 514 685 6464 within Montreal If you have comments or suggestions please write us at In USA Printer Customer Support Brother International Corporation 15 Musick Irvine CA 92718 In CANADA Brother International Corporation Canada Ltd Marketing Dept 1 rue H tel de Ville Dollard des Ormeaux PQ Canada H9B 3H6 BBS For downloading drivers from our Bulletin Board Service call In USA 1 714 859 2610 In CANADA 1 514 685 2040 Please log on to our BBS with your first name last name and a four digit number for your password Our BBS supports modem speeds up to 14 400 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit Fax Back System For USA only Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all Brother products This is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine not just the one you are calling from Please call 1 800 521 2846 and follow the vo
174. SC v2 T ESC v3 T ESC v4T ESC v 130 T ESC v0ON ESC v1N ESC v0O ESC v10O Decimal 2742116555382 27 42 116 49 48 48 82 27 42 116 50 48 48 82 27 42 116 49 53 48 82 27 42 116 51 48 48 82 27 42 116 54 48 48 82 27 42 114 48 70 27 42 114 51 70 27 42 114 48 65 27 42 114 49 65 27 42 98 87 27 42 98 48 77 27 42 98 49 77 27 42 98 50 77 27 42 98 5177 27 42 98 53 77 27 42 98 57 77 27 42 98 49 49 53 50 77 27 42 98 49 48 50 52 77 27 42 98 49 48 50 55 77 27 42 98 67 27 42 98 89 27 42 114 84 27 42 114 83 27 42 114 66 27 42 118 48 84 27 42 118 49 84 27 42 118 50 84 27 42 118 51 84 27 42 118 52 84 27 42 118 49 51 48 84 27 42 118 48 78 27 42 118 49 78 27 42 118 48 79 27 42 118 49 79 Hexadecimal 1B 2A 74 37 35 52 1B 2A 74 31 30 3052 1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52 1B 2A 74 31 35 3052 2A 74 33 30 30 52 1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52 1B 2A 72 30 46 1B 2A 72 33 46 1B2A 723041 1B2A 723141 1B 2A 62 tHt 57 2A 62 30 4D 2A 62 31 4D 1B 2A 62 32 4D 1B 2A 62 33 4D 1B 2A 62 35 4D 1B 2A 62 39 4D 2 62 31 31 35 32 4D 2 62 31 30 32 344 2 62 31 30 32 37 4 2 62 43 2 62 59 2 72 54 2 72 53 2 72 42 2 76 30 54 1B 2 76 31 54 2 76 32 54 2 76 33 54 2 76 34 54 2 76 31 33 30 54 2 76 30 42 1B 2 76 31 42 1B 2A 76 30 43 1B 2A 76
175. SC G boldface Selects enlarged characters for one line only Cancels above settings CAN cancels SO only and DC4 cancels SO and ESC SO only Sequence ESCQn ESCNn ESCO ESC2 ESCO 1 ESCAn ESC ESC Jn ESC jn ESC Dnl nk NUL HT ESC bnl nk NUL VT ESC ESC Bnl nk NUL ESC nl n2 ESC 1 n2 ESC P ESC M ESC p 1 ESC p 0 SI or ESC SI DC2 ESC E or ESC G ESC F or ESC H SO or ESC SO or ESC W 1 DC4 or CAN or ESC W 0 Decimal 2781n 2778n 2779 27 50 27 48 27 49 27 65 2751 27 74 27 106 n 27 68 1 nk 0 9 27 98 1 nk 0 11 2747 27 66 1 nk 0 27 36 n1 n2 27 92 n1 n2 27 80 2077 27 112 49 27 112 48 15 or 27 15 18 27 69 or 27 71 27 70 or 27 72 14 or 27 14 or 27 87 49 20 or 24 or 27 87 48 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 1B51n 1B 4En 4F 1B 32 1B 30 1B 31 1B 41n 1B 33n IB4An 1B6An 44 nl nk 00 09 1B 62nl nk 00 0B 1B 2F n 42 1 nk 00 1B 24 ni n2 1B 5 n1 n2 1B 50 1B 4D 1B 7031 1B 70 30 OF or 1B OF 12 1B 45 or 1B 47 1B 46 or 1B 48 OE or 1B OE or 1B 5731 14 or 18 or 1B 57 30 Appendix 61 USER GUIDE Command name Set Cancel Double High Mode Set Italic Print Mode Cancel Italic Print Mode Set Super Subseript Print Mode Cancel Super Subscript Print Mode Set Cancel Underline Print Mode Select Justification Se
176. Spacing Line spacing is set to n 72 inch 0 lt lt 85 Set n 216 Line Spacing Perform n 216 Paper Feed Perform n 216 Reverse Paper Feed Set Horizontal Tab Stops Horizontal Tab Set Vertical Tab Stops Vertical Tab Select VFU Set Vertical Tab Stops VFU Channel Set Absolute Print Position Set Relative Print Position Set Pica Pitch Set Elite Pitch Set Proportional Spacing Mode Disable Proportion al Spacing Mode Set Condensed Mode Cancel Condensed Mode Set Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Set Enlarged Character Mode Cancel Enlarged Character Mode Line spacing is set to n 216 inch 0 lt lt 255 Advances paper moves cursor by n 216 inch Reverse feeds paper moves cursor by n 216 inch Sets up to 32 horizontal tab stops terminated by a NUL Moves to next horizontal tab Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops terminated by a NUL Moves to next vertical tab stop Selects Vertical Format Unit Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops in selected Vertical Format Unit selected by previous command Terminated by NUL Moves n1 n2 x 256 60 from left margin Moves n1 n2 x 256 120 from current position Selects 10 cpi printing Selects 12 cpi printing Selects proportional spacing mode and fonts BS disabled Disables proportional spacing mode Sets condensed printing Cancels condensed printing mode Selects boldface printing ESC F cancels ESC E boldface and ESC H cancels E
177. St 3538 3534 850 10 25 NIHTIS yS 35 0010 180 v2 525 3 1 75 1 XIIS 850 109 DARI 388 10 888 10 880 10 880 10 888 10 SNS2Feg SNSI NSO ZNS2 Tg ens INS2 sg INSI 959 55 BNSI 180 10 160 12 189 12 189 12 N38 tN38 N38 7 1N38 5 aa 8N38 5 88 18 162 12 88 18 N38 75 NINYI gg Nama NO38H8 gp NO38H8 NSV NSY 160 10 76 0191 8 861 9PB 90 gt us Lady 1 veadv teaudv Teudv eradv study study sradv 1AQV eraav Tragv eradv egadv saucy sgaav Seaavi SAW 3L L 958 18 gt lt 90 gt 480 20 109 Le 20 SS Leyiy 15 85 seuqv 8 vedy 28 9 78 SS 89 837 Liyiy 89 BL Staay L 12 SL eray eZ 2ruav 92 IT JET IL 6000v BL sgoNiv GL 10 78 gguiv T8 souiv 28 vouiv 8 couv 78 eoudv Emm Sd ee 812 30V IQQA
178. T To select the emulation mode manually use the EMULATION switch For further information see EMULATION Switch in Chapter 4 3 3 USER S GUIDE gt Notes When vou use the automatic emulation selection note the following Once the emulation is automatically changed it is not changed again for a short period of time This time period is called Time Out and it can be set with the EMULATION switch The factory setting is 5 seconds The EPSON or IBM emulation mode priority must be selected as the printer cannot distinguish between them Since the factory setting is the EPSON emulation mode you might need to select the IBM emulation mode with the EMULATION switch when you need to use this emulation Try this function with your application software or network server If the function does not work properly select the required emulation mode manually using the printer panel switches or use emulation selection commands from your software 3 4 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION This printer has an automatic interface selection function When the printer receives data from the computer it automatically selects the bi directional parallel Universal Serial Bus USB interface HL 1660e only RS 232C serial interface or MIO interface as appropriate When you use the parallel interface you can turn the high speed and bi directional parallel communications on or off
179. T IN IN This signal is used only for the bi directional interface Appendix 9 USER GUIDE Parallel Cable Connection for IBM PC AT or Compatible Computers and IBM PS 2 Computers Signal Printer Pin No Computer Pin No DATA STROBE DATA 0 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 DATA 7 00 10 RA 00 10 RA ACKNLG BUSX PE SLCT U Ne A U Ne AUTO FEED GND 19 30 18 25 FAULT 15 SLCT IN 36 17 Appendix 10 APPENDICES RS 232C Serial Interface Standard Specifications 1 Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud 2 Synchronization Start stop 3 Communications control No protocol 4 Data length Serial 7 bits or 8 bits 5 Paritv Odd even or none 6 Stop bit 1 or 2 stop bits 7 Protocol Xon Xoff or DTR Interface Connectors A shielded cable should be used 13 10 7 4 1 25 21 18 14 5 Fig 2 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignment Pin Signal IN OUT Pin Signal IN OUT No Printer Controller No Printer Controller 1 14 2 SD gt 15 NC 3 RD 16 4 RS gt 17 NC 5 NC 18 NC 6 DR 19 7 SG 20 ER gt 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Appendix 11 USER GUIDE Signal Des
180. TT G4 Bits Sample 1 32773 Pack Bit Bits Sample 1 3 Sample pixel Tag ID 277 This value should be 1 This means the printer accepts only monochrome TIFF file 4 Bits Sample Tag ID 258 The printer supports 1 4 and 8 If you specify 4 or 8 and the printer resolution is 600 dpi the printer prints that page utilizing APT 5 Horizontal resolution Tag ID 282 and Vertical resolution Tag ID 283 Compression type Bits Sample Available Resolution From 1 dpi to 300 dpi i 1 1 No Compression Printer s Resolution Pack Bit 300 or 600 dpi amp 4 200 300 400 600 dpi 400 amp 600 dpi are only when printer operates in 600 dpi We recommend 150 or less resolution for to reduce data size Appendix 53 USER GUIDE Appendix 54 Horizontal 1200 dpi Image Format Mode Raster Graphic Mode 1027 The printer supports 1200 dpi printing for special image formats in 1200 dpi mode We recommend that the installed printer memory is 10 Mbytes or more for 1200 dpi printing To set 1200 dpi mode 1 Set 1200 dpi printing mode by using the following PJL command PJL SET RAS1200MODE ON 2 Choose PCL mode with the following PJL command PJL ENTER LANGUAGE PCL If you select a mode other than PCL mode 1200 dpi printing mode cannot be selected The PCL Mode set command for 1200 dpi Image Format is ESC b1027M The transfer raster data command ESC b W then transfers hori
181. The displav then shows the current setting with an asterisk REGULAR Press the A or V switch to select regular thick paper or transparency Press the SET switch to make the setting effective gt Notes Please do not forget to change the setting back after you print your special media with the setting changed Envelopes cannot be fed from Tray 2 although you can set them in it You must not load transparencies into Tray 1 or Tray 2 Please use the multi purpose tray DUPLEX MODE If the optional duplex printing unit has been installed the duplex mode appears on the display as follows 1 GI DUPLEX MODI Press the SET switch to enter the duplex mode menu Then the display shows the current selection for the duplex printing or simplex printing duplex off with an asterisk as follows DUPLEX OFF Press W switch to select the duplex or simplex duplex off and press the SET switch When you set DUPLEX ONT the display shows the current bind setting with an asterisk as follows UJ IND LONG Press W switch to select long edge binding or short edge binding USER GUIDE 5 c v 4 41 BIND LONG BIND SHORT Fig 4 9 Binding 4 Press the SET switch to exit the DUPLEX MODE The printer exits from the setting mode to the off line state 5 Press the SET switch again to exit the FEEDER switch setting mode
182. The software or command setting overrides the switch setting Select the setting menu and enter the sub setting menu to make the settings as follows Pen Setting When you select PEN SETTING you can set the size and percentage of gray for each plotter pen You can make settings separately for six pens Select the pen with the A or V switch and enter the menu with the SET switch SETTING PENI After you select the pen advance to the sub setting menu for size or gray percentage selection with the W switch and enter the menu with the SET switch When the following message appears the pen size be set from 1 dot to 10 dots with the A or W switch SIZE 1 3 dots When the following message appears the shades of gray can be set to 15 30 45 75 90 100 with the A or W switch GRAY 1 100 E CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL e Notes When another pen is selected the displav shows the selected pen with the number after SIZE or GRAY Whichever resolution 300 or 600 dpi you have selected the pen size takes effect in units of 300 dpi Character Set When you select CHARACTER SET you can select the standard and alternate character sets used in the HP GL emulation mode Enter the sub setting menu and select the menu for the standard or alternate character set with the A or W switch To set the standard character set select the following message
183. VE ial dagegen ees III 9 DISPLAY GCIRGUIT oe a neue eoe 11 A A i 11 3 25 Operation na asenne i idea eis e 11 LOW VOLTAGE POWER 2 000 0 00000 12 471 x B e 12 4 2 Protection Functions 10 00 00 cae 12 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSY 14 14 5 2 Operation of the Components the High Voltage Power Supply Assy 1 14 CHAPTER IV MECHANICAL SYSTEM PRINTER DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE PRINTER BODY 1 1 Gonfigurationi ina aw 2 eri ae ete ade nae IV 3 1 2 TonerCartridge nn IV 3 T 3 Side Cover I IV 3 1 4 Font GOVerASSy ute ncc ptr eed Ee emi Fer A o Mee TV4 1 5 Upper Cover Assy Rear Cover TV4 1 5 1 Upper cover assy rear cover ASSY TV4 1 5 2 Changeover guide jam remove cover LL 0 0 IV 5 1 6 a p ERR p IA IV 5 Tut DGEanMOotor aia ei Ret e ee a eo ble tis IV 6 1 92 POB siet cot cnet aa Kec Ed IV 6 1 9 Control Panel Unit tbt rena IV 8 1 10 Scanner pts a epo ato
184. WITH THE PRINTER Face Down Print Delivery The printer normally ejects paper onto the top of the printer with the printed page face down Fig 3 6 Face Down Print Delivery Face Up Print Delivery You can change the print delivery path from the top to the rear of the printer Push down the knob located inside the rear paper slit on the left of the paper path selector guide Knob Paper Path Selector Guide Rear Paper Slit Fig 3 7 Face Up Print Delivery The printer ejects paper through the rear paper slit with the printed page face up gt Note After you have finished face up print delivery be sure to reset the knob to switch back to the face down print delivery 3 17 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL DISPLAV AND LAMPS This printer has one liquid crystal display LCD and four lamps on the control panel The display can show various messages with up to 16 characters The lamps light to indicate the current printer status COPY PAGES DUPLEX ONLINE w READY SEL FONT FORMFEED SET A DATA ORIENTATION FEEDER t t m ALARM EMULATION ECONOMY FEEDER COPY SHIFT RESET TEST Fig 4 1 Display and Lamps Display The display usually shows the current printer status When you operate the control panel you can change settings interactively on the display When you turn the printe
185. When ISBN is selected with the parameter t130 or T130 Same rules apply as for t5 or 5 When ISBN UPC E is selected with the parameter 1131 or T131 Same rules apply as for t6 or T6 e When EAN 128 set A set B or set C is selected with the parameter t132 or T132 t133 or T133 134 or T134 respectively Same rules apply as for t12 or T12 t13 or T13 or 114 T12 Box Drawing ESCi E ore or is a terminator Line Block Drawing ESC i V or v or v is a terminator Expanded Character Data Start Data that follows 1 or L is read in as expanded character data or labeling data Expanded character data must end with the code 5CH which also terminates this command Example Program Listings WIDTH 255 CODE 39 FIM Post Net LPRINT CH R 27 itOrls0o0x00y00bCODE39 Interleaved 2 of 5 LPRINT CH R 27 itlr1s000x00y20b123456 RS 27 it3rlo0x00y40bA R 27 it4r100x00y60b1234567890 b b H L E b E b b b 8 13 PRINT I Codabar PRINT C I Code 128 set A Code 128 set B PRINT C I Code 128 set C EAN 128 set A PRINT
186. Y ACTUATOR UH2794001 HALOGEN HEATER 120V SP UH2795001 HALOGEN HEATER 230 SP 087421015 TAPTITE CUP 4 10 UH2645001 HEATER SUPPORT SPRING UH2646001 HEATER PRESS SPRING UH2628001 THERMISTOR ASSY PT7 oo0 o0001 o0nm a a apa NO PR98054 PR98061 PR99073 13 SCANNER PR99074 MODEL HL 1660e 547 003 700 14 FIXING UNIT 120V 230V kosti E su Or AF CT A oO N 2 4 Ko T I NO PR98054 PR98061 99074 MODEL HL 1660e 54 103 770 771 13 SCANNER 99074 8150 UK2503000 1 JSCN FLAT CABLE 6P 087321616 4 TAPTITE CUP S M3X16 UK3254001 1 JPOLVGON HARNESS 5 14 FIXING UNIT 120V 230V 5 000800 XING UN OV 6 10009001 FIXING UNIT 230V T SP LJ0010001 HEAT ROLLER T SP UH2608001 RETAINING RING 25 LJ8007001 FIXING PCB ASSY B512046 1 085310815 TAPTITE BIND B M3X8 UH2623001 PAPER DELIVERY ACTUATOR UH2794001 HALOGEN HEATER 120V SP UH2795001 HALOGEN HEATER 230 SP 087421015 TAPTITE CUP 4 10 UH2645001 HEATER SUPPORT SPRING UH2646001 HEATER PRESS SPRING UH2628001 THERMISTOR ASSY PT7 PR98054 PR98061 PR99073 PR99074 99087 13 PAPER FEEDER A A X Ni DD MODEL HL 1260e 54T U01 630 TI NO 97 PO49 PR97037 PR97131 PR98202 99087 13 P
187. a ae t domu ho xt ier 24V TONER SENSE Toner Sense Toner Sense Electrode Control Unit Toner 1 Circuit 4 P3 Toner 2 Circuit 4 DBOUT Figure 3 11 High Voltage Power Supply Block Diagram 2 15 CHAPTERIV MECHANICAL SVSTEM Safety Precautions To prevent the creation of secondary problems by mishandling observe the following precau tions during maintenance work 1 2 3 4 5 N YS 9 10 Always turn off the power before replacing parts or units When having access to the power supply be sure to unplug the power cord form the power outlet Be careful not to lose screws washers or other parts removed for parts replacement Be sure to apply grease to the teeth of gears When using soldering irons and other heat generating tools take care not to damage the resin parts such as wires PCBs and covers Before handling the PCBs touch a metal portion of the equipment to discharge static electricity or the electronic parts may be damaged due to the electricity charged in your body When transporting PCBs be sure to wrap them in conductive sheets such as aluminum foil Be sure to reinsert self tapping screws correctly if removed Unless otherwise specified tighten screws to the torque values listed below Tapping screws S tight M3 7kgf cm B tight M3x6 5kgf cm M3x8 7kgf cm e Stepped screws M3 7kgf cm 4 10kgf cm
188. a simple cleaning procedure Laser beam safetv is designed into the printer The printer is approved bv the US Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH Paper can be fed in two wavs bv the multi purpose paper feed trav and paper cassette Maintenance is easv with print component units which are directiv detachable and thev require no adjustment after reassembiv SPECIFICATIONS Tvpe Desktop page printer Printing method Electrophotographv single component drv toner Printing speed Cassette feed 12 pages minute A4 Letter size bv cassette feed 10 2 pages minute Legal size First print time Approx 20 seconds A4 size bv face down print deliverv from the paper cassette Warm up WAIT time Max 1 minute at 20 C 68 F Optical system Laser Semiconductor laser Output power 5mW max Wave length 780 Scanning system Rotating six faced polygon mirror Resolution Horizontal 600 dots inch and high resolution control HRC Vertical 600 raster lines inch Printing system Photosensitive drum Charging Exposure Development Paper feed Image transfer Separation Fixing Toner supplv Life expectancv Paper Cassette feed Multi purpose Trav 10 Cassette Trav 1 Universal cassette Maximum load height Feedable paper tvpe Envelopes 11 Print deliverv 12 Print deliverv trav capacitv Face down Face up Charging Roller Laser scanning svstem Toner projection development svst
189. able This printer has been certified to comply with FCC standards which are applied to the U S A only A shielded interface cable should be used according to FCC 15 27 C In addition a grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC outlet after checking the rating of the local power supply for the printer to operate properly and safely Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries Ltd could void the user s authority to operate the equipment International Energy Star Compliance Statement For HL 1660 series only The purpose of the International Energy Star Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy efficient office equipments which includes computers monitors printers facsimile receivers and copy machines world wide As an International Energy Star partner Brother Industries Ltd has decided that this product meets the guideline of the program rff USER S GUIDE Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement For Canada oniv This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Department of Communications Avis de conformit aux normes du minist re des Communications du Canada Pour Canada Seul Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux
190. able fonts only 1 Bitmapped fonts allowed 0 Off opaque 1 On transparent screen_type shading index _ y_center sweep_angle chord_angle x increment y increment sweep angle chord angle x inter y inter x end y end Lchord angle xl control pt yl control pt x2 control pt y2 control pt X3 control pt y3 control pt L params parms xl control pt increments yl control pt increments X2 control pt increments V2 control pt increments x3 control pt increments control pt increments params parms PLOT L x yll Ixy L x yll x L x yll x L x yll x_incr_inter y_incr_inter x_incr_end y_incr end chord_angle flag val lcoord_pair flag val lcoord_pair radius chord angle coordinate y coordinate x increment y increment coordinate y coordinate x increment y increment radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Appendix 57 USER GUIDE Command Mnemonic Parameters EDGE WEDGE EW radius start angle sweep angle chord_angle POLYGON MODE PM polygon_definition FILL POLYGON FP 0 Odd Even fill EDGE POLYGON EP 1 non zero winding fill Character Group SELECT STANDARD FONT SS SELECT ALTERNATE FONT SA ABSOLUTE DIRECTION DI run rise RELATIVE DIRECTION DR run rise ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE SI width height RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE SR
191. access cover before the paper exit remove the jammed paper as follows 1 Open the rear access cover 2 Pull out the jammed paper slowly in direction A or B Rear Access Cover Direction A Direction Fig 7 3 Paper Jam at Rear Access Cover 3 Close the rear access cover 7 8 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Paper Jam at Fixing Roller inside the printer 13 JAM INSIDE If a paper jam occurs at the fixing roller follow these steps to remove the jammed paper 1 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the jammed paper bv holding it with both hands and pulling it slowlv towards vou N Warning The fixing roller is extremelv hot during operation Remove the paper carefullv e Caution After having removed the jammed paper if the printed paper has a stain print several pages before restarting your printing Remove the jammed paper carefully so as not to spread toner Take care not to stain your hands and clothes with toner Wash toner stains immediately with cold water e Never touch the transfer roller N Fixing Roller Fig 7 4 Paper Jam at Fixing Roller 3 Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover 7 9 USER S GUIDE Paper Jam at the Paper Access Cover Inside the Printer 13 JAM INSIDE If a paper jam occurs at the paper access cover follow these steps
192. ach computer on a single telephone line if the printer is shared on the network and connected to the printer via a centronics parallel cable or via a network share Print Queue for Printeri lt gt EF RS 232C Cable L lt Ee ends Telephone Line Printeri File Gender Changer Server 4 Automaticallv print a fax sent received report OPERATION MANUAL Specifications Printer Compatibilitv Coding svstem Resolution External Fax Modem Auto reduction Fax driver Operating svstem Resolution Dial tvpe Cover page Phone book e Note ITU T Group 3 MH Horizontal 200 dots inch Vertical Standard mode 100 lines inch Fine mode 200 lines inch Oniv Fine mode is available in Windows NT 4 0 Fax compatibility Class 2 0 Data transmission 14 400 2 400 bps Fax Speed Auto Off 9090 Microsoft Windows 3 1 Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Standard and Fine Fine mode 200 dpi in Windows 4 0 Tone Pulse A custom cover page can be created Up to 1 000 numbers can be registered Telephone numbers can be registered as groups up to 64 per group The floppv disk including the FAX Share driver for Windows NT 4 0 is supplied separatelv from the floppv disk including the FAX Share drivers for Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows 98
193. acter must be 0 and the data must be terminated by a check digit Total 8 digits 0 6 digits 1 check digit 2 6 digits The first character and the last check digit are removed from the 8 digit data 1 For 8 digits 2 can be used in place of a check digit 2 Adding and 2 or 5 digit number after the data creates an add on code for all 6 and 8 digit formats When Codabar is selected with the parameter t9 or 9 Characters 0 to i S SES printed Characters A to D can be printed as a start stop code which can be uppercase or lowercase If there is no start stop code errors occur A check digit cannot be added and using 2 causes errors When Code 128 Set A Set B or Set C is selected with the parameter 12 or T12 13 or T13 or 414 or T 14 respectively Code 128 sets A B and C are individually selectable Set A encodes characters Hex 00 5 Set B encodes characters Hex 20 7F Set C encodes numeric pairs 00 99 Switching is allowed between the code sets by sending or 1 2 3 and 4 are produced with 961 2 963 and 4 The SHIFT code 96S allows temporary switching for 1 character only from set A to set B and vice versa The 9 character can be encoded by sending it twice Appendix 73 USER GUIDE Appendix 74 LPRINT CH LPRINT CH e
194. acter set SXMBOL SET 23 24 40 SB 5C 5 SE 60 7B 7C 7D ISO2 IRV ISO4 UK ISO 6 ASCII 1 010 SWE FIN ISO11 Swedish ISO14 JISASCII ISOIS Italian ISO16 POR 18017 Spanish 15021 German 15025 French 1 057 Chinese 1 060 NOR v1 ISO61 NOR v2 15069 French ISO84 POR ISO85 Spanish HP German HP Spanish Appendix 22 APPENDICES Appendix 23 USER GUIDE EPSON Mode US ASCII The following table shows characters available onlv in the corresponding character set The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code values with which characters are to be replaced in the US ASCII character set For other characters see the US ASCII character set CHARACTER SET 23 24 40 5B 5C 5 SE 60 7B 7C 7D 7E German UK ASCI I French I Danish Italy Spanish Swedish Japanese Norwegian Danish II UK ASCII II French II Dutch South African Appendix 24 APPENDICES 8 8 D N 850 852 Appendix 25 USER GUIDE 860 863 865 PC 8 Turkish Appendix 26 APPENDICES IBM Mode 8 8 D N 850 852 Appendix 27 USER GUIDE 860 863 865 PC 8 Turkish Appendix 28 APPENDICES HP GL Mode ANSI ASCII 9825 CHR SET Appendix 29 USER GUIDE FRENCH GERMAN SCANDINAVIAN SPANISH LATIN JIS ASCII Appendix 30 APPENDICES ROMANS EXT ISO IRV ISO SWEDISH ISO SWEDISH N Appendix 31 USER GUIDE ISO NORWAY 1 ISO GER
195. actory setting is 5 seconds The communications parameters baud rate code type parity stop bit Xon Xoff DTR ER and Robust Xon must be set for the serial interface Although they have been factory set as shown in the above table you may need to change them with the MODE switch This function takes a few seconds to work If you want to speed up printing select the required interface manually with the MODE switch If you constantly use only one interface we recommend that you select that interface in the interface mode The printer allocates all of the input buffer to that interface if only one interface is selected 3 6 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL Adjusting the Control Panel Angle You can adjust the control panel to the desired angle so you can easily read the display messages To adjust the angle of control panel gently pinch the tab on the right side of the panel and move the control panel up and down Fig 3 1 Adjusting the Control Panel Angle USER S GUIDE 3 8 Selecting the Local Language Displav The displav usuallv shows the current printer status When vou operate the control panel switches it shows functions and settings If anv trouble occurs it shows the corresponding error message Xou can see these messages in several languages The default language is English English e German Spanish Norwegian Danish French Dutch e Ita
196. age at the pin 5 of the connector P3 failure of the main PCB 5V when no paper passes and OV when paper passes Paper feed roller failure Fixing unit release Is the fixing unit release spacer removed Remove the fixing unit spacer not release spacer removed MEDIA TYPE 2 15 MEDIA set to TRANSPARENCY Yes Set the MEDIA TYPE to setting REGULAR or THICK PAPER Replace the paper feed size sw PCB assy or the harness and if the problem remains replace the main PCB assy Replace the paper feed roller assy es Yes Yes es Yes Yes No No Yes Paper failure 3 Is thick paper over than 36lb 135g m used Instruct the user to use the paper whose thickness is less than the recommended value Thermistor Is the voltage at the pin 3 of the connector No Replace the fixing unit failure P11 of the main PCB is controlled within T 1 80 0 i i inting Fixing unit 80 0 10V during continuous printing Ves Replace ine fid ht failure VI 10 4 TROUBLESHOOTING OF MALFUNCTIONS No power supplied 1 Does any have the short circuit between Yes Replace the PCB having the 24V and OV 5V and OV or 24V and 5V short circuit LV harness the LV harness or the DC fan DC fan motor motor Low voltage Is the voltage of P4 8 in the low voltage power Yes Replace the low voltage power power supply supply PCB connector 0 supply PCB assy PCB Main PCB No Replace the main PCB assy Malfun
197. al Execute saved card data FONT SELECTION Symbol Set ISO 60 Norwegian 1 ISO 61 Norwegian 2 ISO 4 United Kingdom Windows 3 1 Latini ISO 25 French ISO 69 French HP German ISO 21 German ISO 15 Italian Microsoft Publishing Desk Top PS Text MC Text Ventura International Ventura US ISO 14 JIS ASCII ISO 57 Chinese ISO 8859 1 ECMA 94 Latinl Appendix 46 ESCCRRO ESCCRRL ESCCRRM ESCCRRD R 0 2 ESC CRFD ESC CR E ESC 0D ESC 1D ESC 1E ESC 9E ESC ESC 1F ESC 0G ESC 1G ESC 0I ESC 6J ESC 71 ESC 107 ESC 121 ESC 131 ESC 141 ESC 0K ESC 2K ESC ON 27 38 97 48 71 27 38 97 49 71 27 38 97 50 71 27 38 108 85 27 38 108 90 27 69 27 122 27 38 108 84 27 38 1174 68 27 13 65 66 27 13 65 73 27 13 71 76 27 13 73 27 13 69 27 13 82 79 27 13 82 76 27 13 82 77 27 13 82 68 27 13 33 82 27 13 70 68 27 13 33 69 27 40 48 68 27 40 49 68 27 40 49 69 27 40 57 69 27 40 48 70 27 40 49 70 27 40 48 71 27 40 49 71 27 40 48 73 27 40 54 74 27 40 55 74 27 40 49 48 74 27 40 49 50 74 27 40 49 51 74 27 40 49 52 74 27 40 48 75 277 40 50 75 27 40 48 78 Hexadecimal 1B 26 6C 30 53 1B 26 6C 31 53 1B 26 6C 32 53 1B 26 61 30 47 1B 26 6131 47 1B 26 61 30 47 1B 26 6C 55 1B 26 6C 5A 1B 45 IB7A 1B 26 6C 54 1B 2675 44 1B OD 41 42 1B OD 41 49 1B OD 47 4C 1B 49 1 45 1 524 1B 524 1
198. al 1 DATA STROBE 19 Twisted pair ground 2 DATA 0 20 Twisted pair ground 3 DATA 1 21 Twisted pair ground 4 DATA 2 22 Twisted pair ground 5 3 23 Twisted pair ground 6 DATA 4 24 Twisted pair ground 7 DATA 5 25 Twisted pair ground 8 DATA 6 26 Twisted pair ground 9 DATA 7 27 Twisted pair ground 10 ACKNLG 28 Twisted pair ground 11 BUSY 29 Twisted pair ground 12 PE 30 INPUT PRIME RET 13 SLCT 31 INPUT PRIME 14 AUTO FEED 32 FAULT 15 N C 33 N C 16 OV 34 N C 17 OV 35 N C 18 5V 36 SELECT IN Appendix 8 Signal Description APPENDICES Signal Name IN OUT DATA STROBE IN Explanation Data is latched at the leading edge of this signal 0 7 IN Parallel 8 bit data Data reception is completed and the printer is 11 readv for the next data reception when this signal becomes low The printer cannot receive data when this 12 signal is high The signal becomes high under data receiving off line or error states This signal becomes high when a paper 13 empty state is detected This signal becomes high when the printer is 14 ACKNLG OUT BUSY OUT PE OUT SLCT OUT AUTO FEED IN selected and low when it is deselected This signal is used only for the bi directional 31 INPUT PRIME IN interface This signal is used only for the bi directional 32 FAULT OUT interface This signal becomes low when the printer is in the paper empty off line or error states 36 SLC
199. al MPSOL MP tray pick up MP tray roller solenoid pick up roller Travi pick up roller solenoid drive signal PUCL1 l l l Travi pick up g Tray1 roller solenoid pick up roller Scanner motor drive signal SDRIVE IN ZZ Note There are cases in the following pages that a main motor is referred to as a DC motor but they are identical Scanner motor Scanner unit Figure 2 2 1 3 Basic Sequence of Operations Power on Ready lamp Fixing heater Main motor Scanner motor Paper feed motor Pick up roller solenoid Laser diode Registration sensor Print Timing for two consecutive prints on A4 paper WAIT STBY PRINT STBY 170 C i control 0 15 sec 1 88 sec 1 0 15 sec i a 1 73 seci 1 4 3 18 sec 190 C control Figure 2 3 1 170C control 22 2 LASER SCANNER SVSTEM To external device Main PCB SBD DATA VOFF Scanner motor Optical sensor Focusing lenses Beam detect mirror Figure 2 4 In response to the print signal transmitted from the external device the main PCB generates the drive signals DATA VOFF for the laser diode and sends the signals to the scanner unit The laser diode in the scanner unit generates a laser beam modulated by DATA The modulated laser beam is aligned into a parallel beam by a collimator lens and a cylindrical lens and then brought to the s
200. an the transfer roller Use made with transfer roller changed dry lint free paper producing little paper dust to clean the transfer roller Never use solvents and if dirts subsist replace the transfer roller assy Paper failure Transfer roller failure 7 pin changes from OV to 15V Clean the transfer roller right end bearing the No Clean the contact to assure check continuity between the transfer roller the continuity power supply spring and the terminal of the high voltage transfer unit Is there continuity Replace the high voltage power supply assy Dirt on power supply terminal Failure in the transfer high voltage circuit Insufficient LD light Transfer input Do the pins 7 and 8 of the connector P6 No Replace the main PCB assy signal error on the main PCB have the following value or the harness respectively when a sheet of paper is fed from the MP tray P6 7 pin HVT2 Change in voltage from 15V approx to OV about 1 second after paper feeding P6 8 pin HVT3 Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV just when the voltage at the Does print quality improve when the scanner Yes Replace the scanner unit or unit is improved the harness Continued to the following page VI 4 Possible cause Check Result Development Do the pins 3 4 and 5 of the connector Replace the scanner unit or input signal error P6 on the main PCB have the following value the harness respectively when a sheet
201. and X vertical and horizontal offsets are effective in the BR Script 2 mode Other settings are not effective and thev do not appear in this mode e The paper size and the X and X vertical and horizontal offsets are effective in the HP GL mode Other settings are not effective and thev do not appear in this mode CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL The following settings can be made in this mode Displav Message Page Format Mode PAPER Set cut sheet paper size to letter 4 legal B5 5 B6 A6 or executive or envelope size to COM10 Monarch C5 or DL LEFT M OC P Set the left margin at column 0 126 at 10cpi RIGHT M 80C P Set the right margin at column 10 136 at 10cpi See List of Factory Settings in this chapter TOP M 0 5 P Set the top margin at a distance from the top edge of the paper 0 0 33 0 5 1 0 1 5 or 2 0 inches factory setting 0 33 Non HP 0 5 HP BOTTOM M 0 5 P Set the bottom margin at a distance from the bottom edge of the paper 0 0 33 0 5 1 0 1 5 or 2 0 inches factory setting 0 33 Non HP 0 5 HP LINES 60L P Set the number of lines per page from 5 to 128 lines See List of Factory Settings in this chapter The letter in the display messages indicates that the page orientation is portrait The letter L is displayed when it is landscape Display Message Page Format Mode Continued X OFFSET 0 Move t
202. aning brush from the top cover and clean the anti static teeth by sliding the brush several times After cleaning replace the brush in its slot 6 Refit the toner cartridge as described in REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE 7 Close the top cover of the printer and plug in the power cord 67 7 TROUBLE SHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING If anv problems occur the printer automaticallv stops printing diagnoses the problem and displavs the corresponding message to alert vou Take the appropriate action referring to the following tables If vou cannot clear the problem consult the dealer where vou purchased the printer Inform the dealer of the message number for quick troubleshooting Operator Call Messages Operator Call Message CHECK XXXXXXX 12 COVER OPEN 13 JAM XXXXXX 14 NO CARTRI DGE XX NO CASSETTE 16 TONER EMPTY XX LOAD PAPER SIZE Meaning Check the paper tray XXXXXXX is MP TRAY TRAY 1 TRAY 2 The upper cover of the printer is open Paper is jammed in the printer XXXXXX is TRAYS INSIDE REAR DUPLEX The toner cartridge is not installed in the printer The paper cassette is not installed XX is T2 The printer has almost run out of toner you may print another 30 to 100 pages The ALARM lamp lights at the same time The wrong size of paper was loaded in the paper cassette XX is MP T2 The message appea
203. aper feed mode correctly Actuator 2 Does the actuator for the paper empty sensor Reassemble or replace the operate smoothly actuator Paper empty 3 Does the voltage of P5 3 or P5 14 in the Replace the paper feed size sensor Paper feeder PCB connector rise from OV to sw PCB assy or feed flat cable Feed flat cable 5V when the paper empty sensor is covered No No o Paper feed flat 4 Does the voltage of P3 3 or P3 14 inthe main No Replace the feed flat cable cable rise from OV to 5V when the Main PCB paper emptv sensor is Ves Replace the main PCB assv 14 CARTRIDGE is displayed EP ED cartridge 1 Is an EP ED cartridge installed correctly N Install the EP ED cartridge correctly Transfer unit 2 Is the electrode of the transfer unit dirty Y Clean the electrode of the electrode transfer unit Y o es es Replace the high voltage power supply PCB assy es No High voltage 3 Is the voltage of P4 13 in the high voltage power supply power supply PCB connector higher than that of P4 11 over 2 5V PCB HV harness 4 Is the voltage of P6 13 in the main PCB Yes Replace the connector higher than that of P6 11 over 2 5V Main PCB No Replace the main PCB assy VI 13 16 EMPTY is displayed i Ves EP ED cartridge Take the EP ED cartridge out of the printer The problem was caused bv and rock it to distribute the toner eve
204. appareils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques NMB 003 dict e par le minist re des Communications Laser Safety 110 120 V model only This printer is certified as a Class I laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation CDRH Regulations 110 120 V model only The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA implemented regulations for laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The label shown on the back of the printer indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States MANUFACTURED BROTHER INDUSTRIES LTD 15 1 Naeshiro cho Mizuho ku Nagoya 467 Japan This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards 21 CFR chapter 1 subchapter J REGULATIONS Caution Use of controls adjustments or performance of pr
205. aracters and stains the printed page clean the printer interior See Cleaning in Chapter 6 Fig 7 13 Toner Scatter If the same print problem occurs after cleaning take any of the following actions Make sure that you use paper OHP films or envelopes that meet specifications Check for glue on the paper Glue causes toner to scatter f toner scatters over the entire printing surface adjust the print density See Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Font List in Chapter 2 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Black Page If an entire page is printed in black make sure that the toner cartridge is properlv installed Never use heat sensitive paper or it mav cause this problem Fig 7 14 Black Page IM White Page If nothing is printed on pages make sure that the toner cartridge is not empty the sealing tape is removed from the toner cartridge or you use paper OHP films or envelopes that meet specifications If a stack of paper is not fanned more than one sheet may be loaded at a time which may cause blank pages to be ejected Fig 7 15 White Page USER S GUIDE 7 18 2 Dropout If nothing or part page is printed make that the toner cartridge is not empty or the toner is evenly distributed in the cartridge Take the proper action referring to Unclear Printouts in this section Also make sure that you use paper OHP films or envelop
206. are packages With these commercially available software packages you have an option to send a form to the printer without any data After you send the form to the printer you may save the form in the flash memory as a Macro Then the next time you want to print this form you would setup your FORMS software package to SEND DATA ONLY USE FORM IN PRINTER This process would save you anything from 1 to 4 minutes per print job Select the setting menu and enter the sub setting menu to change the settings as follows Execute Data gt Note This menu appears only when data has been saved on the card When you select EXECUTE DATA you can execute any of the data saved in the SAVE DATA mode When you enter this sub setting menu with the SET switch the printer prompts you to select the ID of the data DATA Select the ID with the A or W switch and press the SET switch again so that the printer executes the selected data CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Card List When vou select CARD LIST and vou press the SET switch the printer automaticallv loads paper and starts printing the contents of the installed flash memorv card or HDD card Xou can check the contents and the unused capacitv of the card Save When vou select SAVE and vou press the SET switch vou can enter the following sub setting menus to save the macros and fonts in the installed card Displav Message Save Menu SAVE D
207. are still not satisfied with the printout replace the toner cartridge with a new one 7 14 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Stains and Stripes If the printed page is stained with toner or has vertical stripes clean the printer interior See Cleaning in Chapter 6 Stains Stripes Stains at Fixed Intervals Fig 7 11 Dark Stripes or Toner Stains If the same print problem occurs after cleaning take anv of the following actions Make sure that you use paper or films that meet specifications and have the correct printing surface Check that the toner cartridge is not damaged If it is damaged replace it with a new one If the stripes or stains are vertically repetitive on a page take the following action in accordance with the intervals of the stripes or stains 95 mm or 3 7 Replace the toner cartridge 53 mm 2 1 Print several pages 5 mm or 2 0 Replace the toner cartridge 38 mm or 1 5 Replace the toner cartridge f the problem occurs repeatedly the transfer roller needs to be replaced with a new one Consult your dealer or sales personnel 7 15 USER S GUIDE White Spots The printed page may have white spots in black text and graphics areas Make sure that you use paper or OHP films that meet specifications and have the correct printing surface Fig 7 12 White Spots Toner Scatter If toner scatters around printed ch
208. artridge holder inside the printer gt Note Push both sides of the toner cartridge gently until the cartridge is seated correctly in place 11 Close the top cover of the printer 64 1 6 MAINTENANCE Clean the printer exterior and interior periodicallv with a drv soft cloth When vou replace the toner cartridge be sure to clean the printer interior with a dry soft cloth If the printed page gets stained with toner clean the printer interior with a dry soft cloth Cleaning the Printer Exterior Clean the printer exterior as follows 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the paper cassette and optional font cartridge card 3 Open the multi purpose tray 4 Wipe the printer body with a soft cloth to remove dust from it Dip the cloth in water and wring it out thoroughly for cleaning 9 Note Use water or neutral detergents for cleaning Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine damages the surface of the printer Do not use cleaning materials that contain ammonia It might damage the printer particularly the toner cartridge Fig 6 3 Cleaning the Printer Exterior 65 USER GUIDE 5 If paper or foreign objects are stuck in the paper cassettes remove them Fig 6 4 Cleaning the Paper Cassette 6 Replace the paper cassette and the optional font cartridge card Cleaning the Printer Interior Dip a soft cloth in water and wring it o
209. as 1 Do white vertical stripes appear like a band Ye Rock the cartridge set it again in the printer and check again the print quality Drum damage 2 Does print quality improve when the EP ED Y Replace the EP ED cartridge cartridge is replaced Y S es Transfer roller 3 Is the transfer roller damaged or deformed es Replace the transfer roller failure assy Dirt on the 4 Is the problem solved when the scanner unit Yes Clean the reflecting mirror reflecting is replaced with a cleaning tip or replace mirror the scanner unit VI 9 l 13 Faultv registration Top margin 1 Does self test printing have no problem2 Y Check again the top margin setting error setting in the printing data Paper load in 2 Is over amount of paper than specified load Reduce the paper load below the cassette on the cassette the specified limit 3 Does print quality improve when Use recommended paper recommended paper is used Paper failure 4 Is paper curled Y Use recommended fresh paper without curl Improper Y 5 Does print quality improve when Y offset Ajust Y offset setting to an offset setting setting is changed Jam remove 6 Is the jam remove cover deformed Paper failure Replace the jam remove appropriate value cover failure cover Failure in 7 Does the regist sensor actuator operate Reassemble the actuator regist sensor smoothly and if the problem is not actuator motion resolved replace the actuator Regist sensor Is the volt
210. as follows For Duplex paper source available size all sources for duplex cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO printing DX 5 2 and Executive The upper paper cassette with duplex installed the upper cut sheet letter legal 4 250 sheets 27 5mm paper cassette ISO B5 Executive 250 sheets 27 5mm TI A5 200 sheets 24 5mm ISO B6 140 sheets 17 5mm 80 sheets 10 0mm envelope 10 15 sheets 20 5mm 15 sheets 20 5mm 15 sheets 20 5mm 15 sheets 20 5mm 15 sheets 20 5mm CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE Toner Cartridge A new toner cartridge contains enough toner to print approximatelv 9 000 A4 Letter size single sided pages at about 5 coverage if the print densitv is set at level 8 You can check the current page count or the number of printed pages with the MODE switch PAGE COUNTER For further information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 e Notes Toner consumption varies according to the image coverage on the page and the print density setting The greater the image coverage the greater the toner consumption If you change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing toner consumption varies accordingly To adjust print density setting see Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page in Chapter 2 Toner Empty Message Check printed pages page counter and display messages periodically If the display s
211. below for Windows 95 Brother Share Properties 2 Brother FAX Share E pool Settings Part Setings _ OPERATION MANUAL lt Sharing on a file server gt Network Print Queue RS 232C Cable for Printeri Telephone Line Gender Printer File Changer Server Fig 3 Sharing on a File Server If your printer is connected to a network through a parallel share or via a print server connected directly to the network cable it is possible to send faxes from each client PC directly to the printer For example Printer has the External Fax Modem installed and is connected to the file server through the network as shown above The print queue for Printerl is set on the file server In order to send fax data from 1 or PC2 to the External Fax Modem in Printerl set Print to the following port in the Properties of Brother FAX Share to the queue name of the shared printer on the network e g NWserver Printerl in the Printers folder of PCI or PC2 Refer to the illustration below for Windows 95 98 Brother FAX Share Properties MNwserver printerl Brother FAX Share __Saptwe Pinter Pot End Cente 12 OPERATION MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING Messages on the Control Panel Status Displav FAX SEN The printer is sending the fax data FAX RE PAX RECEIVING PAX RECEIVING printer is receiving the fax data MC
212. canning mirror which is rotating at a constant speed The laser beam reflected by the scanning mirror focuses on the photosensitive drum via the focusing lenses arranged in front of the scanning mirror The path of the beam coming through the focusing lenses is reflected by the reflective mirror As the scanning mirror rotates at a constant speed the laser beam scans the photosensitive drum at a constant speed As the photosensitive drum rotates at a constant speed and the laser beam scans the drum an images is formed on the drum 3 IMAGE FORMATION SVSTEM 3 1 Outline The image formation svstem is the main part ofthe printer The print information after input from the video controller circuit into the engine controller circuitas a TVDO signal forms a toner image on the photosensitive drum the toner image is transferred onto the paper the transfer charging roller The image formation svstem is composed of the photosensitive drum the charging unit the developing unit and the cleaning unit 3 2 Printing Process The major part of the image formation svstem is contained in the cartridge as shown in Figure 2 5 2 Nies Cartridge Laser beam 2 Cleaning blade Developing cvlinder Photosensitive drum Static charge eliminator Figure 2 5 The cartridge used by the printer has a seamless photosensitive drum with the structure shown in Figure 2 6 The outer layer of the drum consists of an organic photoc
213. ce The printer uses the charging method that directiv charges the drum for the primarv charge The primarv charging roller consists of conductive rubber In addition to DC bias AC bias is applied to the primarv charging roller to keep the potential on the drum surface uniform This DC bias is changed with the developing DC bias This charging method has advantages such as lower applied voltage less ozone generation etc compared with the corona charge svstem Step2 5 exposure Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area Figure 2 10 When the laser beam scans the drum surface it causes the charge to be neutralized in the areas struck bv the beam Areas on the drum with no charge form the electrostatic latent image 3 2 2 Developing stage Development places particles of toner onto the areas of the drum that have been cleared of charge the laser beam This makes a visible image This printer uses the toner projection development method with a single component toner Step3 Development Stirrer Developing cvlinder Cvlinder Magnet Figure 2 11 Note The charges on the light areas on the photosensitive drum are shown as positive in this figure Actuallv thev are negative but thev are more positive than the developing cvlinder and explanation is simplified bv regarding them as positive As shown in Figure 2 11 the developing unit consists of a developing cylinder and rubber blade The d
214. ce with the asterisk I F AUTO 4 Press W switch until the desired interface appears on the displav I F PARALLEL Displav Message Interface Mode I F PARALLEL Parallel interface I F RS 232C Serial interface I F USB Universal Serial Bus interface HL 1660e only I F OPTION Optional interface for MIO card I F AUTO Autointerfaceselection gt Note The optional interface is available only when commercial MIO compatible sharing network card has been installed 5 Press the SET switch to make the displaved selection effective An asterisk appears at the end of the displav for a short time Then the printer automaticallv exits from the setting menu to the interface menu INTERFACE MODE 4 16 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 6 Press A W switch until the exit menu appears on the displav exit MODI GI 7 Press the SET switch Then the printer automatically returns to the off line ready state INTERFACE MODE The automatic interface selection has been factory set If you want to select a specific interface manually use the interface mode to set it Display Message Interface Mode I F PARALLEL Parallel interface I F RS 232C Serial interface I F USB Universal Serial Bus interface HL 1660e only I F OPTION Optional interface for MIO card I F AUTO Auto interface selection Select the setting menu and enter the sub setting me
215. character set MODE Sets functions in various modes SEL Selects on line or off line state ON LINE Lights when printer is in the on line state READY Lights when printer is ready to print DATA Blinks when data is being received and lights when unprinted data remains in printer memory ALARM Lights if any errors occur Display Shows various messages COPYPAGES DUPLEX ORIENTATION FEEDER brother READY DATA m ALARM m ONLINE SEL FONT FORMFED SET conu V A EMULATION ECONOMY FEEDER COPY SHIFT RESET TEST EMULATION Selects printer emulation ECONOMY Selects toner save or power save mode FEEDER Selects paper source and media type to be used and duplex printing COPY Sets the number of copies to print SHIFT Shifts switch operation RESET Resets printer or restores to factory settings TEST Prints self test pattern or fonts Fig 3 2 Switch Operation in NORMAL and SHIFT Modes gt Note When the printer is in use in the BR Script 2 mode some switches are not used 3 9 USER S GUIDE Printer Settings You may operate the printer with the panel switch settings unchanged They have been factory set When necessary change and store them in the printer memory as user settings There are two types of printer se
216. chor Point Picture Frame Horizontal Size Picture Frame Vertical Size Command ESC amp A ESC amp 1A ESC amp 2A ESC amp 3A ESC amp 126 A ESC amp 100A ESC amp 1024A ESC 11025 A ESC amp 11026 ESC amp 80A ESC amp 181 ESC amp 190A ESC amp 91 ESC kat column ESC amp a H decipoint ESC p X dot ESC amp line ESC amp decipoint ESC p Y dot ESC 0B ESC 1 B ESC c K inch ESC c L inch ESC c OT ESC c X decipoint ESC c Y decipoint Decimal 27 38 108 65 27 38 108 49 65 27 38 108 50 65 27 38 108 51 65 27 38 108 50 54 65 27 38 108 49 48 48 65 27 38 108 49 48 50 52 65 27 38 108 49 48 50 53 65 27 38 108 49 48 50 54 65 27 38 108 56 48 65 27 38 108 56 49 65 27 38 108 57 48 65 27 38 108 57 49 65 27 38 97 67 27 38 97 72 27 42 112 88 27 38 97 82 27 38 97 86 27 42 112 89 27 37 48 66 27 37 49 66 27 42 99 tt 75 27 42 99 tt 76 27 42 99 48 84 27 42 99 88 27 42 99 89 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 1B 26 6C 41 1B 26 6C 31 41 1B 26 6C 32 41 1B 26 6C 33 41 1B 26 6C 32 36 41 1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 34 41 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 35 41 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 36 41 1B 26 6C 38 30 41 1B 26 6C 38 31 41 1B 26 6C 39 30 41 1B 26 6C 39 31 41 1B 26 61 43 1B 26 61 48 1B 2A 70 58 1B 26 61 52 1B 26 6
217. cific to each optional font it helps you to select them with the FONT switch For further information see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 and FONT CARTRIDGE CARD FLASH MEMORY HDD CARD in Chapter 5 If user defined characters are already downloaded into the printer memory as permanent download fonts you can print out the list of them For further information see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 and Technical Reference Manual that is optionally available 4 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The printer prints out the test patterns or lists according to the selected test mode When the DEMO PAGE mode has been selected the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the demonstration pattern 06 DEMO PAGE When the TEST PRINT mode has been selected the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the test pattern 05 TEST PRINT When the PRINT CONFIG mode has been selected the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the list of printer settings 06 PRINT CONFIG gt Note The printed list shows the panel switch settings you have made as user settings with the MODE switch See SAVE SETTINGS in Chapter 4 4 86 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL When the PRINT FONTS mode has been selected the display shows the selected mode and the printer starts printing
218. circuits 5V and 24V has a protection function to prevent the circuit from accident by automatically cutting off the power supply in the case of a over voltage or over current of the load When the cooling fan stops to rotating an over voltage protection or a short circuit protection function is activated and all the DC power supplies are cutoff In this case check and clear the cause on the load after turning the power switch SW1 off and then switch the power on again at least one minute after the power shut down III 11 ADO INVA NOF NOF 199 AS AS Avert V3H 1oj99joq 031002 xoeqpeeJ L 7 G g He 191jJ99H I 1 JojeeH due1 01 esnq NI Voltage Power Block Diagram Figure 3 9 Low 12 5 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLV ASSV 5 1 Outline The High Voltage Power Supply Assy supplies the high voltage for the charging roller the developer cylinder and the transfer roller according to the engine CPU s control signals The block diagrams are shown Fig 3 10 and 3 11 5 2 Operation of the Components of the High Voltage Power Supply Assy 1 Primary charging When input signal HV1AC gets the Low level the primary high voltage AC is applied to the primary charging roller And when input signal HV1DC ge
219. code type 4 19 commands Appendix 38 communications parameters 4 18 computer 2 18 continue mode 4 44 CONTINUE switch 4 63 control panel 2 3 3 7 COPY switch 4 77 cut sheet paper size 4 23 D data compression Appendix 51 DATA lamp 4 4 data terminal ready 4 19 demonstration pattern 4 86 display 4 1 download font 4 39 drum shutter 2 7 DTR 4 19 duplex mode 4 75 duplex printing 4 75 duplex unit 1 10 3 11 5 11 E ECONOMY switch 4 69 emulation 1 5 emulation mode 3 1 4 65 EMULATION switch 4 65 envelope 3 13 EPSON FX 850 mode 4 68 ER 4 19 error message 7 3 error mode 4 44 error recovery 4 44 expansion memory 5 7 Index 1 USER S GUIDE F face down print deliverv 3 17 face down print deliverv trav 2 3 face up print deliverv 3 17 factorv settings 3 10 4 79 FEEDER switch 4 70 fixing roller 7 9 flash memorv card l 10 5 2 flash operation 4 34 floppv disk l 3 fonts l 6 4 59 font card 5 2 font cartridge l 10 5 2 font cartridge slot 2 3 font IC card slot 2 3 font ID number 5 5 font list 4 87 font size 4 53 4 57 font source 4 51 4 55 font stvle 4 52 4 56 FONT switch 4 49 form feed 4 61 form feed suppress 4 43 FORM FEED switch 4 61 fuser 6 6 G G3 G4 1 8 G3 G4 format Appendix 51 graphics mode 4 26 H HDD card 1 10 5 2 hex dump mode 4 88 high resolution control HRC 1 4 4 30 high speed parallel communications 4 18
220. common printing situation Loading the same size and type of paper in all paper trays This allows your print job to continue without error if one of the paper trays becomes empty The printer will automatically select another tray if one tray becomes empty When you select the FEEDER AUTO the printer automatically searches for the paper size you set with the MODE switch in the PAGE FORMAT mode and loads the paper from the paper source that contains the selected size of paper If all of the upper and lower paper cassettes and the multi purpose tray contain different sizes of paper and one paper cassette runs out of paper the printer stops printing without automatically changing to the other paper source to feed paper It prevents a different size of paper from being printed by mistake If you have the same size of paper loaded but of different type i e FORM A in Tray 1 Form in Multi purpose Tray it is recommended to change the feeder setting from AUTO to Tray 1 This setting will allow the printer to pause when a paper empty condition occurs allowing you to load the correct type of paper then press SEL to finish to print job 4 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective USER GUIDE When you select MP TRAY TRAY1 TRAY2 an asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time Then the exit message appears on the display Press the SET switch again so that the prin
221. cription Signal Name IN OUT Explanation FG Frame Ground SD OUT Send Data RD IN Receive Data Receives data transmitted from the computer RS OUT Request To Send SPACE level when the printer is readv to send data to the computer DR IN Data Set Ready When DSR is at SPACE level data can be accepted SG Signal Ground ER OUT Data Terminal Ready MARK level when the printer is Busy Appendix 12 APPENDICES Serial Cable Connection for IBM PC AT or Compatible Computers and IBM PS 2 Computers The following diagrams show the pin connections for the most common serial communications DB 9 Serial Connection When you use a computer with a 9 pin serial port use a cable with the following pin configurations Printer Male SD 2 RD 3 DR DSR 6 SG 7 20 DB 25 Serial Connection Computer Female 2 RD SD 4 5 SG 6 DR DSR 8 CS CTS When you use a computer with a 25 pin serial port use a cable with the following pin configurations Printer Male FG 1 SD 2 RD 3 DR DSR 6 SG 7 20 Computer Female 1 FG RD 2 SD 20 ER DTR 7 SG 5 CS CTS 6 DR DSR Any pins not shown in the figures above are not connected Appendix 13 USER GUIDE Universal Serial Bus USB Interface HL 1660e only Interface Connector 9 4 Pin Assignment Pin No Signal 1 45V 2 Data Serial Data 3 Data Serial
222. ction of LCD display on the control panel LCD module Dose the voltage of the following signals Yes Replace the control panel vary to 5V or OV when the LCD displays are unit Control panel changed through switch operations Check following signals using the digital Replace the main PCB assy memory scope with the trigger function for the switch flat cable or the Switch flat cable this check control panel unit Main PCB Signal Main PCB Panel PCB LCD PAD4 P1 9 P1 13 P2 4 7 PAD5 1 5 P1 17 2 3 8 PAD6 1 11 1 11 P2 2 9 PAD7 1 4 P1 18 P2 1 10 LCDRS P1 3 P1 19 P2 7 4 LCDE P1 2 P1 20 P2 5 6 M 3 Malfunction of control panel LED lamps LED lamps Dose the voltage of the following signals stay Replace the control panel OV while the 04 SELF TEST is displayed unit Control panel after switching the power on and stay 5V for PCB about 0 5 seconds after the message goes off Do the LED lamps turn on and off in response Switch flat cable to the signal levels of OV and 5V Replace the main PCB assy or the switch flat cable Main PCB Signal Main PCB Panel PCB LED1 ON LINE 1 13 1 9 LED2 READY 1 7 P1 15 LED3 DATA P1 1 1 21 LED4 ALARM 1 6 1 16 VI 11 Malfunction of control panel switches Mis operation 1 Are the switchs operated according to the Operate the switches operation correctiv following the operation ma
223. current emulation mode with an asterisk AUTO ka Press the A or V switch until the desired emulation mode appears on the display Display Message Emulation Mode HP LaserJet 5 4 HP LaserJet BR Script 2 BR Script level 2 mode HP GL HP GL Plotter Mode EPSON FX 850 EPSON FX 850 IBMProprinterXL IBM Proprinter XL AUTO Auto Emulation Selection Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective When you select any specific emulation mode other than AUTO an asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off line state When you select AUTO the sub item Time Out for the automatic emulation selection appears on the display Go to the next step USER GUIDE 4 66 Set Time with the A or V switch TIME OUT 5s This time is duration during which the printer will not allow automatic emulation change You can set it from 1 second to 99 seconds the factory setting is 5 seconds Press the SET switch The next sub item EPSON IBM appears on the display EPSON IBM EPSON Select EPSON or IBM with the A or W switch Since the printer cannot distinguish between the EPSON and IBM emulation modes you need to select the EPSON or IBM emulation even in the AUTO mode When the printer receives data from the computer it automatically selects
224. d printing canceled by ESC F Cancels emphasized printing Selects enlarged characters for one line only Cancels one line enlarged character printing Sets n 1 or cancels n 0 enlarged character printing When n 0 SO enlarged printing will also be canceled Sets superscript n 0 or subscript n 1 printing Cancels superscript or subscript printing Sequence ESC O ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC An ESC 2 ESC 3n ESC Jn ESC nk NUL HT ESC Bnl nk NUL VT ESC DC2 ESC ESC Pn SI ESC E ESC F 5 DC4 or CAN ESC Wn ESC Sn ESC T Decimal 2779 27 48 27 49 27 65 27 50 2751 27 74 27 68 nl nk NUL 9 27 6611 nk NUL 11 27 82 27 58 27 80 27 69 27 70 14 20 24 27 87 27 83 27 84 Hexadecimal IB4F 30 31 1B 41n 1B 32 33 n 4A n 1B 44 01 NUL 09 42 1 nk NUL 0B 1B 52 1B3A 1B 50n 1 45 1 46 14 18 IB 57n 1B 53 1 54 Command name Set Cancel Underline Print Mode Set Cancel Overline Print Mode Select Double High Double Width Mode Select Character Set II Select Character Select Characters from Character Table Select a Character from Character Table Define 8 dot Download Characters Select Download Font Set Single Densitv Bit Image Mode Set Double
225. down tray Print delivery path Fixing unit Low voltage power supply assy High voltage power supply assy Paper cassette Tray 1 Pick up rollers MP tray Control panel G5 C 5 Figure 1 5 5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EP ED CARTRIDGES An EP ED cartridge is influenced by the storage conditions even if it is sealed in its package so its life depends on the way in which it is used or stored EP ED cartridges should be handled carefully 5 1 Storage of Sealed EP ED Cartridges When storing sealed EP ED cartridges in a warehouse or workshop the storage conditions shown in 25 Environmental conditions on Page 1 5 must be met Follow the instructions below 1 Avoid direct sunlight 2 Do not store cartridges on a surface that is subject to vibration 3 Do not hit or drop the packages containing cartridges 4 The cartridges should be stored horizontal when they are removed from the body with their label side upside 5 Avoid putting the cartridges near a CRT screen a disk or a floppy disk to keep their data from being destroyed 5 2 Storage of Unsealed EP ED Cartridges Each EP ED cartridge contains a photosensitive drum that has an organic photoconductor OPC which deteriorates wh
226. ductor and be correctly wired to provide connection to ground Incorrectly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power is grounded and that the installation is completely safe For your safety if in any doubt about the effective grounding of the power consult a qualified electrician Wiring Information For U K only xii Important If the mains plug supplied with this printer is not suitable for your socket outlet remove the plug from the mains cord and fit an appropriate three pin plug If the replacement plug is intended to take a fuse then fit the same rating fuse as the original If a moulded plug is severed from the mains cord then it should be destroyed because a plug with cut wires is dangerous if engaged in a live socket outlet Do not leave it where a child might find it In the event of replacing the plug fuse fit a fuse approved by ASTA to BS1362 with the same rating as the original fuse Always replace the fuse cover Never use a plug with the cover omitted WARNING THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED REGULATIONS The wires in the mains cord are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND XELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE The colours of the wires in the mains lead of this printer mav not correspond with the coloured markings identifving the terminals in vour plug If vou need to fit a differ
227. e EXT FAX menu Check that the correct dial type is set If not set the correct dial type in Fax Line Setup of the fax driver Check if the outside line access code is set correctly If not set it correctly in Outside Line Access Code in FAX Line Setup of the fax driver Check if the telephone line is connected correctly Check if the External Fax Modem is turned on Check if the printer and the External Fax Modem are connected correctly Check that you turned on the External Fax Modem before turning on the printer Check if the printer port LPT1 LPT2 or the network printer is correct Check if the printer cable is connected correctly Check if the network cable is connected correctly to the network card of the printer Check if the telephone line is connected correctly Check if RECEIVE MODE ON is selected on the control panel Refer to the Settings on the Control Panel section Check if the External Fax Modem is turned on Check if the printer and the External Fax Modem are connected correctly Check that you turned on the External Fax Modem before turning on the printer LASER PRINTER PARTS REFERENCE LIST HL 1660e NOTE FOR USING THIS PARTS REFERENCE LIST 1 In the case of ordering parts it needs mentioning the following items 1 Code 2 Q ty 3 Description 4 Symbol PCB No Revision and Parts location mounted on the PCB Note No orders w
228. e RUN command from the FILE menu in the Program Manager 2 Type A SETUP and press the ENTER key Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 1 Click Start and select Printers from the Settings menu 2 Click the Add printer icon in the Printers folder 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen If vou have alreadv created a network share on vour file server specifv the share name on vour file server 6 Caution When installing the fax driver in Windows 4 0 be sure to install it as a Local Printer in Add Printer Wizard You should select the network port after installing the fax driver if you want to use it as a network printer If you install the fax driver as a Network Printer it will not work Receiving Fax Messages When the printer power is on the printer automatically receives fax data through the External Fax Modem and prints the data The FAX RECEIVING message appears while the printer is receiving data You can also make a setting on the control panel to not receive fax data For details refer to Settings on the Control Panel in this manual Q Caution When the FAX RECEIVING message appears on the control panel do not turn off the printer as this will result in the fax data not being completely received OPERATION MANUAL Sending a Fax Message Windows 3 1 lt Select the fax driver gt To select the fax driver from the Control Panel 1 Choose and double cl
229. e display shows the following setting menus ECT FONT Select the font CHARACTER SET Select the character set TABLE PRINT Print the code table H exit Exit To select the font and character set in the EPSON FX 850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Press the FONT switch The displav shows the font setting menu Xou can skip the font setting menu and advance to the character set setting menu with the A or V switch For this session go to the next step SELECT FONT CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 3 Press the SET switch When vou enter the SELECT FONT menu vou can select the internal font optional slot font or permanent download font The displav shows the following message INTERNAL FONT Press the A or W switch until the desired font source appears on the display Display Message Font Source INTERNAL FONT Internal font of the printer SLOTFONT A Optional card font in the upper slot A SLOTFONT B Optional cartridge font in the lower slot B PERMANENT FONT Permanent download font defined in the HP emulation mode Since these steps instruct you to select the standard font select the INTERNAL FONT message e Notes When you select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts note the following e If the optional font cartridge card is not installed the optional font can
230. e message 05 TEST PRINT will appear on the status display of the control panel and the DATA lamp will come on Then the printer will produce the test print 4 Determine the image trouble type and see Section 3 for troubleshooting TEST PRINT Figure 6 1 VI 2 3 IMAGE DEFECTS 3 1 Image Defect Examples l 1 Light l 2 Dark l 3 Completelv blank l 4 All black l 5 Polka dots 1 6 Dirt on back of paper 1 7 Black vertical streaks l 8 Black and blurred vertical stripes l 9 Black and thin l 10 Black and blurred l 11 Dropout l 12 White vertical horizontal streaks horizontal stripes streaks LP l 13 Faultv l 14 Poor fixing registration Figure 6 2 VI 3 3 2 Troubleshooting Image Defects Toner shortage Does printed image improve when the EP ED Replace EP ED cartridge cartridge is replaced ECONOMY Is the ECONOMY mode active Cancel the ECONOMY mode mode Printing 3 Does printed image improve when printed Adjust the proper setting density setting density setting is changed on the control on the control panel panel During a printing open the toner cartridge lid Yes Go to the Step 9 in the printer and pull out the EP ED cartridge Open the drum shutter of the EP ED cartridge and check the toner image on the drum Is the toner image before transfer is light Does the print quality improve when fresh Yes Use recommended paper paper is used Does the print quality improve when print is Cle
231. ed card is not formatted When you enter this mode menu with the flash memory card or the HDD card installed but not formatted by this printer you must first format the card Display Message Card Operation FORMAT CARD Format a new flash memory card or HDD card exit Exit to CARD OPERATION When the display shows FORMAT CARD press the SET switch to format the installed card After the printer finishes formatting the card you exit to the CARD OPERATION menu e Notes e If the card is formatted data that has been previously written is erased It takes ten or more seconds to format a 2 Mbyte flash memory card or HDD card The more the capacity of the card the longer time it takes to format the card 4 33 USER GUIDE 4 34 When the installed flash card card is formatted When vou enter this mode menu with the formatted flash memorv card or HDD card installed the displav shows the following menus Displav Message Flash Operation EXECUTE DATA Select the data ID and execute the selected data This menu appears only when any data has been saved on the card CARD LIST Print out the contents of the flash memory card or the HDD card This menu appears only when anything has been saved in the card SAVE Save received data macros and fonts DELETE Delete items from the card 9 Note A common use of the flash memory is with FORMS softw
232. eeder 4 Does the voltage of P3 1 or P4 1 in the Replace the Paper feed size PCB paper feeder PCB connector drop from SW PCB assy 24V to OV and is the chopping pulses Paper feed motor Does the pick up motor rotate No Replace the paper feed motor assy VI 15 13 55 HIGH VOL MALF is displayed Faulty output from the H V P S ASSY Main PCB 1 When a test print is carried out is the voltage No Replace the main PCB assv of the each pin in the main PCB connector P6 turned on and off as the below list Signal name Voltage Remarks reference value HV1AC OV 5 8V HV1DC OV 8 6V DBAC OV 6 3V DBDC oV 8 6V DNSTY 1 0 4 0 Default 2 5V HVT1 OV HVT4 HVTFB 1 OV TONER2 24VRET 5V co S S B power supply PCB connector P4 turned on and High voltage off Replace the high voltage power supply PCB power supply PCB assy HV harness Is the voltage of the each pin of the high voltage No Replace the HV harness VI 16 50 FUSER MALF is displayed Thermal fuse 1 Is the thermal fuse located in the fixing unit Replace the fixing unit conductive Thermistor 2 Remove the fixing unit from the printer and N Replace the fixing unit measure the resistance between two pins of the 2 pin connector on the fixing PCB Is the measured resistance within the range of 1 0 1 6MQ normal temperature Fixing heat 3 Is the fixing heat
233. em Cassette or manual feed Roller method Natural utilizing a small drum radius Static charge eliminator Heated fixing roller Included in the replaceable EP ED cartridge 6000 pages cartridge Plain paper for Letter Legal A4 ISO B5 A5 ISO B6 6 Executive A4 or letter size paper with the print density set at level 8 with 496 coverage recommended 60 g m 105 g m and Envelope com10 monarch C5 DL ISO B5 Plain paper of 90 x 148 mm 216 x 356 mm recommended 60g m 135 g m overhead projector OHP film postcards label stock and envelopes specified sizes A4 Letter Legal ISO B5 Executive A5 ISO B6 and A6 55 mm 500 sheets of 80 g m paper 60 105 g m 40 envelopes Face down or face up 250 sheets 80 g m Discharge only 13 Effective printing area Printable area Figure 1 1 Printable Area Effective printable area is referred to as a area within which is guaranteed the printing of all interface signal data on a hard copv without anv omission The tables below shows the effective printable area for each paper size Table 1 1 Plain Paper SIZE E mm A4 3 39 1 0 Letter 4 23 1 0 Legal 4 23 1 0 B 5 ISO 4 23 1 0 Executive 4 23 1 0 5 4 23 1 0 B 6 ISO 4 23 1 0 4 23 1 0 Table 1 2 Envelope SIZE E mm COM 10 4 23 1 0 MONARCH i 4 23 1 0 4 23 1 0 5 4 23 1 0 4 23 1 0
234. en a screw and remove the fixing PCB assv Screw Figure 4 51 IV 20 7 Release the left hook and take off the paper deliverv actuator OO See Paper delivery act rs Fixing unit cover Figure 4 52 1 Remove the fixing heat insulation cover by loosening the 2 screws the pressure roller spring and pressure roller bearing on both sides and the pressure roller Screws Pressure roller bearing Heatinsulation cover Pressure roller spring Fixing unit Chassis Figure 4 54 Figure 4 53 2 Remove the retaining rings on both sides 3 Remove the HR gear loosen the screw and remove the spring washer remove the left and right HR bearings and the heat roller by sliding it Screw Spring washer 1 Retaining ine Heat roller 25 HR bearing 4 HR gear Retaining ring J 1 T0 Figure 4 55 IV 21 1 30 Transfer Unit 1 Loosen a screw 2 Release the 3 right hooks see Figure 4 57 lift the right part of the unit A and slide it to the right B to take off the left part from the main chassis L Remove the transfer unit from the body by lifting the former Main chassis L Right Figure 4 56 3 Open the transfer base hook and take off the left bearing white from the hook A Lift the left side B slide it to the left and take off the roller shaft from the right bearing black D 4 Remove the transfer roller assy Caution Do not to
235. en exposed to strong light It also contains toner The user therefore should be fully informed about the correct storage and handling of EP ED cartridges 1 Storage requirements 1 Avoid places exposed to direct sunlight or near a window Do not leave an EP ED cartridge in a car in warm or hot weather even if it is in its storage box 2 Avoid places with a too high or too cool temperature and or humidity Also avoid places exposed to sudden temperature or humidity changes such as near an air conditioner outlet 3 Avoid dusty places or places exposed to ammonia fumes or other harmful fumes 4 Do not store an EP ED cartridge a temperature above 40 2 EP ED cartridge life The effective life of an EP ED cartridge is 2 5 years from the date of manufacture printed on the cartridge The expiry year and month date of manufacture plus 2 5 years is shown on the EP ED cartridge box An EP ED cartridge used after the expiry may produce low quality printing so a cartridge should be used within the stated period CHAPTER THEORY OF OPERATION This chapter describes the printer functions the relationship between the electrical systems and mechanical systems and the timing of operations Striped conduits B M indicate mechanical linkages solid thin arrows gt appearing with a signal name indicate the transmission of single control signals and outlined thick arrows gt indicate the transmission of groups of
236. ent plug proceed as follows Remove a length of the cord outer sheath taking care not to damage the coloured insulation of the wires inside Cut each of the three wires to the appropriate length If the construction of the plug permits leave the green and yellow wire longer than the others so that in the event that the cord is pulled out of the plug the green and yellow wire will be the last to disconnect Remove a short section of the coloured insulation to expose the wires The wire which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter or coloured black or blue The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red or brown The outer sheath of the cord must be secured inside the plug The coloured wires should not hang out of the plug Xiii USER S GUIDE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EUROPE We Brother International Europe Ltd Brother House 1 tame Street Guide Bridge Audenshaw Manchester M34 5JE UK declare that this product is in conformity with the following normative documents Safety EN 60950 EN 60825 EMC EN 55022 Class B EN 50082 1 following the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC a
237. entation on the display PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE Fig 4 4 Page Orientation When you enter the setting mode the display first shows the current orientation with an asterisk rj ORI PORTRAI Press the or W switch until the desired orientation appears on the display Display Message Orientation ORI PORTRAIT Portrait ORI LANDSCAPE Landscape Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the FORMAT MODE 4 20 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL When portrait has been selected the display may look as follows 00 RI EADY 001P T1 When landscape has been selected the display may look as follows 00 RI AUTO MODE gt Note EADX 0011 T1 The settings in this mode menu are effective in the HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes They do not appear in other emulation modes The page line termination is set in this mode Display Message AUTO LE OFF AUTO WRAP OFF AUTO SKIP AUTO MASK OFF Setting ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Auto Mode CR CR LF CR gt CR LF CR FF FF CR VT VT CR LF gt LF FF gt FF VT VT Line feed and carriage return occur when the printer position reaches the right margin No line feed and carriage return
238. er Paper Types to Avoid Some types of paper might not perform well or may cause damage to your printer Types of paper to avoid are Highly textured paper Smooth or shiny paper Paper that is coated or has a chemical finish Damaged wrinkled or prefolded paper Paper exceeding the recommend weight specification specified in the manual 6 Paper with tabs and staples 7 Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography 8 Multipart or carbonless paper pod oppo DAMAGE OR OTHER DEFECTS CAUSED BY THE USE OF PAPERS LISTED UNDER PAPER TYPES TO AVOID WILL NOT BE COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENTS ENVELOPES Most envelopes will perform acceptably on your printer However some envelopes will have feeding and print quality problems because of their construction suitable envelope should have edges with a straight well creased folds and should not have more than two thickness of paper along the lead edge The envelope should lie flat and not have baggy or flimsy construction Purchase quality envelopes only from a supplier who understands that the envelopes will be used in a laser printer envelopes should be tested prior to use to ensure desirable print results Envelope Types to Avoid Envelopes constructed with a paper with a weight that exceeds the paper weight specifications for the printer 2 Poorly manufactured envelopes with edges that are not straight or consistently square
239. er Developing cylinder Toner sensor Pick up Solenoid MP Tray Pick up Solenoid Pick up Motor Figure 3 5 Engine Controller Block Diagram Components in the Circuit refer to the next page A B C Ao TT Engine Control CPU Low Voltage Power Supply Connector Fuser Unit Control C 1 Heater Drive Circuit C 2 Heater Temperature Input Signal C 3 Paper Eject Input Sig Scanner Unit Control G 1 Scanner Motor Control Circuit G 2 Laser Diode Drive PCB Control Circuit Fan Motor Drive Circuit Main Motor Control Circuit nal Cover Open Detect Circuit Safety Door Switch Circuit Option Interface Circuit and Connector III 7 Paper Feeder PCB Control Signals and Connector High Voltage Power Supply Control Circuit and Connector 2 PAPER FEED DRIVE CIRCUIT B p Connector to Main PCB Pick up Motor Drive Circuit and Connector Pick up Solenoid Drive Circuit and Connector Multi Purpose Trav Pick up Solenoid Drive Circuit and Connector Sensors E 1 Travi Paper Emptv Sensor E 2 Multi Purpose Trav Paper Sensor E 3 Regist Sensor E 4 Pre Regist Sensor E 5 Paper Detect Sensor in Duplex Unit Travi Paper Size Detect Switches Refer to the next page 8 13HAret LY
240. er or drum is adversely affected and might cause serious damage when printing Drum Shutter Fig 2 9 Don ts When Handling the Toner Cartridge USER S GUIDE 3 Hold the toner cartridge with both hands Rock it gently several times at a 45 angle This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge Fig 2 10 Rocking the Toner Cartridge 4 Bend the tab up and down several times until it is detached from the toner cartridge Fig 2 11 Detaching the Tab 2 8 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 5 Hold the tab firmly and pull it out until the sealing tape comes out all the wav Fig 2 12 Pulling Out the Sealing Tape If the tab breaks from the sealing tape hold and pull out the tape If vour hands or clothes get dirtv with toner wipe or wash it off immediatelv with cold water 6 Insert the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrows engraved on the cartridge into the side guides until it stops securelv in the cartridge holder inside the printer gt Note Push both sides of the toner cartridge gently until the cartridge is seated in its place Fig 2 13 Inserting the Toner Cartridge 2 9 USER S GUIDE 7 Close the top cover of the printer When the cartridge has almost run out of toner the display shows the following operator call message to prompt you to replace the toner cartridge 16 TONER EMPTY Although you can print several
241. er to your computer as follows 1 Make sure that both the computer and the printer are turned off e Caution Always turn off the printer and computer when connecting and disconnecting the cable When connecting and disconnecting the cable with the Universal Serial Bus interface however it it not necessary to turn off the printer and computer 2 Connect one end of the interface cable to the interface connector located on the back of the printer 2 17 USER S GUIDE 3 Secure the connection with wire clips or screws on the printer Parallel Interface Port Secure connection with wire clips Serial Interface Port Secure connection with screws Computer USB Hub Printer Universal Serial Interface Port HL 1660e oniv Fig 2 21 Connecting the Printer and Computer 4 Connect the other end of the interface cable to the interface connector on your computer Be sure to secure the connection on the computer also 2 18 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED Turning the Printer On and Off Plugging in the Power Cord Plug in the power cord as follows 1 Make sure that the POWER switch is OFF the switch is on the front right hand side of the printer Attach the power cord to the printer and plug it into an appropriate AC outlet Fig 2 22 Plugging in the Power Cord Q Caution e Check the AC voltage This printer
242. ers Appendix 10 vii USER S GUIDE RS 232C Serial Appendix 11 Specie ic Rd REM Appendix 11 interiace OTC T ness Appendix 11 MT Appendix 11 Appendix 12 Serial Cable Connection for IBM PC AT or Compatible Computers and IBM PS 2 Computers Appendix 13 SYMBOLUCHARBRACTER SET Bi p Appendix 15 DECIR cele paie Sar a d Appendix 15 isla to uq D fum Appendix 16 s S NL M M M Appendix 24 IBM Appendix 27 ne Appendix 29 Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer s Intellifont Compatible Hr Appendix 34 Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer s TrueType and Type 1 Font Compatible aud Ongmal Typefades iacere Appendix 36 QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS eee Appendix 38 HP LaserJet Mode te e rok HI Et e Appendix 38 POL Command SES oe cose Duce tpe DET apie ep Appendix 38 D er Appendix 51 Horizontal 1200 dpi Image Format Mode Appendix 54 HPGL Command HONS Appendix 57 Printer Job Language Commands Appendix 59 EPSON EX 850 Modd sas anaes Appendix 60 IBM Propruntet XLE MOUE i
243. es that meet specifications Moist paper causes this problem If the print density is set too low this problem may occur Adjust the print density to the proper setting See Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Font List in Chapter 2 Fig 7 16 Dropout Poor Halftone or Grayscale Transitions If images do not have smooth transitions as gray shades gradually change turn off the high resolution control HRC SETTING in RESOLUTION with the MODE switch 3 HRC OFF HRC MEDIUM Fig 7 17 Adjustment of High Resolution Control 7 TROUBLESHOOTING T Caution Operation of the printer outside the specifications shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end user purchaser For USA amp CANADA Only For technical and operational assistance please call In USA 1 800 276 7746 outside California 714 859 9700 Ext 329 within California In CANADA 1 800 853 6660 514 685 6464 within Montreal If you have comments or suggestions please write us at In USA Printer Customer Support Brother International Corporation 15 Musick Irvine CA 92718 In CANADA Brother International Corporation Canada Ltd Marketing Dept 1 rue H tel de Ville Dollard des Ormeaux PQ Canada H9B 3H6 BBS For downloading drivers from our Bulletin Board Service call In USA 1 714 859 2610 In CANADA 1 514 685 2040 Please log on to our BBS
244. ete Current ID ESC 25 27 42 99 50 83 1 2 63 32 53 Temporarv ESC 45 27 42 99 52 83 1 2 63 34 53 Make Permanent ESC 5 5 27 42 99 53 83 2 63 35 53 Macro ID Set ESC amp 27 38 102 89 1B 26 66 59 ID Macro Control Start Macro Definition ESC amp f0X 27 38 102 48 88 1B 26 66 30 58 End Macro Definition ESC amp f1X 27 38 102 49 88 1B 26 66 31 58 Execute Macro ESC amp f2X 27 38 102 50 88 1B 26 66 32 58 Call Macro ESC amp f3X 27 38 102 51 88 1B 26 66 33 58 Macro Overlay ON ESC amp f4X 27 38 102 52 88 1B 26 66 34 58 Macro Overlay OFF ESC amp f5X 27 38 102 53 88 1B 26 66 35 58 Delete All Macros ESC amp f6X 27 38 102 54 88 1B 26 66 36 58 Delete Temporary Macro ESC amp 7 27 38 102 55 88 1B 26 66 37 58 Delete Current Macro ESC amp f8X 27 38 102 56 88 1B 26 66 38 58 Make Temporary Macro ESC amp f9X 27 38 102 57 88 1B 26 66 39 58 Make Permanent Macro ESC amp f 10 X 27 38 102 49 48 88 1B 26 66 31 30 58 Macro Card original Delete All Macros from Card Delete Current Macro ESC amp f 1030 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 48 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 30 58 ESC amp f 1036 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 54 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 36 58 from Card Save Current Macro into Card ESC amp f 1038 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 56 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 38 58 STATUS READBACK Set Status Readback Location Type Appendix 44 Invalid Location ESC sOT 27 42 115 48 84 1B 2A 73 30 54 Currently Selected ESC sIT 2742 115 49 84 1 2 73 31 54
245. eveloping cylinder rotates around a fixed internal magnet The single component toner consists of magnetite and a resin binder and is held to the cylinder by magnetic attraction The toner is aninsulator and acquires a negative charge by friction due to the rotation of the cylinder The areas on the drum that were exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential are less negative than the negatively charged toner particles on the developing cylinder When these areas approach the cylinder the potential difference projects the toner particles onto them This is called toner projection and the latent image on the drum becomes visible Developing cylinder surface potential V V Drum surface potential pp exposed area DC bias 5 iS Drum surface potential unexposed area Figure 2 12 An AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder to help project the toner particles to the drum surface and improve the contrast of the printed image The center voltage of the AC bias 1600 Vp p varies with the DC bias voltage The IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT signal sent from the Engine CPU to the high voltage power supply changes the DC bias and thus the potential difference between the cylinder and drum This changes the density of the print This printer has a stirring mechanism to supply toner in the cartridge smoothly to the cylinder Il 8 3 2 3 Step 4 Transfer Transfer stage In the transfer stage the to
246. exceeds the RAM capacity a memory full error occurs You can clear this error with the CONTINUE switch When this error occurs only part of the image has been stored in RAM therefore you cannot save the data to the card e The printer is reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM If any data remains it is printed out first After you have finished sending data press the SET switch again so that the printer exits from the data reception status When you exit from the data reception status you see the following message on the display DATA Select the data ID with the A W switch and press the SET switch The printer will then save the received data with the ID on the card e Notes When you see an asterisk on the display the ID number has been used for other data or a macro If you select the used ID number the old data or macro is erased and replaced with the new data Once the data is saved you can execute it with EXECUTE DATA or with a data execution command The data saved in the SAVE DATA mode can not be run with the macro execution command in HP LaserJet emulation CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL e Save Macro gt Note The SAVE MACRO menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode If you have downloaded a macro in the printer s memory you can save the macro on the installed flash memory card or HDD card If a macro has been downloaded in the printer s memory
247. ferent font rather than the font you have selected with your program or the font selection command To cope with this font problem you can restrict the font selection by this command as follows Display Message Scalable Font FONT ALL All scalable fonts of this printer can be selected with the font selection command For fonts see RESIDENT FONTS in Appendix Factory setting FONT LJ Scalable fonts of this printer other than the following can be selected with the font selection command Atlanta Bermuda Script PC Brussels Copenhagen Germanv Portugal Calgarv San Diego and US Roman Even if vou restrict the font selection as above vou can select among all the scalable fonts with the FONT switch The setting in this mode menu merelv restricts the font selection command 4 45 USER GUIDE 4 46 PRINT DENSITY You can increase or decrease the print density with the A or W switch in this mode menu as follows Display Message Print Density TE E EE ER The more black squares the darker the print densitv The black squares indicate the densitv level The densitv can be set to 15 levels Factory setting INPUT BUFFER Xou can increase or decrease the capacitv of the input buffer with the A or W switch in this mode menu A larger capacitv allows the printer to receive data from the computer faster Displav Message Input Buffer The more squares
248. for display messages The COPY setting is always restored to the factory setting when the printer is turned off and on again The user settings are overwritten after resetting to setting 1 or 2 USER GUIDE 4 80 Switch Item Sub Item Factory Setting MODE INTERFACE MODE I FZAUTO For AUTO mode TIME OUT TIME OUT 5s For bi directional PARALLEL interface HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED ON BI DIR BI DIRZON For RS 232C serial interface Baud Rate BaudRate 9600 Code Type CodeType 8 bits Parity Parity ZNONE Stop Bit Stop Bit 1 bits Xon Xoff Xon XoffZON DTR ER ER ON Robust Xon Robust Xon OFF FORMAT MODE ORIENTATION Except for BR ORI PORTRAIT Script 2 AUTO MODE HP LaserJet AUTO LF OFF AUTO CR OFF AUTO WRAP OFF AUTO SKIP ON AUTO MODE EPSON AUTO LF OFF AUTO CR ON No indication AUTO WRAP ON No indication AUTO MASK OFF AUTO MODE IBM AUTO LF OFF AUTO CR OFF AUTO WRAP ON No indication AUTO MASK OFF Switch Item Sub Item MODE continued FORMAT MODE continued CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Factory Setting PAGE FORMAT MODE HP LaserJet EPSON amp IBM PAPER LEFT M RIGHT M TOP M BOTTOM M LETTER For 110 120V model A4 For 220 240V model 0 LETTER PORTRAIT 0 LEGAL PORTRAIT 0 A4 PORTRAIT 0 LETTER LANDSCAPE 0 LEGAL LANDSCAPE 0 A4 LANDSCAPE 0 5 LANDSCAPE 0 LANDSCAPE 80 PORTRAIT 80 LEGAL PORTRAIT 78 A4 PORTRAIT
249. from the MP tray 6 1 pin HV1AC Change in voltage from 6V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed 6 2 pin HV1DC Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed P6 5 pin DNSTY Change in voltage to 2 5V just when a sheet of paper is fed No Yes Dirt on power 5 15 there any dirt on the cartridge side charging Clean the terminal to assure supply terminal terminal of the transfer unit and on the terminal the continuity of the high voltage power supply charging unit Failure in the is there continuity between them Replace the high voltage charging high power supply PCB assy voltage circuit VI 5 l 3 Completelv blank EP ED cartridge 1 Does printed image improve when the EP ED Replace the EP ED cartridge cartridge is replaced Development 2 Do the pins 3 4 and 5 of the connector N Replace the main PCB assy input signal P6 on the main PCB have the following value or the harness error respectively when a sheet of paper is fed from the MP tray P6 3 pin DBAC Change in voltage from 6V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed from the registration unit P6 4 pin DBDC Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed from the registration unit P6 5 pin DNSTY Change in voltage to 2 5V just when a sheet of paper is fed Yes o Failure in 3 Is there any dirt on the cartridge side No Clean the termina
250. g See page 5 6 Automatic Interface Selection This printer can automatically select the bi directional parallel RS 232C serial Universal Serial Bus HL 1660e only or MIO interface depending on the interface port through which it receives data With this feature the printer can be connected to more than one computer See page 3 5 Five Emulation Modes This printer can emulate the Hewlett Packard laser printer LaserJet 5 PCL 6 HL 1660e only LaserJet 4 PCL 5e PostScript Level 2 language emulation Brother BR Script Level 2 printers the industry standard HP GL plotter as well as EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL printers You can print with all application programs that support one of these printers See page 3 1 USER S GUIDE Automatic Emulation Selection This printer can automatically select the printer emulation mode depending on the print commands it receives from the computer software With this feature many users can share the printer on a network See page 3 3 Data Compression Technology This printer can internally compress the received graphics and font data in its memory so that it can print larger graphics and more fonts without additional memory Memory Expansion This printer has 2 Mbyte HL 1260e 4 Mbyte HL 1660 or 8 Mbyte HL 1660e of RAM as standard It can be expanded up to 66 Mbytes HL 1260e 1660 72 Mbytes HL 1660e The memory should be expanded to 6 Mbytes
251. ge of P11 1 in the main PCB Replace the fuser harness Feed flat cable connector rise from OV to 5V when the eject or the feed flat cable the main PCB connector rise from OV to 5V Ves Replace the main PCB assy VI 14 54 MOTOR MALF is displayed The main motor rotation disabled Low voltage power Is the voltage of P7 1 in the main PCB Replace the main PCB assy low voltage power supply PCB assy or the LV harness supply PCB connector 24 LV harness Main PCB DC motor harness 2 Does the voltage of P7 4 in the main PCB Replace the PCB assy Yes DC motor assy connector drop from 5V to OV after dropping Replace the DC motor harness or the DC motor assy the voltage of P7 3 from 5V to OV No paper pick up from cassette or MP tray Mis operation 1 Is the paper feed mode set correctly Set paper feed mode correctly Main PCB 2 Does the voltage of P3 20 or 19 in the main N Replace the main PCB assy PCB connector rise from OV to 5V is a pulses having about 11ms period generated at P3 6 7 8 9 pin No o Feed flat cable 3 Does the voltage of P5 20 or 19 in the paper Replace the feed flat cable feeder PCB Connector rise from OV to 5V and is the pulses having about 11ms period generated at P3 6 7 8 9 pin No No generated at P1 1 2 5 6 pin Pick up or MP 5 Does the pick up or MP Pick solenoid Pick solenoid operate Replace the pick up or MP Pick solenoid Paper f
252. gnificant 3 bits in the first 2 bvtes are in the order 1 0 1 the following 4 bits indicate 4 bit data to repeat The remaining 9 bits indicate the number of times to repeat the 16 bit 4 by 4 bits data LES aD L E eddie 0 Ll 10 11 jdatatorepeat ______ number or repeats 9 bits 4 bits e Vertical repeating compressed data When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1 1 1 the remaining 13 bits indicate the same data words as in the previous line 15 14 13 12 0 HP TIODI ae aae aada a The printer can not support the APT and HRC function in the 1200 dpi printing mode Appendix 56 HP GL 2 Command Sets Command Dual Context Extensions ENTER PCL MODE RESET PRIMARY FONT SECONDARY FONT SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED FONTS Palette Extensions TRANSPARENCY MODE SCREENED VECTORS Vector Group ARC ABSOLUTE ARC RELATIVE ABSOLUTE ARC THREE POINT BEZIER ABSOLUTE BEZIER RELATIVE ABSOLUTE PLOT RELATIVE PEN DOWN PEN UP RELATIVE ARC THREE POINT POLYLINE ENCODED Polygon Group CIRCLE FILL RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE FILL RECTANGLE RELATIVE EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE FILL WEDGE Mnemonic ESC ESC E SB TR SV AR AT BZ BR PA PR PD PU RT PE CI RA RR EA ER WG APPENDICES Parameters O Retain previous PCL cursor position and palette 1 Use current HP GL 2 pen position and palette None Font_ID Font_ID 0 Scal
253. h to start printing the next page Data which overran the print area on the page cannot be printed Check your page protection setting with the MODE switch Setting page protection to the correct size could solve this problem If printing at 600 dpi you may need to add optional SIMM memory Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing Data lost in overflow cannot be printed Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing If the same error should occur after you press the CONTINUE switch turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Reduce the input buffer size Turn off KEEP PCL SIMM memory with power off Download font and the font saved in the HDD card might cause the error for it occupies the same work area as the RAM Memory expansion is recommended in that case When the serial interface is used check the communications parameters such as baud rate code type parity and handshake protocols When the parallel interface is used check the interface cable connection Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again See M 17 Error Message Meaning Action 42 CARD FULL 43 CARD W ERR 44 SIMM ERROR 45 MIO ERROR 46 OPTIO ERROR 47 CARD R ERROR 48 XX SIZE ERROR IGNORE DATA BR Script 2 mode only Card overflow Card write error Incorrect installation of SIMMs Error in communication with the MIO card Connection erro
254. he changeover guide guide o Deliverv rollers Is the delivery roller movement smooth Replace the rear cover assy Paper jam 5 Are there dirts or flaws on the ribs of the jam N Replace the jam remove cover remove cover remove cover and rear cover and the rear cover assy Rear cover VI 21 5 2 F 1 Possible cause Print paper Adjustment lever spring pressure switching lever Paper front guide Separation pad 3 Possible cause Print paper 2 Incomplete Paper Feed Double feeding Check Is a recommended type of paper being used Is the position of the adjustment lever of the cassette corresponding to the paper sheet size Is the paper front guide broken Is the wrinkle problem solved if fresh paper is used No Instruct the user to use recommended type of paper No Instruct the user to switch adjustment lever position Yes Replace the paper front guide No Replace the separation pad 1 Is a recommended type of paper being used No Instruct the user to use recommended type of paper S Instruct the user in correct print paper storage procedure to be free from moisture Paper pick up 3 Is the paper already wrinkled or being Yes Check the motion of the block fed askew paper pick up block Fixing unit 4 Is the entrance guide dirty Clean the entrance guide entrance guide Fixing unit No Replace the fixing unit VI 22 6 OPERATION 6 1
255. he following displays show PITCH to simplify instructions PITCH 10 00 Press the A or V switch until the desired font size appears on the display Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The blinking cursor then moves to the decimal part of the number Press the A or V switch until the desired decimal number appears on the display PITCH 16 66 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The display then shows the symbol set setting menu SYMBOL SET p 9 Press the SET switch When you enter the symbol set setting mode the display first shows the current symbol set with an asterisk ROMAN 8 p 10 Press the or V switch until the desired symbol set appears on the display See List of Symbol Character Sets on page 4 60 11 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The display then shows the next menu 4 53 USER GUIDE 4 54 TABLE PRINT p 12 Press the SET switch to start printing the code table of the selected font or press the or switch to skip this menu The display shows the exit menu 13 Press the SET switch to exit from the setting mode The printer returns to the off line state Setting the Font and Character Set in the EPSON FX 850 or IBM Proprinter XL Mode When the EPSON FX 850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode has been selected the font and character set can be selected Th
256. he print start position at the upper left corner on pages horizontally up to 500 dots to the left or 500 dots to the right in 300dpi dot unit increments factory setting 0 Y OFFSET 0 Move the print start position at the upper left corner on pages vertically up to 500 dots downward or 500 dots upward in 300dpi dot increments factory setting 0 4 23 USER GUIDE 9 Notes When vou make settings in PAGE FORMAT MODE note the following The letter size has been factory set for 110 120V model 4 size has been factory set for 220 240V model When you use a smaller size of paper than that specified in the PAGE FORMAT MODE be sure that the print area is smaller than the paper size or the inside of the printer will get stained with toner It is recommended that you perform a test before actual use for this test you could use a letter or A4 size of paper to see the printed area is completely inside the paper size you are going to use This simple test will help prevent toner from being incorrectly applied to the inside of your printer which may cause later print jobs to be smudged with toner The factory settings of the right left margins and lines vary according to the paper size and orientation See the tables below The top and bottom margins have been factory set to 0 5 in the HP emulation mode and to 0 33 in the non HP emulation modes The setting margins are subject to the current page orientation The dis
257. hey cover the entire page with the only exposed spaces being lengthwise down the sheet Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jam or print problems All labels and transparencies used in this printer must be able to withstand a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade 392 degrees Fahrenheit for a period of 0 1 seconds Label and transparency sheets should not exceed the paper weight specifications described in the User s Guide Labels and transparencies exceeding this specification may not feed or print properly and cause damage to your printer The entire responsibility for the quality and performance of labels and transparencies lies with the customer DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE USE OF UNSATISFACTORY LABELS OR TRANSPARENCIES IS NOT COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENTS Appendix 7 USER GUIDE INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS Bi directional Parallel Interface Interface Connector A shielded cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant with the following pin assignment should be used Most existing parallel cables support bi directional communication but some might have incompatible pin assignments or not be IEEE 1284 compliant 18 15 12 9 6 3 1 36 33 30 27 24 21 19 Fig A 1 Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignment Pin No Signal Pin No Sign
258. hi ALA m HUM Sf uet Ts ae MI A 1 u F th t I 5 MB x RE E m Ds 2 L i 1 1 ilu lure OX oun ril i ile IR i dro B ia A 2 i T Len x i P uU 2001 KILT E Fre m uS i ft ai ne Mao Sle ORL i FU 12 m m E i k n Nur pe n i t 7 amp a C amp 7 ha iE a ue H E e 3 lt n Ux ES 2AT jan i ki n QUIM a 1 fhe a Xi r 2 Il d an a i 5 2 is ii 1 MA E ee DEBE H 1 nu ERN the i tal 2 i Cher he Ca et E us 0 lt zo 21 Font cartridge connector aj Control panel connector _ 1 Font card m C ou eo E 5 TA 7 ASIC B za oda M65340 Figure 3 4 PCB 6 1 3 Engine Controller Circuit Engine Controller Circuit High Voltage Detectors ora Fixing Unit Low Voltage Primary charging roller Transfer roll
259. hout Figure 4 62 removing this spacer Resin spacers 1 34 Low Voltage Power Supplv Assv 1 Be sure to remove the heat insulation cover before removing the low voltage power supplv block Heat insulation cover AN a ae lt e ON 5 Hook Do zn EC ue 1 SEX Heat insulation cover Hook Figure 4 63 2 Remove the PS switch wire 3 Loosen the 2 screws on the side 4 Loosen the 4 screws on the top Low voltage power supply PCB assy Figure 4 64 24 1 35 Toner Cartridge EP ED Cartridge 1 Remove the toner cartridge from the bodv 7 Toner cartridge lid EP ED Cartridge Figure 4 65 1 36 Paper Tray 1 Release the roller holder fixing pawl and remove the roller holder by pulling it out upward 2 Remove the roller 3 Remove the separation pad assy pull it out by turning it Paper tray Roller holder fixing pawl Separation pad assy and spring Figure 4 66 IV 25 4 the trav gear holder from the other side loosening the 3 screws and remove the gear 56T link Figure 4 67 IV 26 CHAPTER MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 1 PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS Periodical replacement parts are the parts to be replaced periodically to maintain product quality at same level in other words the parts which would affect the product greatly if they lost their function even if they are not damaged or there is no change in their appeara
260. hows the following message the printer has almost run out of toner or the toner is not evenly distributed inside the cartridge 16 TONER EMPTY Although you can print between 30 and 100 additional pages after the toner empty message first appears be sure to replace the toner cartridge with a new one before it becomes completely empty You can select the printer s action when the TONER EMPTY message appears whether to stop or continue printing See ADVANCED MODE in Chapter 4 61 USER GUIDE 62 Follow these steps to check the toner cartridge 1 Remove the toner cartridge from the printer If you turn on the printer without a toner cartridge installed the displav shows the following operator call message to prompt vou to install the toner cartridge 14 NO CARTRIDGE 2 Rock the toner cartridge gently several times at a 45 angle to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge 3 Install the toner cartridge again 4 Try printing and check the printed page If you are not satisfied with it or the display still shows the toner empty message replace the old toner cartridge with a new one Replacing the Toner Cartridge Every time you replace the toner cartridge you need to clean the inside of the printer For further information on cleaning see Cleaning in this chapter gt Note To ensure optimum print quality be sure to use quality toner cartridges To obtain toner cartridges cons
261. i pa B Appendix 63 b b Appendix 66 Bar ooi i eet Appendix 68 Printer Bar Codes or Expanded Characters Appendix 68 Index 1 viii REGULATIONS IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGULATIONS Federal Communications Commission Compliance Notice For U S A oniv This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequencv energv and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions mav cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined bv turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures L Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna L Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver L Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected A Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Important About the Interface C
262. ice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and your index of Fax Back subjects DEALERS SERVICE CENTERS USA only For the name of an authorized dealer or service center call 1 800 284 4357 SERVICE CENTERS Canada only For service center addresses in Canada call 1 800 853 6660 INTERNET ADDRESS For technical questions and downloading drivers http www brother com Definitions of Warnings Cautions and Notes The following conventions are used in this User s Guide N Warning Indicates warnings that must be observed to prevent possible personal injurv Q Caution Indicates cautions that must be observed to use the printer properly or prevent damage to the printer e Note Indicates notes and useful tips to remember when using the printer To Use the Printer Safely N Warning The fixing roller is extremelv hot during operation Remove the paper carefullv TABLE OF TABLE OF CONTENTS IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGULATIONS ix CHAPTER 1 GENERAL reina sas sana scr tide bane skatta 1 1 ABOUT THIS MANHDAL sio bid 1 1 ABOUT CHAPTERS ON THE FLOPPY DISK 1 3 ABOUT THIS PRINTER ia tup eua rantes vpn 1 4 icu m tas a B M l 4 i A a tt d B l 10 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 2 1 BEFORE USING THE PRINTER i i i A 2 1 Checking the
263. ick the Printers icon in the Control Panel 2 Select Brother FAX Share from the list of the printer drivers installed onto vour computer To select the fax driver from the application software 1 Select Printer Setup or Page Setup in the File menu of the application software The setting dialog box appears after selecting Print in some application software 2 Change the printer driver to Brother FAX Share in the setting dialog box lt Send the fax message gt 1 Select Print in the File menu of the application software 2 The Print dialog box appears press the OK button to show the FAX Sending dialog box FAX Sending background bitmap S 2 3 Enter the telephone number and other items as required and then press the Start button to send the fax data to the printer OPERATION MANUAL 4 The printer sends the fax data through the External Fax Modem The FAX SENDING message appears on the control panel while the printer is sending the fax data Caution When the FAX SENDING message appears on the control panel do not turn off the printer as this will result in the fax data not being completelv sent Windows 95 Windows 98 Window NT 4 0 lt Select the fax driver gt To select the driver from the Printer Folder 1 Click Start and select Printers from the Settings menu 2 Select Brother FAX Share from the list of the printer drivers installed onto your computer Then click the
264. in total or more to enjoy 600 dpi or APT printouts in the BR Script 2 mode When you select duplex mode with an optional duplex unit installed the memory should be expanded to 10Mbytes in total or more to enjoy 600 dpi duplex printing See pages 4 28 and 5 7 The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country 75 Scalable and 12 Bitmapped Fonts This printer has the following scalable fonts and bitmapped fonts The fonts that can be used vary according to the current emulation mode HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and Proprinter XL Modes Scalable Fonts Intellifont Compatible Fonts Alaska Extrabold Antique Oakland Oblique Bold Brougham Oblique Bold BoldOblique Cleveland Condensed Connecticut e Guatemala Antique Italic Bold BoldItalic Letter Gothic Oblique Bold Maryland Oklahoma Oblique Bold BoldOblique PC Brussels Light LightItalic Demi Demiltalic e PC Tennessee Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic Utah Oblique Bold BoldOblique Utah Condensed Oblique Bold BoldOblique CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Microsoft Windows 3 1 Windows 95 TrueType Compatible Fonts BR Symbol Helsinki Oblique Bold BoldOblique Tennessee Roman Italic Bold Boldltalic W Dingbats Type 1 Font Compatible Fonts Atlanta Book BookOblique Demi DemiOblique Calgary Mediumltalic e Copenhagen Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic e Portugal Roman Italic Bold BoldItalic
265. ins replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again If still remains replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again If still remains replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again If still remains replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again If still remains replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again If still remains replace the main PCB 9813878 ASSY Alddns HIMOd 3OVLIOA HOIH LINN NOILdO LINN HANNVOS HINNVOS HOLOW B S9138v8 49d E dod 5 3718 GION310S 4 GIONS10S 21 ASSV AlddNS JOVLIOA MO1 1HVd 3NION3 Ado 3NIDNA 8438748 49d NIVW bd 8 HOSN3S 19374 H31V3H god H3SN4 1uvd OACIA v a LINN HASN4 65DIsva 49d QuvO8 LOANNOO OIW AW
266. int HL 1260e 20 seconds or less HL 1660 1660e 16 seconds or less A4 size by face down print delivery from cassette feed Prestart by software command for 10 second first print Print Media Toner in a single component cartridge Life Expectancy 9 000 single sided pages cartridge A4 or letter size paper with about 5 coverage Resident Printer Fonts e HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes 66 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts BR Script Level 2 mode 66 scalable fonts For further information about resident fonts see RESIDENT FONTS in Appendix Appendix 1 USER GUIDE Functions CPU Emulation Interface RAM Font Cartridge Card Slots Control Panel Diagnostics Appendix 2 MB86832 100 MHz SPARC architecture Automatic emulation selection HP LaserJet 5 PCL 6 HL 1660e only LaserJet 4 PCL 5 e BR Script Level 2 e HP GL e EPSON FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL Automatic interface selection among bi directional parallel RS 232C serial Universal Serial Bus HL 1660e only and MIO interface For further information see the section INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS in Appendix HL 1260e 2 Mbyte HL 1660 4 Mbyte expandable to 66 Mbytes with SIMMs HL 1660e 8 Mbyte expandable to 72 Mbytes with SIMMs The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country 2 slots 1 font cartridge slot HP LaserJet Compatible 1 card slot PCMCIA Type
267. ithout Parts Code or Tool No can be accepted lt Example gt 1 2 3 4 Revision No marked on the printed circuit board 48 056 201A N iM M E Design change indication MMA Specification No Mee eee Pattern alteration No ini ed ja Circuit board No 2 Design changed parts If the parts are changed one of the following symbols is indicated the REMARKS column A compatible between old and new B replaceable from old to new D incompatible newly established 3 The original of this list was made based on the information available in November 1997 4 Parts are subject to change in design without prior notice CONTENTS L POWER CORDS amp ARE rin rkant 1 2 PAPER FEEDER POB rU 1 CONIHOL danni snanar 3 4 PCB ATTACHMENTS tani dad 3 5 MAIN 5 B HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 7 7 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ida 7 8 COVEHS PIE 9 CHASSIG 9 10 TRANSFERM tiatia 11 11 PAPER TRAY pue nbus inii be eimi NUENEN 11 12 PAPER FEEDER 13 13 SCANNER 15 TE FIXING UNIT ken 15 15 DOCUMEN TS iita 17 16 PACKING MATERIALS e 19 17 OPTIONAL PARTS SET
268. ixel value 01 00 reserved max pixel value horizontal resolution 200 300 400 600 C8 00 00 00 200 dpi 2C 01 00 00 300 dpi 90 01 0000 400 dpi 58 02 0000 600 dpi 400 and 600 dpi are available when printer operates in 600 dpi vertical resolution 200 300 400 600 C8 00 00 00 200 dpi 2C 01 00 00 300 dpi 90 01 0000 400 dpi 58 02 0000 600 dpi The printer accepts different values for vertical and horizontal resolutions 400 600 dpi are available when printer operates in 600 dpi 02 00 reserved resolution unit inch 00 00 reserved error code APPENDICES TIFF Format Raster Graphic Mode 1024 amp Advanced Photoscale Technologv The printer s PCL mode supports TIFF Version 5 0 file format as a format to transfer raster graphics data Mode set command for TIFF file format is ESC b1024M One transfer graphics data command ESC b W should contain whole TIFF file In mode 1024 transfer graphics data command byte count does not have a limitation of 32 767 byte The printer supports both MM big endian format and II little endian format Print model is not applied to this type of data transfer The printer has some limitations on the TIFF file format 1 Tags position has to be prior to the picture strip data 2 Compression tag Tag ID 259 The printer supports 1 2 3 4 and 32773 1 no compression Bits Sample 1 4 8 2 CCITT G3 MH Bits Sample 1 3 CCITT G3 MR Bits Sample 1 4 CCI
269. k 115V 230V 500 WH or less 80 WH less 20 WH or less 110 to 120 V 60 Hz 220 to 240 V 50 Hz 640 WH 1 010 WH or less The peak figure of power consumption is worked out when the halogen heater lamp is turned ON The peak figure of power consumption is worked out excluding inrush current value Be sure that the peak figure of power consumption is reference value and should be used inside the Brother offices only 22 Noise Printing Stand by 23 Dimensions W x H x D 24 Weight 25 Environmental conditions Operating environment Relative humidity 20 49 dB A or less 40 dB A or less 371 6 x 326 5 x 393 mm 14 6 x12 9 x 15 5 inches Approx 15 kg 32 6 Ibs Temperature 10 32 5 C 80 RH Nocondensation allowed Air pressure Non operating environment Temperature 0 35 C Relative humidity 10 613 1013 hPa 0 2 500 m above sea level 80 RH No condensation allowed Storage conditions Printer Temperature 1 5 Normal total storage time 9 10 0 35 Severe total storage time 1 10 High Low 35 C 60 C 20 C 0 Temperature change within 3 minutes High Low SOT ASC 20 0 25 C Relative humiditv Normal total storage time x 9 10 35 85 Severe total storage time 1 10 High Low 85 95 10 35 RH Air pressure 613 1013 hPa Total storage time 0 5 years EP ED cartridge Temperature Normal 2 45 yea
270. l error because those fonts occupy some RAM space It is recommended to install optional SIMM to use the downloaded fonts on the HDD card 4 39 USER GUIDE 4 40 Delete When you select DELETE and press the SET switch you can enter the following sub setting menus to delete macros and fonts or format the installed flash memory card or HDD card Display Message Save Menu MACRO ID Delete the selected ID macro DATA ID Delete the selected ID data FONT ID Delete the selected ID font FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the HDD card Macro When you press the SET switch at MACRO the cursor moves to the ID number The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the macro to be deleted MACRO ID Select the ID number with the A or W switch and press the SET switch so that the printer deletes the selected macro e Data When you press the SET switch at DATA the cursor moves to the ID number The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the data to be deleted DATA Select the ID number with the A or W switch and press the SET switch so that the printer deletes the selected data e Font When you press the SET switch at FONT ID the cursor moves to the ID number The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the font to be deleted CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL FONT Select the ID
271. l Characters Items lt gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt SP gt lt ESC gt lt FF gt WS PC Words Printer Job Language Commands Syntax COMMENT DEFAULT DINQUIRE Reply ECHO Reply ENTER EOJ INFO Reply INITIALIZE INQUIRE Reply JOB OPMSG RDYMSG RESET SET STMSG Reply Exit Current Emulation Start PJL UEL SPJL USTATUS Reply USTATUSOFF No Operation Function and Syntax Brackets indicate optional parameters Indicates special characters and items DEC HEX Horizontal Tab element of white space 09 09 Line Feed PJL command terminator 10 0A Carriage Return optional parameter 13 0 Space element of white space 32 20 Escape used for UEL SPJL 27 1 Form Feed 12 0C terminator for multiple line reply White Space lt SP gt or HT or combination of SP and HT Printable Characters character code 33 through 126 and 161 through 254 Beginning with PC and combination of PC and WS PJL COMMENT Words CR lt LF gt PJL DEFAULT LPARM emulation variable value lt gt lt LF gt PJL DINQUIRE LPARM emulation variable lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL DINQUIRE LPARM emulation variable CR lt LF gt value CR LF FF PJL ECHO lt Words gt lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL ECHO lt Words gt CR LF FF PJL ENTER LANGUAGE emulation lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL EOJ NAME job name lt
272. l become space E 4 bunk and ROM 0 supports upto 16MB CSROM 3 is a rest of the memory space with 256MB 0100 0000 Font card 64MB 5E00 0000 Font cartridge 2 Memory wait setting 16MB Memory 5E20 0000 set ng 0200 0000 FC control setting Mediation level setting 5E40_0000 Interruption External interruption 5E60 0000 Soft support function 0400 0000 SDRAM mode setting 5E80 0000 DRAM transfer Ghost for CS1 Write to LSB 5EA0_0000 LSB setting HRC GS setting 5EE0_0000 CPU Timer 5F00_0000 CDCC 0800 0000 Easv serial 1 DRAM 5F20 0000 MAX 128MB A 64MB x 8 bunk 16550 5F40 0000 Switching clock 0 00 0000 Default setting 0 00 0000 16MB x 4 5F60 0000 5F80 0000 0 00 0000 5FEO 0000 i 5FFF_FFFF OFDO 0000 256MB Figure 3 2 Memorv map 4 ADDRESS 1 2131415 7 10111 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0820 0000 0850 0000 0860 0000 Figure 3 3 SIMM map 5 block EE FLUE 1 FI ibknnector d A md smi blogk serial I F connector E ri kI ASIC M65243FP ETT ji ption co MES E E CPU VIBES n E E NE i ans 9 Bi l i in rs wie pu l MEL PUMA Ear ER e ii br mar ir i 1 105 gt
273. l set can be set separately as the primary or secondary font The display shows the following setting menus IMARY FONT SELECT FONT Set the primarv font SYMBOL SET Set the svmbol set TABLE PRINT p Print the code table exit Exit 4 49 USER GUIDE 4 50 SECONDARV FONT SELECT FONT Setthe secondarv font SYMBOL SET Set the symbol set TABLE PRINT 5 Print the code table Exit To select the font and symbol set in the HP LaserJet mode follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Press the FONT switch The display shows the following menu PRIMARY FONT 3 Press the A or W switch to select the primary or secondary font setting menu PRIMARY FONT SECONDARY FONT For this session select the primary font setting menu 4 Press the SET switch The display shows the font setting menu You can skip the font setting menu and advance to the symbol set setting menu with the A or V switch For this session go to the next step SELECT FONT p gt Note 6 49 The last lowercase letter or indicates the primarv or secondarv font setting mode If vou select the secondarv font setting mode the GAL displav shows in the following messages CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 5 Press the SET switch When vou enter the SELECT FONT menu vou can select the internal font optional slot f
274. l to assure supply terminal development terminal of the transfer unit and the continuity on the terminal of the high voltage power supply development unit is there continuity between them Yes LD failure 4 Does print quality improve when the scanner Replace the scanner unit or l unit is improved the harness Failure in development Replace the high voltage high voltage circuit power supplv assv l 4 black Beam detection Is the printer hung up with the PRINT message Replace the scanner unit or error remaining on the displav even after a printing the harness when only a is printed EP ED cartridge 2 Does printed image improve when the EP ED Yes Replace the EP ED cartridge cartridge is replaced Charging input Do the pins 1 and 2 of the connector P6 on the Replace the main PCB assy signal error main PCB have the following value respectively or the harness when a sheet of paper is fed from the MP tray P6 1 pin HV1AC Change in voltage from 6V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed P6 2 pin HV1DC Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed Dirt on power Is there any dirt on the cartridge side charging Clean the contact to assure supply terminal terminal of the transfer unit and on the terminal of the continuity the high voltage power supply charging unit is there continuity between them Replace the high voltage power supply PCB assy and
275. le density bit image data Selects and prints quadruple density bit image data Changes bit image density Selects horizontal ratio n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Selects vertical ratio n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Execute saved card data Sequence ESC wn ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC Sn ESC T ESC n ESC an ESC SP n ESC n ESCtn ESCRn ESC amp nma data ESC n ESC 000 ESC mnl n2 data ESC anl n2 data ESC n1 n2 data ESC L nl n2 data ESC nl n2 data ESC Z nl n2 data ESC nm ESC CR nH ESC ESC Decimal 27119n 2752 27 53 27 83 27 84 27 45 27 97 27 32 27 33 27 116 27 82 27 38 a data 2737n 27 58 48 48 48 27 42 mnl 2 data 27 94 anl 2 data 27 75 1 n2 data 27 76 1 n2 data 27 89 n1 n2 data 27 90 n1 n2 data 2763nm 27 13 33 n72 27 13 33 n 86 27 13 33 n 69 Hexadecimal IB77n 1B 34 IB 35 53 54 IB 2Dn IB20n IB21n IB74n 1B 52n 1B 26 00 n m a data 25 30 30 30 1B 2 mnl n2 data IB 5Eanl n2 data 1B 4B nl n2 data 1B 4C nl n2 data 1B 59 n1 n2 data 1B 5A nl n2 data IB3Fnm 1B OD 21 n48 1B 0 21 n56 1B 0 21 n45 XL Mode Command name Null Bell Space Backspace Line Feed Form Feed Carriage Return Set Cancel Auto Line Feed Mode Select Printer De
276. le 20P 5 Remove the fan harness 3P the fuser harness 4P the SCN harness 4P the SCN flat cable 6P the DC motor harness 4P the HV harness 16P and the LV harness 8P DC motor harness 4P SCN harness 4P 2 HV harness 16P Le LV harness 8P 6 St KEE Fan harness Mus MEN If Y Fuser harness 4 Teas TS SCN flat cable 6P Te a Feed flat able 20 ji oh FIN MMH Figure 4 13 6 Remove the main PCB assy A a 5 79 UJ 0 8 Figure 4 14 IV 7 1 9 Control Panel Unit ontrol panel unit Panel arm L Main PCB Figure 4 15 1 Remove the left side the control panel from the arm L bv loosening the screws of the panel arm L 2 Remove the switch flat cable 21P from the main PCB 3 Remove the control panel from the right panel arm pin sliding the control panel to the right Tilt the control panel unit Pinch the lever While pinching the lever rotate downward toward you the control panel unit on the right pin taken as a fulcrum O96 D Remove the control panel unit Figure 4 16 4 Release the panel sheet 8 hooks to remove the panel sheet from the control panel Control panel unit Panel sheet Figure 4 17 IV 8 1 10 Scanner Unit 1 Unplug the LD PCB harness scanner flat cable connector 6P and SCN harness connector 4
277. leaved 2 of 5 Codabar EAN 8 US PostNet EAN 13 e ISBN e UPC A e Code 128 e EAN 128 CCITT G3 G4 Since this printer supports the CCITT G3 G4 format in addition to HP compatible formats it can quickly receive and print data compressed in this format Lock Panel If the panel switch settings have been changed the printer may not work as you expect You can lock your settings to prevent changes from being made See page 4 41 Power Save Mode This printer has a power saving mode As laser printers consume power to keep the fixing assembly at a high temperature this feature can save electricity when the printer is on but not being used The factory setting of the Power Save mode is ON that complies with EPA Energy Star new specification Compared with conventional laser printers this printer consumes less power even when the power saving mode is turned off See page 4 69 Toner Save Mode This printer has an economical toner save mode You can cut your printer running cost substantially by using this mode in addition to the improved life expectancy of the toner cartridge See page 4 69 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Reprint Function You can reprint the last job printed with a touch of a panel switch which allows reprinting without sending the data again from the computer See page 4 61 Flash Memory Card and HDD Card You can store fonts macros logos and other print data in a commercial PCMCIA compatible flash memory card o
278. lian e Finnish Portuguese To change to another language 1 2 Turn off the printer Hold down the FORM FEED switch and turn on the printer The message SELF TEST appears and then the message changes to LANG ENGLISH Press A W switch until vour desired language appears on the displav Press the SET switch to make the selected language message effective An asterisk appears at the end of the displav for a short time and then the printer automaticallv returns to on line state with the selected language message on the displav Using the Panel Switche The printer has a versatile control panel It has two operation modes When vou press the switches thev work in the NORMAL mode as indicated above the switches When vou press the switches with the SHIFT switch held down they work in the SHIFT mode as indicated below the switches Xou can control the basic printer operations and make various printer settings in the NORMAL and SHIFT modes For further information see SWITCHES IN NORMAL MODE and CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER SWITCHES IN SHIFT MODE in Chapter 4 A UP Forward scroll through modes and settings DOWN Reverse scroll through modes and settings CONTINUE Ignores the error and resumes operation SET Sets selected mode and functions FORM FEED Prints out remaining data or reprints the same page FONT Selects font and
279. lowing standard features When you need more information on how to use a particular feature turn to the page indicated at the end of the paragraph High Speed and Quiet Laser Printing This printer uses electrophotography technology by laser beam scanning so that it can print at a speed of 12 pages per minute HL 1260e or16 pages per minute HL 1660 1660e The controller utilizes a high speed 32 bit RISC microprocessor and special hardware chips The quiet printing will not bother you working in your office or at home max 49 dB A printing 40 dB A stand by HL 1260e or 52 dB A printing 45 dB A stand by HL 1660 1660e 600 DPI Resolution This printer uses a print engine with a resolution of 600 dots per inch dpi Compared with a 300 dpi engine the quality of the output is far superior See page 4 28 By utilizing the 300 dpi mode the printer can also print 300 dpi data if necessary In HP emulation you can select a horizontal 1200 dpi mode by special control command See page Appendix 54 High Resolution Control The high resolution control HRC technology provides clear and crisp printouts and improves even the 600 dpi resolution See 4 30 Maintenance Free Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge can print up to 9 000 single sided pages The one piece easy to replace toner cartridge does not require difficult maintenance Just install it See 2 7 Advanced Photoscale Technology This printer can print graphics in 2
280. n 2 dents A 2 Remove the jam remove cover with its center part opened by bending the arm of the boss both on sides B toward the front 3 Remove the changeover guide from the boss by bending the right hook viewed from the rear of the rear cover D then remove the changeover guide Figure 4 7 1 6 Side Cover R 1 Remove the side cover R by releasing the 4 hooks Rear Side cover R Hook at 4 places Note Before releasing the 4 hooks remove the paper tray Front Figure 4 8 IV 5 1 7 DC Fan Motor 97 1 1 Remove the DC fan motor from the DC fan motor holder loosening the two screws 2 Loosen the screws securing the PCB holder and remove the entire DC fan motor holder 3 Remove the fan harness connector from the main PCB assv Screw Fan connector Figure 4 9 1 8 Main PCB Note If replacing the main PCB with a new one follow the step in the attached insertion sheet with the new main PCB to install it 1 Remove the SIMM replace lid 2 screws Ss DC fan motor DC fan holder SIMM replace lid Figure 4 10 2 Remove the MIO box Figure 4 11 IV 6 3 Remove the PCB holder by loosening PCB holder fixing screws 2 centronics connector screws and 2 RS 232C connector screws Screws Figure 4 12 4 Remove the switch flat cable 21P and the feed flat cab
281. n 24 points so that the printer can print it faster than when thev are not saved It is recommended that you save the scalable font you frequently use for faster printing Since the flash memory card or the HDD card is in the upper card slot A of the printer and fonts stored in the card behave in the same way as they would if they were in a dedicated Font Card you can select the saved fonts as SLOTFONT A with the FONT switch or the font selection command from your software For font selection see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 You can check the saved fonts by printing the list of fonts with the TEST switch See TEST Switch in Chapter 4 e Notes When you save the primary or secondary font note the following The font is temporarily stored in the RAM of the printer before it is saved on the card If the font data exceeds the RAM capacity a memory full error occurs You can clear this error with the CONTINUE switch As not all the font data has been stored in RAM you cannot save the font to the card When the font data is saved the printer is reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM If any data remains it is printed out If you have saved the font at 600 dpi resolution and change the printer resolution to 300 dpi the printer cannot print the saved font CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL e Download Font e Notes e The DOWNLOAD FONT menu appears only in the HP LaserJet emulation mode Be sure to pri
282. n Ba bad 1 32 PS Switch Wire Remote Switch 1 33 High Voltage Power Supply 1 34 Low Voltage Power Supply PCBAssy 1 35 Toner Cartridge EP ED Cartridge 1 96 Paper DAY err e edere teat oe EC ior CHAPTER MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 1 PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT 2 CONSUMABLE PARTS STANDARD ENDURANCE TABLE 3 LIST OF STANDARD TOOLS 4 LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND CLEANERS 2 CHAPTER VI TROUBLESHOOTING 1 INTRODUGTION EHE 1A Initial Gheck s et A eese Du 1 2 tie a a 2 TEST PRINTING AND MECHANICAL CHECK 2 17 tet prt do bl lt 3 IMAGE DEFECTS 5 31 Image Defect Examples 2220 3 2 Troubleshooting Image Defects TROUBLESHOOTING OF MALFUNCTIONS 0 TROUBLESHOOTING PAPER TRANSPORT PROBLEMS 51 Paper Jaims scies OE a eee C Eris 5 2 Incomplete Paper Feed nn 6 OPERATION 5 t eto e oue ds bt ea tA At Aida 6 1 Line Inspectio
283. n Mode 6 2 nDEIAMETeSES S etii f T T STATUS MESSAGE APPENDICES Engine Block Diagram nennen Paper Feed Size SW PCB Circuitry Diagram 1 AP ot sd MS AD bI yiii Aie ptu tulerat Get ee Main PCB Circuitry Diagram 6 7 Luana Main PCB Circuitry Diagram 7 7 nennen nennen nns Control Panel PCB Circuitry Diagram 1 1 Lew anna Scanner LD PCB Circuitry Diagram 1 1 LL nanna Main PCB Circuitry Diagram Main PCB Circuitry Diagram Main PCB Circuitry Diagram Main PCB Circuitry Diagram Main PCB Circuitry Diagram gr ico 2925 M ee Em Le CHAPTERI GENERAL 1 FEATURES A B 5 aS This high speed non impact low noise printer is based on electrophotography electronics and laser technology The printer is compact and easy to carry The internally storable front loading paper cassette enables you to save an occupation space for the machine the printer can now be installed in a smaller place The charging roller developing cylinder photosensitive drum and cleaner of the printer are combined into a single assembly called an EP ED cartridge The cartridge can be replaced bv the user when necessarv without a need of service call High printing qualitv is maintained bv
284. nce It is recommended to replace such parts on the occasion of a periodical service which is carried out before or after the specified number of sheets are used whichever more immediate to that time This machine contains no periodical replacement parts 2 CONSUMABLE PARTS STANDARD ENDURANCE TABLE The table below shows the suspected mean life in terms of number of sheets of the consumable parts that is the parts which subject to deterioration or damage should be replaced at least once during the period of warranty of the product only when the parts such a failure Table 5 1 Description Part No Service life Remarks number of print Fixing unit UH2791001 100 000 120V UH2601001 Fixing unit UH2792001 100 000 230V UH2602001 Pick up roller assv MP UH2362001 100 000 Pick up roller assv cassette UH2362001 Separation pad MP UH2393001 100 000 Separation pad cassette UH2393001 Transfer roller assv UH2788001 100 000 UH2323001 Note The above table shows estimated value so these value are subject to change without prior notice 3 LISTOF STANDARD TOOLS The standard tool set required for servicing the printer is as listed below These tools are commerciallv available on the market Table 5 2 Description Remarks Tool box Lead cable Feeler gauge Compression spring scale 0 1kg For checking cassette spring strength Phillips screwdriver M4
285. nd the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 91 263 EEC and 92 31 EEC Manufacture at the following facilities is carried out under a Quality System which is registered by BSI Quality Assurance and JQA Quality Assurance Brother Industries Ltd Kariya Plant 1 5 Kitajizoyama Noda cho Kariya shi Aichi ken 448 Japan BSI Certificate of Registration No FM27391 JQA Certificate of Registration No 0340 Issued by Brother International Europe Ltd European Development and Technical Services Division xiv CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual acts as your guide to the setup and operation of your printer and covers the following topics CHAPTER 1 GENERAL provides an overview of the printer Read this chapter first to get familiar with the printer CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED gives you general information about this printer Be sure to read this chapter before you use the printer CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER gives you important information on the printer setup to work with your computer and software Be sure to read this chapter before you work with the printer CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL details the functions of the panel switches and lamps Disk CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS describes the optional accessories for this printer Disk CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE provides guidance on how to maintain your printer Disk CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING helps you trouble
286. ne Feed Moves down one line LF 10 Form Feed Ejects a page if data has been printed on it FF 12 0C Carriage Return Moves cursor to left margin CR 13 0 Positioning Moves the cursor to the home position ESC lt 27 60 Select Printer Ignored DCI 17 11 Deselect Printer Ignored DC3 19 13 Set MSB 0 Sets most significant bit to zero ESC 27 61 1B 3D Set MSB 1 Sets most significant bit to one ESC gt 27 62 Cancel MSB Settings Cancels MSB settings ESC 4 27 35 23 Printable Allows characters 128 d through 159 d ESC 6 27 54 36 Code Area and 255 d to be printed Cancel Expanded Cancels printing of characters 128 d ESC7 27 55 1 37 Printable Code Area through 159 d and 255 d Expand Printable Allows characters 0 d through 31 d and ESCI1 27 73 49 1B 49 31 Code Area 128 d through 159 d to be printed Cancel Expand Cancels printing of characters 0 d ESC IO 27 73 48 1B 49 30 Printable Code Area through 31 d and 129 d through 159 d Change Emulation Changes the emulation of the printer All ESCCRm 2713m IBODm original data received so far will be printed and the page ejected m is an ASCII code m AB BR Script 2 Batch Mode m AI BR Script 2 Interactive Mode m E Reset Epson Mode m GL HP GL Mode m H HP LaserJet Mode IBM Proprinter Mode User Reset Restore to User Settings ESC CR 27 13 33 1B OD 21 n 0 to 2 nR n 82 n52 Paper Input Control Controls the
287. ner image is transferred from the drum surface to the paper Transfer charging Figure 2 13 A positive charge applied to the back the paper attracts the negatively charged toner particles to the paper The printer accomplishes transfer by using the charging roller method Advantages compared with the corona transfer method are as follows Low transfer voltage that is less than half that for corona transfer Less ozone generation The paper is supported by the transfer charging roller and photosensitive drum so feed is more stable Reference Step 5 If the image on the photosensitive drum is not completely transferred to the paper due to jamming etc thetoner may adheretothetransfer charging roller The printer removes the toner from the transfer charging roller by switching the transfer voltage between positive and negative in sequence During wait initial rotation and lastrotation the printer sets the primary DC voltage to zero and sets the charge on the drum to zero In this case the transfer voltage is made negative to remove the negatively charged toner on the transfer charging roller to the drum The transfer charging roller is thus cleaned Separation Static charge eliminator Transfer charging roller Figure 2 14 The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the drum Curvature separation To stabilize the paper feed and prevent small white circles from appearing in the printed image
288. ng frequently set the adjustment lever according to the table below Recommended Paper Size I Backwards _ letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive and 5 II Forwards ISO B6 COM10 Monarch C5 and DL If CHECK TRAY is shown when the paper cassette is filled with paper check the adjustment lever and adjust to the correct setting Fig 7 1 Adjustment Lever Do not use the following paper Bent paper Moist paper Paper that does not meet specifications 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Paper jam in the paper cassette inside the printer at the rear access cover or at the paper exit Check the jam location and follow the instructions below to remove the jammed paper After vou have followed the instructions the printer automaticallv resumes printing However the DATA lamp mav come on and the following message mav appear on the displav 07 FF PAUSE After a paper jam has occurred data usuallv remains in the printer memorv The message prompts vou to execute a form feed and print out the remaining data Press the SEL switch to continue Paper Jam at Paper Exit 13 JAM REAR If paper has passed behind the rear access cover and a paper jam has occurred at the paper exit remove the jammed paper bv pulling it slowlv from the exit as shown below Fig 7 2 Paper Jam at Paper Exit USER S GUIDE Paper Jam at Rear Access Cover 13 JAM REAR If a paper jam occurs behind the rear
289. ng paper with the paper indicator located on the front right of the paper cassette 2 14 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 1 Open the multi purpose tray by pressing the front door of the tray lightly and lowering it gently gt Note Pull out the extension tray of the multi purpose tray for long paper if it is necessary Fig 2 19 Opening the Multi purpose Tray and Pulling Out the Extension Tray 2 Lift up and slide the paper width guide to the far right side 3 Place a stack of paper or envelopes on the tray until it is securely seated gt Notes When you place paper on the multi purpose tray note the following e The print surface must be face up The leading edge must be placed inside first and lightly against the printer The left side must be aligned with the left guide The top of the paper stack must be under the holders on both sides of the tray The maximum thickness is 16 5 mm or 0 65 inches 2 15 USER S GUIDE Fig 2 20 Placing Paper on the Multi purpose Trav 4 Liftup and slide the paper width guide to match the paper width so that it lightly touches the right side of the paper stack 4b Caution Make sure that the neatly stacked paper is correctly seated on the multi purpose tray otherwise paper may not be fed correctly resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam When printing the inside tray automatically rises to feed paper into the printer
290. nlv toner onesided due to too When the cartridge is returned to the printer little toner remaining does the LCD show 00 READY Prepare to replace the new cartridge High voltage Are the developing bias or the toner sensor Ves Clean the electrode electrode electrode of the high voltage power supplv PCB assy dirty High voltage Is the voltage of P4 13 in high voltage power Replace the high voltage power supply supply PCB connector higher than that of P4 11 power supply PCB assy when the EP ED cartridge which is full with toner is installed HV harness Is the voltage of P6 13 in the main PCB Yes Replace the HV harness connector higher than that of P6 11 Main PCB No Replace the main PCB assy 13 JAM XXXXXX is not displayed even if a paper jam has occured or is displayed even if a paper jam has not occurred XXXXXX is TRAYS INSIDE REAR DUPLEX Actuator 1 Does the actuator of the paper delivery sensor Reassemble or replace the or the registration sensor operate smoothly paper delivery actuator and regist sensor actuator Paper delivery Does the voltage of P2 1 in the fixing PCB Replace the fixing PCB assy sensor connector rise from OV to 5V when the eject or the paper feed size sw PCB Regist sensor sensor is covered or the voltage of P5 5 in assy the paper feeder PCB connector rise from OV to 5V when the registration sensor is covered sensor is covered or the voltage of P3 5 in 2 Fuser harness 3 Does the volta
291. not be selected No selection appears on the display e If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or another emulation mode is selected the permanent fonts cannot be selected No selection appears on the display When you select the optional font or download font press the SET switch to enter the sub menu After you select your desired one with the A or switch press the SET switch again The list you can print out with the TEST switch helps you to select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts See TEST switch in this chapter or Selecting the Optional Fonts in Chapter 5 4 Press the SET switch When you enter the font setting mode the display first shows the current font with an asterisk 4 55 USER GUIDE BROUGHAM 5 Press the or V switch until the desired font appears on the display See List of Fonts on page 4 59 6 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective The steps you follow vary according to the font type scalable or bitmapped If you select a resident bitmapped font Letter Gothic 16 66 or optional bitmapped fonts the display shows the character set setting menu CHARACTER SET Go to step 7 If you select the resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts the display shows the font style setting menu BROUGHAM l The display changes to the font style menu BROUGHAM Reg T Press the or W
292. nt out the list of download fonts with the TEST switch and check the download font ID on the list before you enter this menu You need to select the font in this menu with the same number you see on the list If you have downloaded a font into the printer memory you can save it on the flash memory card or the HDD card The printer prompts you to select the download font ID that you can find from the font list Press the SET switch to move the cursor to the ID and select it with the A or W switch FONT gt Note The download font IDs do not appear when fonts have not been downloaded After you select the download font ID press the SET switch so that the printer saves the selected download font Vector or bitmapped fonts are saved in the format of the original font Once you save the download font in the card you do not need to download the font every time you need it Since the flash memory card or the HDD card is in the upper card slot A of the printer you can select the saved fonts as SLOTFONT A with the FONT switch or the font selection command from your software For font selection see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 You can check the fonts saved on the card by printing the list of fonts with the TEST switch See TEST Switch in Chapter 4 9 Note When the fonts on the HDD card are selected in a print job they are copied into the printer RAM It may tend to cause the printer memory ful
293. nternational Business Machines Corporation Intellifont is a registered trademark of AGFA Corporation a division of Miles Inc Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated other brand and product names mentioned in this user s guide are registered trademarks or trademarks of respective companies Compilation and Publication Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd this manual has been compiled and published covering the latest product descriptions and specifications The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages including consequential caused by reliance on the materials presented including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication 1997 Brother Industries Ltd Shipment of the Printer If for any reason you must ship your Printer carefully package the Printer to avoid any damage during transit It is recommended that you save and use the original packaging The Printer should also be adequately insured with the carrier WARNING When shipping the Printer the TONER CART
294. nu to change the setting as follows Automatic Interface Selection When you use the automatic interface selection function select the function on the display as follows When you select this function with the SET switch the display shows the next sub setting menu as follows TIME OUT 5s You need to set the time out for the auto interface selection from 1 to 99 seconds with the A or W switch factorv setting 5 seconds This time out is the duration during which the printer will not allow another automatic change to the interface USER GUIDE Even if vou choose the automatic interface selection vou need to set the communications parameters for the serial interface high speed bi directional communications for the parallel interface and the optional interface settings if the installed MIO card requires them See the tables below For further information about automatic interface selection see AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION in Chapter 3 Parallel Interface When vou intend to use the bi directional parallel interface select the interface on the displav as follows I F PARALLEL When vou use the parallel interface vou need to set the communications mode in the following sub setting menu Displav Message High Speed and Bi directional Parallel Communications HIGH SPEED ON Turns on or off the high speed parallel communications BI DIR ON Turns on or off the bi
295. nual 2 No Switch When a switch is pressed does the voltage of Ves Replace the Main PCB assv the following signals change from 5V to 0 No Control panel Signal Main PCB Panel PCB SW8 SEL 218 1 14 Replace the control panel unit or the switch flat cable SW7 MODE EMULATION 21 10 P1 12 Switch flat cable SWe FONT ECONOMY 21 12 1 10 SWS FORM FEED FEEDER 1 14 1 8 SWA SET COPY 1 16 P1 6 SW3 CONTINUE SHIFT 21 18 1 4 SW2 DOWN RESET P1 20 P12 SW1 UP TEST 1 21 P14 Malfunction of buzzer Operational 1 Is the Buzzer on mode selected according Set the buzzer mode error to the operation manual To alternate the buzzer on off mode selection press the MODE switch and select the Advanced mode Main PCB Check the buzzer signal with a oscilloscope Replace the main PCB assy Is the pulse of 4KHz output Buzzer Replace the main PCB assy 6 12 COVER OPEN is displayed even if the upper cover is closed Main PCB Upper cover 1 Does the upper cover hook press the actuator No Replace the upper cover assy of the interlock switch on the main PCB Yes correctly when upper cover is closed Replace the main PCB assy VI 12 CHECK TRAY is displayed even if a paper loaded cassette is mounted or even if a paper is set on MP tray XX is MP T1 T2 Mis operation 1 Is the paper feed mode set correctly Set p
296. number with the W switch and press the SET switch so that the printer deletes the selected font e Format Card You can format the flash memory card or the HDD card to delete its contents Instructions are in the following menu FORMAT CARD When you press the SET switch in this menu the printer asks if you want to delete all contents of the card Press the SET switch to start formatting the card When you want to cancel formatting move to the following menu with the A or switch and press the SET switch ADVANCED MODE NETWORK MODE Display Message Network Mode LOCK PANEL OFF Turns on or off lock panel function AUTO FF ON Turns on or off auto form feed FF SUPPRESS OFF Turns on or off the form feed suppress function TONER LOW CONT Select the printer s action when TONER EMPTY is detected Lock panel If someone other than you has changed the panel switch settings and you do not know about it the printer may not print as you expected or it may not print at all 4 41 USER GUIDE To cope with this problem vou can lock or unlock the panel switches with your pass number as follows Display Message Lock Panel LOCK OFF Unlock the panel switches of the printer Factorv setting LOCK ON Lock the panel switches of the printer Even if vou lock the panel switches vou can use the SEL FORM FEED COPY CONTINUE RESET and TEST switches You can only check the settings
297. o do so hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch You will then enter the test mode where you may test the printer or print out the list of fonts To test the printer follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch When you enter the test mode the display shows the first test mode item DEMO PAGI GI 3 Press the A or W switch until the desired test mode appears on the display Display Message DEMO TEST PRINT GI PRINT CONFIG PRINT FONTS PRINT FONTS C PRINT FONTS P exit Test Mode Prints out the demonstration Performs the printer test and prints out the test pattern Prints out the list of panel switch settings you have configured for the printer as user settings Prints out the list of internal or resident fonts Prints out the list of optional fonts stored in the font cartridge card Prints out the list of permanent download fonts Exits from the test mode The printer does not perform the test 4 85 USER GUIDE e Notes The message PRINT FONTS or PRINT FONTS appears only when the optional font cartridge card is installed in the font slot or permanent download fonts are stored in printer memory e If the optional font cartridge card is installed you can print out the list of optional fonts Since the list shows the ID numbers spe
298. oad Font Flash Memory Card original Delete One from Card Delete All from Card Save Current Font into Card Set to Primary Font Set to Secondary Font Font Default Setting Primary Secondary Download Font Header Download Character ESC c 1026 F ESC c 1028 ESC c 1029 ESC X font ID ESC X font ID ESC control ESC control ESC s W byte ESC s W byte Decimal 27 42 99 68 27 42 99 69 27 42 99 48 70 27 42 99 49 70 27 42 99 50 70 27 42 99 51 70 27 42 99 52 70 27 42 99 53 70 27 42 99 54 70 27 42 99 49 48 50 54 70 27 42 99 49 48 50 56 70 27 42 99 49 48 50 57 70 27 40 88 27 41 88 27 40 64 27 41 64 27 41 115 87 27 40 115 87 APPENDICES Hexadecimal 1B 2A 63 44 1B 2A 63 45 1B 2A 63 30 46 1B 2A 63 31 46 1B 2A 63 32 46 1B 2A 63 33 46 1B 2A 63 34 46 1B 2A 63 35 46 1B 2A 63 36 46 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 36 46 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 38 46 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 39 46 1B 28 58 1B 29 58 1B 28 40 1B 29 40 1B 29 73 57 1B 28 73 57 Appendix 43 USER GUIDE Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal USER DEFINED SYMBOL SET Symbol Set ID Set ESC c R 27 42 99 82 1B 2A 63 52 ID Define Symbol Set ESC f W 27 40 102 87 1B 28 66 46 byte Symbol Set Control Delete All ESC 05 27 42 99 48 83 1B 2A 63 30 53 Delete Temporary ESC 15 27 42 99 49 83 1B 2A 63 31 53 Del
299. occur when the printer position reaches the right margin Form feed occurs when the printer position reaches the bottom margin No form feed occurs when the printer position reaches the bottom margin The printer ignores the top and bottom margin settings you make with the control panel The page length is automatically set to 11 for letter or A4 size paper and to 14 for legal size paper The printer operates according to the margin settings you make with the control panel 4 21 USER GUIDE 4 22 gt Noteon AUTO MASK When you use application software in non HP modes be sure to set AUTO MASK to ON When you use letter or A4 size paper the top and bottom 2 lines are masked and they do not appear on the printout The auto modes are subject to the current emulation mode The auto modes can be set X The auto modes cannot be changed and no setting appears The auto modes are not available Printer Emulation Factory settings in bold print AUTO Mode HP EPSON IBM LaserJet FX 850 Proprinter XL AUTO LF O OFF O OFF O OFF AUTO CR O OFF X ON O OFF Note AUTO WRAP O OFF X ON X ON AUTO SKIP O ON AUTO MASK gt Note In the IBM emulation mode codes are alwavs followed bv CR code PAGE FORMAT MODE e Notes The settings in this mode menu varv as follows e settings are effective in the LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes e The X
300. ocedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Radio Interference 220 240 V model only This printer complies with EN55022 CISPR Publication 22 Class B Before this product is used ensure that you use a double shielded interface cable with twisted pair conductors and that it is marked TEEE1284 compliant The cable must not exceed 1 8 metres in length IEC 825 220 240 V model only This printer is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 825 specifications The label shown below is attached in countries where required CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1PRODUKT This printer has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner Unit The Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances Caution Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure The following caution label is attached on the cover of the scanner unit CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASER STRALING NAR KABINETLAGET STAR ABENT UNGDA DIREKTE UDS ETTELSE FOR STRALING KLASSE 3B LASER VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD OCH SPARRAR URKOPPLADE STRALEN AR FARLIG KLASS LASER APPARAT VARO AVATTAESSA JA 00 A
301. ode It will disappear in 20 or 30 seconds displaying READY on LCD It is not a trouble VI 25 7 STATUS MESSAGE LIST Table 6 2 Operator Call Messages Operator Call Message Meaning Action XX TRAV 12 COVER OPEN 13 14 CARTRIDGE CASSETTE 16 PAPER SIZE 18 MANUAL FEED SIZE 19 FONT 20 REMOVAL 27 DX UNIT 27 NO DX TRAY 27 DX OPEN The paper cassette XX is MP T1 T2 is out of paper The upper cover of the printer is open Paper is jammed in the printer is TRAYS INSIDE REAR DUPLEX The toner cartridge is not installed in the printer The paper cassette is not installed XX is T1 T2 The printer has almost run out of toner you may print another 30 to 100 pages The ALARM lamp lights at the same time The wrong size of paper was loaded in the paper cassette XX XX is MP T1 T2 The message appears alternately to show a particular size The printer requests you to load paper manually The message appears alternately to show a particular size An error occurred in the optional font cartridge card The font cartridge card was removed while the printer is on line The duplex unit is not installed with the printer when the duplex printing mode is selected The duplex paper guide tray is not installed in T1 when the du
302. of paper is fed from the MP tray P6 3 pin DBAC Change in voltage from 6V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed from the registration unit P6 4 pin DBDC Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV just when a sheet of paper is fed from the registration unit P6 5 pin DNSTY Change in voltage to 2 5V just when a sheet of paper is fed Dirt on power 11 15 there any dirt on the cartridge side Clean the contacts to assure supply terminal development terminal of the transfer unit and the continuity on the terminal of the high voltage power Failure in the supply development unit is there continuity development between them Replace the high voltage high voltage power supply PCB assy circuit l 2 Dark Densitv setting 1 Does printed image improve when densitv Ves Adjust the proper setting on setting is changed on the control the control panel EP ED cartridge 2 Does printed image improve when the EP ED Replace the EP ED cartridge cartridge is Dirt on the 3 Does printed image improve when continuity Yi Clean the contacts to assure grounding is improved by cleaning the EP ED cartridge the continuity terminal grounding terminal and the printer unit grounding terminal es es Charging input 4 Dothe pins 1 2 and 5 of the connector P6 No Replace the main PCB assy signal error on the main PCB have the following value or the harness respectively when a sheet of paper is fed
303. of the other switches but you cannot change them To change them unlock the panel switches When you lock or unlock the panel switches as above you need to enter a 3 digit pass number PASS NO Change the number with the A or W switch and move to the next digit with the SET switch After you finish entering your 3 digit pass number the panel switches are locked or unlocked 9 Note Do not forget your pass number that you have used to lock the panel switches If you enter a wrong number you cannot unlock them The display shows the following message INCORRECT Auto Form Feed If unprinted data remains in the printer s memory the DATA lamp stays on You need to print out the remaining data with the FORM FEED switch See FORM FEED Switch in Chapter 4 The auto form feed you can set in this mode menu allows you to print out the remaining data without pressing the FORM FEED switch 4 42 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Xou can turn on or off the auto form feed in this mode menu as follows Displav Message Auto Form Feed AUTO FF OFF Turn off the auto form feed Xou need to press the FORM FEED switch everv time data remains in the printer s memorv Factorv setting AUTO FF ON Turn on the auto form feed Everv time data remains in the printer s memorv the auto form feed takes place after the wait time set as below When vou turn on the auto form feed as above vou need to set the wait time in the following s
304. ol Paper Eject Feed From Upper Cassette TRAY 1 Manual Feed Envelope Feed From MP Tray Feed From Lower Cassette TRAY 2 or Option Command ESC amp ESC amp r1F ESC s 1M ESC s X Echo value 32767 to 32767 ESC amp f0S ESC amp 15 ESC Y ESC Z ESC amp p X byte ESC amp 1L ESC amp 0L ESC amp 0 ESC amp 1 ESC amp d D ESC amp 400 ESC amp d3D ESC amp d ESC ESC amp k0G ESC amp k1G ESC amp k2G ESC amp k3G ESC amp 00 ESC amp 10 ESC amp 20 ESC amp 30 ESC amp a P degree ESC amp ESC amp 0H ESC amp 1H ESC amp 2H ESC amp 3H ESC amp 4H ESC amp 5H Decimal 27 38 114 48 70 27 38 114 49 70 27 42 115 49 77 27 42 115 88 27 38 102 48 83 27 38 102 49 83 27 89 27 90 27 38 112 88 27 38 108 49 76 27 38 108 48 76 27 38 115 48 67 27 38 115 49 67 27 38 100 68 27 38 100 48 68 27 38 100 51 68 27 38 100 64 27 61 27 38 107 48 71 27 38 107 49 71 27 38 107 50 71 27 38 107 5171 27 38 108 48 79 27 38 108 49 79 27 38 108 50 79 27 38 108 51 79 27 38 97 80 27 38 108 88 27 38 108 48 72 27 38 108 49 72 27 38 108 50 72 27 38 108 51 72 277 38 108 52 72 277 38 108 53 72 Hexadecimal 1B 26 72 30 46 1B 26 72 31 46 1B 2A 73 31 4D 2A 731 58 1B 26 66 30 53 1B 26 66 31 53 1B 59 1 5 1B 26 70 58 1B 26 6C 314 1B 26 6C 30 4C 1B 26 73 30 43 1B 26 73 31
305. olution is automatically reduced to 300 dpi for printouts f the function setting is changed all download fonts and macros including permanent ones are cleared If the memory is too low to protect pages page protection does not take effect CARD OPERATION gt Notes e BESURE TO TURN OFF THE PRINTER POWER SWITCH BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE FLASH MEMORY CARD OR HDD CARD OR THE CARD WILL BE DAMAGED The settings in this mode menu are effective only when you have installed a flash memory card or a HDD card in the card slot of the printer and you have selected the HP LaserJet HP GL or BR Script 2 mode They do not appear when the printer has no card or is in any other emulation mode 4 32 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL e If you turn the printer off or remove the flash memory card or the HDD card while data is being written onto or deleted from the card all the data on the card may be lost e If the write protect switch of the flash memory card or the HDD card is on this mode menu does not appear Be sure to install a commercial flash memory card or HDD card in the upper card slot of the printer For installation see FONT CARTRIDGE CARD FLASH MEMORY HDD CARD in Chapter 5 When you are in this mode menu you can save macros and fonts in the installed flash memory card or the HDD card The sub setting menus displayed in this mode menu vary according to the state of the installed card When the install
306. onductor OPC the base is aluminum The printing process can be divided into five major stages Photoconductive layer Base Figure 2 6 1 Electrostatic latent image formation stage Step 1 Primary charge Step 2 Scanning exposure 2 Developing stage Step Development 3 2 1 3 Transfer stage Step 4 Transfer Step 5 Separation 4 Fixing stage Step 6 Fixing 5 Drum cleaning stage Step 7 Drum cleaning Electrostatic latent image formation stage 4 Paper path Direction of drum rotation Cassette feed Figure 2 7 Electrostatic latent image formation stage This stage has two steps which together produce a pattern of electrical charges on the photosensitive drum At the end of the stage negative charges remain in the unexposed dark area Charges are absent from the light areas where the laser beam struck exposed the drum surface Since this image of negative charges on the drum is invisible to the eye it is called an electrostatic latent image S 2 o g area G 4 Primary Scanning Transfer B charge exposure step 4 charg step 1 step 2 step Figure 2 8 Step 1 Primary charge Primarv charging roller bias DC bias 77 Photosensitive drum Figure 2 9 As preparation for latent image formation a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surfa
307. ont or permanent download font The displav shows the following message INTERNAL FONT Press the A or W switch until the desired font source appears on the displav Displav Message Font Source INTERNAL FONT Internal font of the printer SLOTFONT A Optional card font in the upper slot A SLOTFONT B Optional cartridge font in the lower slot B PERMANENT FONT Permanent download font defined in the HP emulation mode Since these steps instruct vou to select the standard font select the INTERNAL FONT message e Notes When vou select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts note the following e If the optional font cartridge card is not installed the optional font cannot be selected No selection appears on the display e If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or another emulation mode is selected they cannot be selected No selection appears on the display The list you can print out with the TEST switch helps you to select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts See TEST switch in this chapter or Selecting the Optional Fonts in Chapter 5 6 Press the SET switch When you enter the font setting mode the display first shows the current font with an asterisk BROUGHAM p 7 Press the or W switch until the desired font appears on the display 4 51 USER GUIDE See List of Fonts on page 4 59 8 Press the SET switch
308. oosen the 2 screws of the size sw PCB 1 16 Side Switch Spring 1 Pull out the size switch spring Size switch spring 9 Size SW Figure 4 28 IV 12 1 17 Regist sensor actuator 1 Remove the actuator by shifting it to the left from the chassis hole Figure 4 29 1 18 MP Paper Detection Actuator 1 Remove the actuator bv removing the 2 bearings from the roller holder This operation should be carried out with the PCB removed MP paper detection actuator 1 19 PE Sensor Actuator MP 1 Pull out the actuator bv shifting it to the right from the chassis hole Figure 4 30 PE sensor actuator MP Figure 4 31 IV 13 MP paper detection actuator PE sensor actuator MP 1 20 1 Disengage the DU Duplex detection actuator from the hook and slide it to the outside 2 Loosen the screw and remove the holder bv lifting it from the chassis PE sensor actuator trav PE actuator link DU detection actuator 1 Remove the PE actuator link from the PE sensor actuator tray Remove the PE actuator link from the tray sensor holder 3 Remove the PE sensor actuator tray from the tray sensor holder Remove the DU detection actuator from the tray sensor holder PE actuator link Figure 4 32 1 21 Roller Holder 1 Remove the gear 28 2 Loosen and pull out the 2 screws Roller holder Figure 4 33 14
309. or NV RAM error Error in XXXXX Instruction access error Memory address not aligned VI 29 Turn off the printer Wait 15 minutes then turn it on again See M 14 Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again See M 15 Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again See M 16 Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again See M 11 Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again See M 13 Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again If still remains replace the main PCB Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn iton again If still Service Message Meaning Action 99 SERVICE 4 99 SERVICE 5 99 SERVICE 6 99 SERVICE 8 99 SERVICE 9 Instruction bus error Data bus error Privileged instruction instruction VI 30 rema
310. out the font list The display may look like this 06 PRINT FONTS I When the printer finishes printing it automatically exits from the test mode to the off line state 4 87 USER GUIDE HEX DUMP MODE This printer has a useful hex dump mode for checking the print data sent from computer The printer lists the print data in hexadecimal form To enter the hex dump mode follow these steps 1 Check the power state 2 Operate the switches according to the power state e If the printer has been turned off turn on the printer The printer starts the self test and the display shows the following message 04 SELF TEST If the printer has been turned on reset the printer with the RESET switch 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch The display will show RESET PRINTER 3 Press the SET switch with the RESET PRINTER selected The printer begins its reset and the display shows the following message alternately 08 RESET TO gt JUSER SETTINGS 3 Press the CONTINUE SHIET switch The printer checks the CONTINUE SHIFT switch at the end of self test or printer reset If the switch is held down the printer enters the hex dump mode and goes on line The display will show the message HEX DUMP MODE and the printer will return to the on line state 9 Note If the printer returns to the on line state
311. out the remaining data then the DATA lamp goes off Turn off the printer 2 Insert the font card flash memory card or HDD card into the upper slot A and the font cartridge into the lower slot B with the cartridge card label facing to the left Make sure they fit securely To remove the cartridge card pull them out of the slot with the printer turned off 52 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS The following tvpe of flash memorv card can be installed lt Fujitsu gt 4 Mbyte MB98A81273 8 Mbyte MB98A81373 e 16 Mbyte MB98A81473 32 Mbyte 98 81573 AMD e 1 Mbyte 2 Mbyte AMCOO2CFLKA 4 Mbyte e 10 Mbyte AMCOIOCFLKA 4 Mbyte AMCOOADFLKA 8 Mbyte AMCO08DFLKA e 20 Mbyte AMCO20DFLKA lt SanDisk or SanDisk OEM Products e 2 to 85 Mbyte PCMCIA PC Card ATA The following type of HDD card can be installed Int gral Peripherals Inc e 170 Mbyte VIPER 170E ER Slot AD Slot B Fig 5 2 Installing or Removing the Cartridge or Card USER GUIDE Selecting the Optional Fonts After vou have installed the optional font cartridge card vou can select optional fonts bv anv of the following methods 1 Through vour application software 2 With a font selection command 3 With the FONT switch When vou select fonts through vour application software follow the instructions specific to vour software
312. p 7 E ime 2i o P ud Bearing S 2 Screws 9 S Washer Figure 4 39 IV 16 1 25 Cover 1 Remove the MP trav cover from the paper feed chassis unit bending its hook on both sides MP trav cover MP extension trav Figure 4 40 2 Remove the MP extension tray from the MP tray cover by bending the former MP extension tray m di ae m d MP tray cover Figure 4 41 1 26 MP Tray Assy 1 Remove the MP tray assy from the MP tray cover by bending its bosses A es Y MP tray cover y assy Boss Figure 4 42 IV 17 2 Remove the 2 fixing bushes 3 Remove the MP trav assv um SC ER MP tray assy Figure 4 43 4 Remove the MP tray assy from the MP release plate bending its bosses The MP tray can be easily removed if it is slanted MP tray assy Figure 4 44 1 27 Paper Path Separation Plate Paper Path Separation Film 1 Remove them from the paper feed guide lower by bending them Paper feed guide lower fi yH Bi i duc Paper path separation film Paper path separation plate Figure 4 45 IV 18 1 28 Latch 1 Remove the latch from the paper feed guide upper bv releasing the 2 hooks Paper feed guide u
313. p SCALE INPUT WINDOW INPUT PI AND P2 DEFAULT VALUES INITIALIZE COORDINATE 5 5 OUTPUT 66 PD PU WG EW 55 5 DI DR SI SR SL CS CA LB DT CP UC LT PW SP SM TL XT YT PT SC IP DF RO PG Parameters x center y center sweep angle chord angle x increment y increment sweep angle chord angle x L x x y L x yll Lx yll Lx yll radius chord_angle x_coordinate y_coordinate x_increment y_increment x_coordinate y_coordinate x_increment y_increment radius start_angle sweep_angle chord_angle radius start_angle sweep_angle chord_angle run rise run rise width height width height tangent_of_angle Designate standard character set Designate alternate character set char char 1 bterm bterm spaces lines pen control x increment y increment 1 pen control line type pattern length width pen pen char fill type option 1 option 2 tick p tick n fill line interval 1 x2 y 1 y 2 IxLL yLL x UR y UR IplxplyLp2x p2yll angle copy number Function Command Go to Other Emulations BR Script 2 Batch Mode ESC CR AB BR Script 2 Interactive Mode ESC CR AI HP LaserJet ESC CR H IBM Prop
314. paper 3 11 sleep 4 69 sliding guide 2 14 slot 5 3 software 3 1 spacers 2 6 Index 3 USER S GUIDE stop bit 4 19 switch 3 9 svmbol set 4 60 Appendix 15 T table print 4 54 4 58 technical reference manual l 10 test mode 4 85 test pattern 4 86 TEST switch 4 85 TIFF Format Appendix 53 time out for the auto interface selection 4 17 time out for the automatic emulation change 4 65 time out for the power save mode 4 69 toner cartridge l 4 2 2 2 7 6 1 toner emptv 6 1 toner low 4 44 toner save mode l 8 4 69 top cover 2 3 2 5 top margin 4 23 transfer guide 6 7 transfer roller 6 3 trav 1 3 16 tray 2 3 16 U upper paper cassette 2 3 3 11 user settings 3 10 4 47 wait time 4 43 Windows l 8 X X offset 4 23 4 19 Y Y offset 4 23 Index 4 brother Brother FAX Share OPERATION MANUAL Please read this manual thoroughiv before using the fax function in the printer Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easv reference at all times The product names in this guidebook are trademarks or registered trade marks each manufacturer The specifications are subject to change without notice 1999 Brother Industries Ltd UH1431001 A Printed in Japan TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THE FAX FUNC TION ik visk kk ki 1 serous i ada nae E a 1 2 System Requirements
315. plate from the MIO interface slot 3 Unpack the MIO card and hold it on its edge gt Note Do not touch the card surface If static electricity collects it damages the card 4 Insert the card until it is securely seated 5 Secure the MIO card with the two captive screws on the card 6 Retain the cover plate and two screws removed in 2 in case you want to remove the MIO card later 0 A A MIO Interface Slot v2 MIO Card ue pe 3 Fig 5 4 Installing the MIO Card 56 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS RAM EXPANSION This printer has 2 Mbytes HL 1260e 4 Mbytes HL 1660 8 Mbytes HL 1660e of memory standard and 2 slots for optional expansion memory The memory can be expanded up to 66 Mbytes HL 1260e 1660 72 Mbytes HL 1660e only by installing commercially available single in line memory modules SIMMs The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country Minimum Memory Recommendation Including 2 4 8 Mbytes of internal memory HP LaserJet HP GL EPSON 850 and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes Page Protect Off 300 dpi 600 dpi Letter A4 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes Legal 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes Page Protect On 300 dpi 600 dpi Letter A4 2 Mbytes 6 Mbytes Legal 3 Mbytes 6 Mbytes BR Script 2 mode 300 dpi 600 dpi Letter A4 4Mbytes 6 Mbytes Legal 4Mbytes 6 Mbytes Duplex printing 300 600 dpi HP LaserJet 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes BR Scri
316. play shows the current orientation with for portrait and L for landscape Images offset outside the print area are not printed About Right and Left Margins The settings range of the right and left margins are subject to the page orientation as follows The right margin should be placed 10 columns greater than the left margin minimum text width 10 columns If the orientation is changed the margin settings are restored to the factory settings If the paper size is changed and the right and left margins exceed the paper size they are restored to the factory settings if they do not exceed the paper size they remain effective The following table shows the settings range in columns The factory settings are printed in bold Paper Size Portrait Landscape Left Margin Right Margin Left Margin Right Margin Letter 0 70 10 80 0 96 10 106 A4 0 70 10 78 80 0 103 10 113 Legal 0 70 10 80 0 126 10 136 4 24 In Size Letter 4 Legal CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL W About Line Settings Setting the number of lines page automaticallv sets the line spacing or line feed pitch If the paper size is changed the number of lines page changes accordingly The new setting is calculated with the following expression and the remainder if any is ignored However the line feed pitch and the top and bottom margins remain effective Page Length Top Margin Bottom Margin Line Feed Pitch Vertical Motion Index VMD
317. plex printing mode is selected The cover of the duplex unit is open VI 26 Load a stack of paper into the cassette See M 7 Close the cover See M 6 Remove the jammed paper from the indicated area See M 10 Install a toner cartridge See M 8 Install the paper cassette Remove the toner cartridge rock it several times at 45 and install it again Or replace the toner cartridge with a new one See M 9 Load the requested size of paper in the paper cassette or load it onthe manual feed tray and press the FORM FEED switch Load the requested size of paper on the multi purpose tray and press the SEL switch Turn off the printer and reinstall or replace the optional font cartridge card Turn off the printer install the font cartridge card and turn on the printer The CONTINUE switch will allow you to temporarily ignore this message Install the duplex unit correctly See the DX 1200 user s guide Install the duplex paper guide tray into T1 See the DX 1200 user s guide Close the cover See the DX 1200 user s guide Error Message Table 6 3 Error Messages Meaning Action 31 PRINT OVERRUN 32 BUFFER ERROR 34 MEMORY FULL 40 LINE ERROR 41 PRINT CHECK Print overrun Input buffer overflow Work memory overflow Error in the communications circuit Error in communication with the engine controller VI 27 Press the CONTINUE switc
318. pper Hook Figure 4 46 1 29 Fixing unit for both 120V and 230V the oniv difference is the halogen heater The fixing unit can be disassembled even after removing the rear cover in section 1 6 1 Release the hook of the heater lead wire connector 2P by pinching the connector and pull it out upward to remove it from the low voltage power supply assy 2 Pull out the fixing PCB connector to the rear A 3 Loosen the 2 screws which are securing from the rear and remove the fixing unit by pulling it to the rear Ft Heater lead wire Connector 4 f cen Ow Screw Fixing unit Figure 4 47 IV 19 4 Take off the halogen heater from the heater support spring remove the halogen heater pushing it and pulling the heater support spring at the same time Fixing unit Heater suppart spring UUU U UR Support spring m Heater Push le Halogen heater Halogen heater Figure 4 48 Figure 4 49 5 Loosen 4 screws and remove the thermistor lead wire connector 2P of the fixing PCB see Figure 4 51 and remove the fixing unit cover bv detaching the wire from the hooks of the fixing unit chassis Screws Screws Fixing unit cover Figure 4 50 6 Loos
319. print engine is always powered on to keep its temperature at the specified level When you turn on the power save mode with the SET switch the display shows the next sub setting menu as follows TIME OUT 30m Xou need to set the time out for power save mode from 1 to 99 minutes with the A or V switch factory setting 30 minutes The time out is the duration after which the fixing assembly of the print engine is turned off SLEEP to save power When the power save mode is turned on the printer turns on the fixing assembly again after it receives data from the computer Since the fixing assembly must reach the specified high temperature it takes a little longer time to start printing the first page USER GUIDE FEEDER Switch You can select the feeder manual feed mode or MP tray settings with the FEEDER switch and also select the duplex printing mode if the optional duplex printing unit is installed Displav Message Feeder FEEDER AUTO Select a feeder or auto paper feed MP FIRST OFF Turns MP first on or off MANUAL FEED OFE Turns manual feed on or off MP TRAY SETTING MP tray settings MEDIA TYPE Select print media DUPLEX MODE Selects duplex printing mode only with the duplex option installed You can check the current feeder and the duplex mode on the display When tray 1 has been selected the display may look as follows
320. printer is installed on a solid level surface 3 Theroom temperature is maintained between 10 and 32 5 The relative humidity is maintained between 20 and 80 4 The printer is not exposed to ammonia fumes or other harmful gases 5 The printer is not located in a hot or humid area such as near water or a humidifier in a cold place such as outlet of an air conditioner near open flames or in a dusty place 6 The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight 7 Theroom is well ventilated Printer paper Check if 1 A recommended type of print paper is being used if the paper is too thick or too thin or tends to curl paper jams or paper feed problems may occur or prints may be blurred 2 The print paper is damped If so use fresh paper and check whether the print quality improve or not Consumables Check if 1 The message 16 TONER EMPTY is not shown on the status display when a cartridge is installed in the printer If the message is displayed replace the cartridge with a new one If blank spots occur on prints take out the EP ED cartridge and slowly rock it to distribute the toner evenly Others Check if The transfer guide and feed guide are clean If not clean them with a damp cloth Condensation When the printer is moved from a cold room into a warm room in cold weather condensation may occur inside the printer causing various problems as below 1 Condensation on the optical surface
321. pt 2 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes USER GUIDE The following capacitv of SIMM can be installed e 1 Mbvte HITACHI HB56D25632B 6A 7A 8A MITSUBISHI MH25632BJ 7 8 2 Mbyte HITACHI HB56D51232B 6A 7A 8A MITSUBISHI MH51232BJ 7 8 e 4 Mbyte HITACHI 56 132 7AL 7B 7BL 8AL 8B 8BL MITSUBISHI MH1M32ADJ 7 8 8 Mbyte HITACHI HB56A232BT 7A 7AL 7B 7BL MITSUBISHI MH2M32EJ 7 8 MH2M32DJ 7 8 e 16 Mbyte TOSHIBA 324000 5 60 70 80 e 32 Mbyte TOSHIBA THM328020BSG 60 70 80 In general the SIMM must have the following specifications Type 72 pin and 32 bit or 36 bit output Access Time 80 nsec or less Capacity 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 Mbyte Height 46mm 1 8 inches or less There are 40 bit output SIMMs for workstations Such SIMMs do not fit this printer For SIMMs and installation consult the dealer where you purchased the printer When you install SIMMs follow these steps 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall socket gt Note Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or removing the SIMMs 2 Open the top cover of the printer 3 Push the tab located on the left inside the printer to unlock the left side cover Fig 5 5 Unlocking the Left Side Cover 58 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS 4 Remove the left side cover by sliding it to the rear of the printer Fig 5 6 Removing the Left Side Cover 5 Loosen the screw
322. r HDD card that is installed in the upper card slot of this printer See pages 4 32 and 5 2 Saving User Settings You can operate the printer differently from other users with your own panel switch settings Two sets of user settings can be stored See page 4 47 USER S GUIDE 1 10 Options The following options are available for this printer Lower Trav Unit A lower trav unit expands the paper source capacitv Xou can load extra paper and switch between the upper and lower paper sources automaticallv See page 5 1 Duplex Unit A duplex unit enables vou to print on both sides of the paper See page 5 11 Technical Reference Manual The technical reference manual contains detailed information about the printer control commands For programming with the printer see this manual which is available from vour Brother dealer The following commercial products can be installed into this printer MIO Card A commercial modular input output MIO compatible sharing network card gives you an additional interface port for attaching the printer to a network or sharing your printer with multiple computers See page 5 6 Font Cartridges Commercial font cartridges containing additional scalable fonts or bitmapped fonts See page 5 2 Flash Memory Card and HDD Card A commercial flash memory card or a HDD card can be installed You can store fonts macros logos and other print data in a commercial PCMCIA compatible flash memory
323. r off line the display changes to show the currently selected emulation and informs you that you can make settings in the current emulation If any problems occur the display shows the corresponding operator call error or service call message to prompt you to take an action For more information on these messages see TROUBLESHOOTING in Chapter USER GUIDE Printer Status Messages The following table shows the printer status messages that are displaved during normal operation Printer Status Message Meaning 00 READY 001 The printer is ready to print 00 IDLE 001 T The printer is idle BR Script 2 mode only AUTO LaserJet 5 4 The printer is off line and currently in HP LaserJet mode under AUTO emulation mode selected HP LaserJet 5 4 The printer is off line and in HP LaserJet mode under HP LaserJet emulation mode selected 00 BUSY 001 T The printer is busy BR Script 2 mode only 00 SLEEP 001 The printer is in sleep status power save mode 01 PRINT 001 T The printer is printing 01 PR300 001 The printer is printing bvdecreasing the resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi because of insufficient memorv 01 SX 001 The printer is printing in simplex mode due to insufficient memorv for the selected duplex mode 02 WAIT 001P The printer is warming up 04 SELF TEST The printer i
324. r with optional feeders and duplex unit Card read error Paper of incorrect size is loaded into XX XX is T2 DX Data is ignored because of an error in the Post Script program VI 28 Delete unnecessary macros or fonts or use a new card Set the write protect switch of the card to OFF if it has been set to ON Use a new card If the same error occurs consult your dealer or service personal Install SIMMs correctly referring to the printed error message Install the MIO card correctly Check the interface cable connection between the printer and the fitted option Use a new card If the same error occurs consult your dealer or service personal Set the correct size of paper in T2 or for duplex printing Press the RESET switch Service Message Meaning Table 6 4 Service Call Messages Action 9950 FUSER MALF 51 LASER BD MALF 52 SCANNER MALF 53 DX FAN MALF 54 MOTOR MALF 55 HIGH VOL MALF 61 PROG ERROR 62 FONT ERROR 63 D RAM ERROR 66 NV W ERROR 67 NV R ERROR 68 NV B ERROR 60 SYSTEM ERROR XXXXX 99 SERVICE 2 99 SERVICE 3 Malfunction of fuser Malfunction of laser beam detector Malfunction of laser scanner motor Malfunction of fan motor in the duplex unit Malfunction of main motor Malfunction of high voltage power supply Program ROM checksum error Font ROM checksum error D RAM error NV RAM error NV RAM err
325. rement The printer may not be able to print large files because of the resolution and the printer s memory The higher the resolution and file size the more memory is required CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Displav Message Resolution RESOLUTION 600 Set the resolution to 600 dpi Factory setting RESOLUTION 300 Set the resolution to 300 dpi Select the print resolution in this mode according to the resolution required for your print jobs as shown below Resolution Setting in Resolution Mode Print Jobs 300 dpi 600 dpi 300 dpi For optimum print quality For mixing 300 dpi bitmaps with 600 dpi 600 dpi Not recommended For optimum print quality gt Note Even if you set the resolution to 600 dpi in this mode the printer may not be able to print large files at 600 dpi because of insufficient memory However it automatically decreases the resolution to 300 dpi to print them While the printer is printing the display prompts 01 PR300 If the printer cannot print files even at 300 dpi the MEMORY FULL error occurs See TROUBLESHOOTING in Chapter 7 This automatic resolution decrease function works in the BR Script 2 mode and other emulation modes with the page protection on See also PAGE PROTECTION in this chapter When you want to print without decreasing the resolution you must expand the memory capacity of the printer to 6 Mbytes or more Expand the memory capacity referring to the table below It
326. rinter XL ESC CRI EPSON FX 850 ESC CRE High Resolution Control HRC Set HRC Off ESC CRRO Set HRC to Light Level ESC CRRL Set HRC to Medium Level ESC CR RM Set HRC to Dark Level ESC CRRD User Reset Restore to User Settings ESC CR nR n 0to2 Factorv Reset Restore to Factorv Settings ESC CR F D Decimal 27 13 65 66 27 13 65 73 27 13 72 27 13 73 27 13 69 27 13 82 79 27 13 82 76 27 13 82 77 27 13 82 68 27 13 33 82 27 13 70 68 Duplex Simplex Print available when duplex unit is installed original Set Simplex ESC CR 0D Set Duplex amp long edge binding ESCCR 1D Set Duplex amp short edge binding ESCCR 2D 27 13 33 48 68 27 13 33 49 68 27 13 33 50 68 Page Side Selection available when duplex unit is installed original Set next side ESC 05 Set front side ESC 15 Set back side ESCCR12S Scalable Font Ratio original Set horizontal ratio ESCCRInH n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Set vertical ratio ESCCRInV n 0 25 to 3 step 0 01 Execute Card Data original Execute saved card data ESCCRInE 27 13 33 48 83 27 13 33 49 83 27 13 33 50 83 27 13 33 72 27 13 33 n 86 27 13 33 69 Hexadecimal IBOD4142 1B OD 41 49 1B OD 48 1B OD 49 1 45 1 524 1 524 1B 52 4D 1B OD 52 44 1B 0 21 n 52 1B OD 46 44 1B OD 21 30 44 1B OD 21 31 44 1B OD 21 32 44 1B OD 21 30 53 1B OD 21 31 53 1B OD 21 32 53 1B OD 21 48 1B OD 21 n 56 1B OD 21 45 APP
327. rn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Change LT 1200 to LT 1600 Change DX 1200 to DX 1600 7 5 USER S GUIDE Possible Problems 7 6 This printer has been designed to be trouble free However if any problem should occur note the display message and take the appropriate action This section describes the actions to be taken against paper jams and unsatisfactory printouts Paper Jam If paper jams in the printer it stops printing and displays the following message 13 JAM XXXXXX e Notes If paper jams frequently occur check the adjustment lever located in the bottom of the paper cassette or clean the printer interior and check the paper quality About the Adjustment Lever If paper is misfeeding or doublefeedi
328. roller located in the fixing unit Replace the fixing heat roller roller conductive o No Low voltage When the power is switched on does the Yes Replace the low voltage power supply voltage at connector pin P4 1 on the main power supply PCB assy PCB go from 5V to 0 Main PCB 5 Make sure if No Replace the main PCB assy The EP ED cartridge is installed in the printer correctly The upper cover of the printer is closed A paper loaded cassette is mounted Note When the printer has detected a fixing unit malfunction do not power on for about 15 minutes Even if the power is on the printer will shut off the power supply to the fixing heat roller to prevent the fixing the unit from overheating 51 LASER BD MALF is displayed Main PCB 1 Is the problem remedied when the power off No Replace the main PCB assy Scanner harness and on again the SCN harness 4P SCN flat cable 6P or the scanner unit 52 SCANNER is displayed Main PCB Is the problem remedied when the power off Replace the main PCB assy Scanner harness and on again the SCN harness 4P SON flat Scanner unit cable 6P or the scanner unit VI 17 41 is displaved Does this problem frequentiv Since this is a temporarv problem remove the paper used when the error occurred and continue to print VI 18 5 TROUBLESHOOTING PAPER TRANSPORT PROBLEMS 5 1 Paper Jams The paper path
329. rs alternately to show a particular size Action Check the adjustment lever at the bottom of the upper paper cassette and adjust to the correct setting in case of CHECK TRAY 1 See page 7 6 Load a stack of paper into the cassette Close the cover Remove the jammed paper from the indicated area See page 7 6 Install a toner cartridge Install the paper cassette Remove the toner cartridge rock it several times at 45 and install it again Or replace the toner cartridge with a new one Load the requested size of paper in the paper cassette or load it on the manual feed tray and press the FORM FEED switch USER S GUIDE Operator Call Message 18 MANUAL FEED kkkix SIZE 19 20 27 27 27 FONT FONT REMOVAL NO DX UNIT NO DX TRAY DX OPEN Meaning The printer requests you to load paper manually The message appears alternately to show a particular size An error occurred in the optional font cartridge card The font cartridge card was removed while the printer is on line The duplex unit is not installed with the printer when the duplex printing mode is selected The duplex paper guide tray is not installed in 1 when duplex printing mode is selected The cover of the duplex unit is open Action Load the requested size of paper on the multi purpose tray and press the SEL switch Turn off the printer and re install or replace
330. rs at 95 mm or 38 mm Yes Replace the EP ED cartridge roller failure interval Replace the fixing unit Fixing unit 2 Do stripes appears at 80 mm interval failure 8 Paper failure Is recommended paper used pies Use recommended paper Paper soaked 2 Is paper soaked Y Store the paper in packing paper to keep it from soaking EP ED cartridge 3 Does printed image improve when the EP ED Replace the EP ED cartridge cartridge is replaced No es Yes Transfer roller 4 Is there any dirt on the transfer roller or is it Yes Clean or replace the transfer failure deformed roller assy o No es Failure in the transfer high voltage circuit Transfer input Do the pins 7 and 8 of the connector N Replace the main PCB assv signal error P6 on the main PCB have the following value or the harness respectivelv when a sheet of paper is fed from the MP tray P6 7 pin HVT2 Change in voltage from 15V approx to OV about 1 second after a sheet of paper is fed P6 8 pin HVT3 Change in voltage from 9V approx to OV when the voltage at the pin 7 changes from OV to 15V Dirt on power 6 Clean the transfer roller right end bearing the Clean the contact to assure supply terminal check continuity between the transfer roller the continuity power supply spring and the terminal of the high voltage transfer unit Is there continuity Y Replace the high voltage power supply PCB assy White vertical streaks Toner bi
331. rs in case of error Press the CONTINUE switch to check the 2nd stage cassette TRAV 2 4 Appears when the cassette is set to 4 size TRAV 2 LETTER Appears when the cassette is set to letter size TRAV 2 Appears when no cassette is set CASSETTE ERRORII Appears in case of error Press the CONTINUE switch to check multi purpose trav MP TRAV Set paper on the MP trav TRAY VI 23 10 Press the CONTINUE CART START OKII 11 Flash check CARD START FLASH 12 MIO check MIO CHECK START RAM SIZE 2M Now initializing LJ WAIT 001P T1 CARTRIDGE will be displayed LJ READY 001P T1 13 Turn off the power switch to check the font cartridge The font cartridge is normal The flash memory is normal You can turn off the power when this message is displayed If there is no toner cartridge or paper the message 14 NO Note The checks on and after 10 are carried out automatically and if an error is detected on of the following messages will be displayed Checks can be resumed if the CONTINUE switch is pressed FONTCART ERROR NO FONTCART FLASH ERROR NO FLASH CARD CHECK WP SWIT
332. rs max 0 35 Severe 0 05 vears max High Low 35 C 40 20 C 0 Temperature change within 3 minutes High Low 40 0 gt 15 20 25 C Relative humiditv Normal 2 45 vears max 35 85 Severe 0 05 vears max High Low 85 95 10 35 Air pressure 613 1013 hPa Maximum total storage time 2 5 years including used time 3 SAFETY INFORMATION 3 1 Laser Safety 110 120V Model only This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the US Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within the protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of 3 2 CDRH Regulations 110 120V The center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatorv for products marketed in the United States The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States MANUFACTURED BROTHER INDUSTRIES LTD 15
333. rvicing Parts replacement schedule list of tools lubricants and cleaners Troubleshooting Reference values and adjustment troubleshooting for image defects troubleshooting for malfunctions etc Engine Block Diagram PCB Circuitry Diagrams etc Information in this manual is subject to change due to improvement or re design of the product All relevant information in such cases will be supplied in service information bulletins Technical Information A thorough understanding of this printer based on information in this service manual and service information bulletins is required for maintaining its quality performance and for fostering the practical ability to find the cause of troubles CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL EEATURES i ia SPECIFICATIONS Pret e SAFETY INFORMATION l 6 31 Laser Safety 110 120V Model nanna nanna l 6 3 2 CDRH Regulations 110 120V Model only 7 3 3 Additional Information 7 PRINTER teet orat tva MA sonata e RS F8 44 External VIEWS i F8 4 2 Cross Sectional nanna nanna man snnt en nnns nnne en F9 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EP ED 1 10 5 1 Storage of Sealed EP ED Cartridges ran 1 10
334. s and then slide and remove the metal cover Screw Yellow Fig 5 7 Removing the Metal Cover 6 Unpack a SIMM and hold it on its edge il Caution SIMM boards mav be damaged bv even a small amount of static electricitv Do not touch the memorv chips or the board surface When handling the board and before installing or removing it wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequentiv touch the surface of the antistatic package or bare metal on the printer USER GUIDE 7 Install as manv SIMMs as vou need Seta SIMM into the slot at an angle Push the tip gently towards the vertical until it clicks into place e Notes e When you install less than two SIMMs be sure to install them in the order of slots 2 e When you install different capacities of SIMMs be sure to install the larger capacity SIMMs in the lower socket and smaller capacity SIMMs in order in the upper sockets Be careful not to connect the network interface cable into the modular jack for options located inside the left side cover or it may damage the printer Modular Jack Fig 5 8 Installing the SIMMs 8 Refit the metal plate and secure it with the screws 9 Refit the left side cover to the printer 10 Plug in the power cord and turn on the printer If you have installed the SIMMs incorrectly the printer prints a report to alert you CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS DUPLEX UNIT DX 1200 DX 1600 The duplex unit is an op
335. s performing self diagnosis 05 TEST PRINT The printer is printing the test pattern 06 DEMO PAGE The printer is printing the demonstration 06 PRINT CONFIG The printer is printing the list of the current printer settings 06 PRINT FONTS I The printer is printing the list of the internal or resident fonts 06 PRINT FONTS The printer is printing the list of the optional fonts stored in an installed font cartridge card 06 PRINT FONTS The printer is printing the list of the permanent download fonts 06 CARD PRINT The printer is printing the contents of a flash memory card or HDD card 42 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Printer Status Message Meaning Continued 07 FF PAUSE The printer has suspended feeding forms Pressing the SEL switch resumes form feed 08 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the USER SETTINGS user settings selected with the panel switches The message appears only momentarily 09 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the FACTORY SETTINGS factorv settings The message appears only momentarily Now initializing The printer is initializing the MIO card or initializing the printer for BR Script 2 emulation Paper Source Multi Purpose Tray Manual Feed T T2 Tray 2 Duplex Bi Duplex or Simplex Orientation P Portrait L Landscape Stat
336. s such as the scanning mirror lenses the reflection mirror and the protection glass may cause the print image to be light 2 Ifthe photosensitive drum is cold the electrical resistance of the photosensitive layer gets high making it impossible to obtain a correct contrast in printing 3 Condensation on the pick up guide and feed guide plates may cause paper feed troubles If condensation has occurred wipe the effected units or parts with a dry cloth If an EP ED cartridge is unsealed soon after moved from a cold room to a warm room condensation may occur inside the cartridge which may cause incorrect image Instruct theuser to allow the cartridge to come to room temperature before unsealing it This will take one to two hours VI 1 1 2 Basic Procedure If a malfunction or incorrect print is appeared make an initial check then follow the basic procedure below 1 Check the status display If any message is shown see Section 4 for troubleshooting 2 If an incorrect image is found see Section 3 1 to determine the defect type and Section 3 2 for image troubleshooting 2 TEST PRINTING AND MECHANICAL CHECK 2 1 Test Printing If an image problem occurs follow the procedure below to produce a test print 1 Enter the offline mode 2 Press the SHIFT and TEST switches simultaneously so the printer enters the test print mode 3 Press the or V switch to appear the message TEST PRINT then press the SET switch Th
337. s0b4148T ESC slp v0s3b4148T ESC slp v1ls0b4148T ESC slp v1ls3b4148T ESC slp v4s0b4148T ESC slp v4s3b4148T ESC slp v5s0b4148T ESC slp v5s3b4148T TrueType compatible Fonts point size BR Symbol Helsinki Helsinki Bold Helsinki Oblique Helsinki BoldOblique Tennessee Roman Tennessee Bold Tennessee Italic Tennessee Boldltalic W Dingbats ESC 19MESC slp v0s0b16686T ESC sl p v0s0b16602T ESC sl p v0s3b16602T ESC sl p v1ls0b16602T ESC sl p v1s3b16602T ESC slp v0sOb16901T ESC slp v0s3b16901T ESC slp v1lsOb16901T ESC slp v1ls3b16901T ESC 579LESC s1p v0s0b31402T APPENDICES Appendix 49 USER GUIDE Function Command 1 Font Compatible Fonts point size Atlanta Book ESC s 1 0 06155 Atlanta Demi ESC s 1 0 36155 Atlanta BookOblique ESC s 1 1 06155 Atlanta DemiOblique ESC 3 1 1 36155 Calgary Mediumltalic ESC slp v1lsOb159T Copenhagen Roman ESC slp v0sOb157T Copenhagen Bold ESC slp v0s3b157T Copenhagen Italic ESC 3 1 1 06157 Copenhagen Boldltalic ESC s 1 1 36157 Portugal Roman ESC s 1 0 06158 Portugal Bold ESC s 1 0 36158 Portugal Italic ESC s 1 1 06158 Portugal BoldItalic ESC s 1 1 36158 Bitmapped Fonts LetterGothic16 66 ESC s0p16 67h8 5v0s0b130T OCR A ESC OOESC sOpIOhI2vOsObI04T OCR B ESC 1OESC sOp10h12v0sOb110T Brother Original Fonts Bermuda Script ESC sl p v0s3b134T Germany ESC sl p v
338. sal type you can use any of the sizes of paper in the list The cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper 80 g m or 20 Ibs or up to 40 envelopes Paper should only be loaded up to the arrow head marked on the sliding guide 2 The multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray is the most useful feeder for you to handle many types of paper The multi purpose tray can hold up to 150 sheets of paper 80 g m or 20 lbs or up to 15 envelopes The paper types and sizes that can be fed from the multi purpose tray are as follows Plain paper from 90 mm x 148 mm 3 5 x 5 8 to 216 mm x 356 mm 8 5 14 Weight 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ibs Overhead projector OHP films Colored paper Postcards Label stock Envelopes of COM10 Monarch C5 DL or ISO B5 size 3 The optional lower paper cassette The cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper 80 g m or 20 Ibs It has a limitation on the paper sizes that can be used as shown in the list 4 The duplex unit The duplex unit can handle letter legal A4 Executive and ISO B5 except Tray 2 size papers from the feeders 3 11 USER S GUIDE 3 12 paper source available size available type and capacity the multi purpose tray MP the upper paper cassette T1 the optional lower paper cassette T2 all sources for duplex printing DX cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive A5 ISO B6 and envelope COM 10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO
339. sebisva Sd 49d Hadvd HOLNMTOSHOLOW HOSN3S vl HOSN3S 151999 HOSNAS ad NA L te 3O0VJU31NI 965254 wn 3OVJ3U31NI 3909 eviMsva 49d TANVd v N 9 uaindwoo 39Q1HLHVO yoojg xipueddy 1 66 LM8vH 0009 lt 3 AQ 32154 gt 3Z1Sd O gt 232159 1 071 8 8 6404 46 090555 20 l3H8Avc S3z1121G 10 01 QArc 2 lt lt o Arzt u lt 3 IWS LauAre YOLOW 0333 VSSA val N8100 1 NVNI WLEBLV IS 0904552 0 ABE 632199 27 3ZISd Ag lt 0 lt AS 1 lt 1 Avert OK 819 x H lt 10H 23715 132164 70 lt 105 2 14 93 1 1 webera Anoo IN 34 14 33 KV 14 35 3NI9NA Sd T1 6 148v8 2 Od MS 9218 p394 Jaded 2 7 1 HIOS6Z P6ZASTrA 00018451 360 20 80 810
340. select Printer Deselect Printer Set Epson Emulation Mode Change Emulation original User Reset Paper Input Control Duplex Simplex Print available when duplex unit is installed original Page Side Selection available when duplex unit is installed original Set Form Length Set Right and Left Margins Set Skip over Perforation Function Ignored Ignored Moves the cursor one character to the right Moves the cursor one character to the left Moves the cursor to the next line Prints the data in the buffer and ejects the page if the buffer is emptv this command is ignored Moves the cursor to the left margin on the current line If Auto LF has been set from the front panel or bv software ESC 5 1 the cursor will move down one line Sets n 1 or cancels n 0 auto line feed Overrides the front panel setting Selects printer following deselection ESC Ignored Deselects printer which will not accept data until DC1 is received Selects Epson FX 850 emulation mode data in the buffer is printed and the page ejected Changes the emulation of the printer All data received so far will be printed and the page ejected m is an ASCII code m AB BR Script 2 Batch Mode m AI BR Script 2 Interactive Mode Epson Mode m GL HP GL Mode m H HP LaserJet Mode Reset Proprinter Mode Restore to User Settings n 0 to 2 Controls the paper input 0 Feed From Manual
341. ses the original image data word by word 16 bits The compressed data consists of both horizontal compression which uses 16 bit 8 bit and 4 bit repeating patterns within 1 word or 2 words of data and vertical compression which indicates to repeat the same data as in the previous line with 1 word of data e Non compressed data When the most significant bit in the first 2 bvtes is 0 the printer goes into non compression mode The following 11 bits then indicate the number of words of data and the least significant 4 bits are not used After that the image data follows word bv word 07222 data word count 11 bits L Rot used _ l Appendix 55 USER GUIDE e 16 bit repeating compressed data When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bvtes are in the order 1 0 0 the remaining 13 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bit data The following 2 bvtes should be the 16 bit data to repeat 15 1 E Es 0 59 0 Ed number of repeats 13 bits e 8 bit repeating compressed data When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1 1 0 the following 5 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bits two by 8 bits data The remaining 8 bits should be the 8 bit data to repeat CAM LER gt en YS ae ea a 0 Li 11 10 number ofrepeats ____ 1 data to repeat 8 bits G bits e 4 bit repeating compression data When the most si
342. set X axis offset and bar code height APPENDICES Bar Code Expanded Character Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing Offset in X axis n xnnn or Xnnn This parameter specifies the offset from the left margin in U specified unit or Bar Code amp Expanded Character Offset in Y axis n ynnn Ynnn This parameter specifies the downward offset from the current print 66 0 position in the or U specified unit Bar Code Expanded Character Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing Height n hnnn or Dnnn 1 _ EANI3 EANS UPC A ISBN EANI3 EANS UPC A ISBN UPC E 22 2 UPC E 18 3 Others 12 mm Expanded characters 2 2 mm default Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing 1 dot This parameter specifies the height of bar codes or expanded characters as above It can take the prefix h The height of bar codes is specified in the u or U specified unit Note that the default setting of the bar code height 12 mm 18 mm or 22 mm is subject to the bar code mode selected by t or Expanded Character Width Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing n wnnn or Wnnn Expanded character gt 12mm Line Block Drawing amp Box Drawing 1 dot This parameter specifies the width of expanded characters as above Appendix 71
343. set or not and if toner is empty The TONERI carries the voltage generated at the toner sensor and the TONER2 carries the developing bias output value 13 HV1AC DNSTY HV1DC DBAC DBDC A OO PRIMARV HIGH VOLTAGE Sin Wave Current Generator Buffer Control Unit Feedback Circuit ON OFF Circuit PRIMARY HIGH VOLTAGE Pulse Current Generator Buffer Current Buffer Control Unit Feedback Circuit DNSTY Control Circuit ON OFF Circuit DEVELOPER BIAS AC Pulse Current Generator Buffer Control Unit Feedback Circuit ON OFF Circuit DEVELOPER BIAS DC Current PULSE Buffer Current Buffer Control Unit Feedback Circuit DNSTY Control Circuit ON OFF Circuit ee A Figure 3 10 High Voltage Power Supply Block Diagram 1 14 High Voltage Electrode DBOUT High Voltage Electrode TRANSFER HIGH VOLTAGE High Voltage Electrode Pulse Current P5 Generator Buffer ii Attenuator Current Buffer Constant Current Control Unit Feedback Circuit e ON OFF Circuit Constant Voltage Control Unit HVTFB HVT4 Control Circuit 4 HVT1 TONERI TONER2 Pulse Current ov Ea 24VRET FIVA tS tibl eia
344. shoot the printer in case of problems APPENDICES contain detailed technical information on the printer as well as the character sets and a quick reference guide to the printer control commands Disk INDEX provides an alphabetical list of the contents of this manual and the floppy disk supplied with the printer USER S GUIDE gt Notes When you read this user s guide note the following Chapters 4 5 6 and the Appendices of this User s Guide are on the floppy disk provided with this printer Read ABOUT CHAPTERS ON THE FLOPPY DISK See page 1 3 carefully before you print out the additional chapters included on the floppy disk This user s guide contains instructions or steps to teach you various operations of the printer Remember that the instructions start with the factory settings particularly in Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 If you change the settings particularly the emulation mode the display messages change accordingly The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4 depending upon the final destination of the printer Some display messages appear differently in accordance with this setting CHAPTER 1 GENERAL ABOUT CHAPTERS ON THE FLOPPV DISK The floppy disk provided with this printer contains Chapters 4 5 6 and the Appendices of this User s Guide Follow the steps below to install and print out the sections you need to see 1 Set up your printer referring to CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 2 Start yo
345. should be operated at the specified voltage and frequency e USA and Canada AC 110to 120 V 60 Hz Europe and Australia AC 220 to 240 V 50 Hz Since this printer must be electrically grounded the power cord should be connected to a grounded AC outlet The total length of the power cord including extension cords should not exceed 5 meters 16 4 feet Use of a longer power cord may result in reduced voltage or malfunctions Do not unplug the power cord to turn off the printer The printer should be installed near a power outlet which is easily accessible 2 19 USER S GUIDE Pressing the POWER Switch The POWER switch is on the front right hand side of the printer Pressing the ON side supplies power to the printer which then performs a self test and warm up Pressing the OFF side turns the power off Fig 2 23 Pressing the POWER Switch Always wait at least 2 seconds after turning off the power before turning it back on Do not turn the power off while the printer is printing as this may cause a paper jam and adversely affect the printer The printer performs a self diagnosis at start up to check its hardware and software If the printer should find any problems the display will show the corresponding message See TROUBLESHOOTING in Chapter 7 04 SELF TEST The display shows several messages quickly at start up If the printer detects no errors it
346. shows the minimum size of memory required in the BR Script 2 mode Paper Size 300 dpi 600 dpi Letter or A4 4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes Legal 4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes Duplex printing 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes For memory expansion see RAM EXPANSION in Chapter 5 or consult the dealer where you purchased the printer 4 29 USER GUIDE 4 30 Setting When you select APT SETTING you can use the advanced photoscale technology APT This function offers photographic fine grayscale on graphics APT setting is available only at 600 dpi resolution in BR Script 2 mode and it requires 6 MB of RAM to enjoy APT printouts When you set APT ON the setting of high resolution control HRC is unavailable Display Message Advanced Photoscale Technology APT OFF Cancel the advanced photoscale technology factory setting APT ON Effectuate the advanced photoscale technology HRC Setting When you select HRC SETTING you can set the high resolution control HRC This function is a special function that offers improved print quality of characters and graphics that conventional laser printers cannot attain with resolutions of 300 or 600 dpi You can set this function in this mode Display Message High Resolution Control HRC OFF Cancel the high resolution control HRC LIGHT Set the high resolution control to the light level HRC MEDIUM Set the high resolution control to the medium level Factory setting HRC
347. ssette Power Switch Fig 2 3 Front View Adjustment Knob for Face Up Down Print Deliverv Rear Access Cover Bi directional Parallel Interface Connector 5 RS 232C Serial Interface Connector Universa Serial Modular Jack for Bus connector L MIO Card Slot Options HL 1660e only Power Cord Connector Fig 2 4 Rear View USER S GUIDE Operating and Storage Environment Please take note of the following before using the printer Power Supply Use the printer within the specified power range AC power 10 of the rated power voltage Frequency 50 Hz 220 240 V or 60 Hz 110 120 V The power cord including extensions should not exceed 5 meters 16 5 feet Do not share the same power circuit with other high power appliances particularly an air conditioner copier shredder etc If it is unavoidable that you must use the printer with these appliances we recommend you use a voltage transformer or a high frequency noise filter Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable Environment Use the printer only within the following ranges of temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 10 C to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Ambient humidity 20 to 80 without condensation Do not block the air exit on top of the printer Do not place objects on top of the printer especially on the air exit
348. switch Resets the printer and restores all printer settings including command settings to the factory settings See List of Factory Settings Exits from the reset mode The printer is not reset CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL 4 Press the SET switch to make the displaved selection effective The printer is reset according to the selected reset mode When the RESET mode has been selected the printer is reset showing the message alternatelv as follows 08 RESET TO JUSER SETTINGS When the RESET SETTING 1 2 mode has been selected the printer is reset showing the message alternatelv as follows indicates the selected number of saved settings 08 RESET TO gt SETTING 4 When the FACTORY SETTINGS mode has been selected the printer is reset showing the message alternately as follows 09 RESET TO gt FACTORY SETTINGS Then the printer automatically exits from the reset mode to the on line state List of Factory Settings The following table shows the factory settings initially set before shipment e Notes The settings are subject to the emulation mode Effective modes are indicated in parentheses in the following table The following settings cannot be restored to the factory settings with the RESET switch in the FACTORY SETTINGS mode INTERFACE MODE HRC SETTING PAGE PROTECTION SCALABLE FONT LOCK PANEL and PAGE COUNTER and local language
349. t 68H gaz NITION 680 5112 88B VB 3 2242 6BB VB asna zT 88B 98 N34 TFT 680 vB 1915 ST 80 50 N113 4 10 20 ENHONSI JENHOMSO JENHOMSI VIB 20 1410359 8 127 TNWOYSS 810 20 eT 9440559 39 55 JNSVIS Ber 985 1 5 NIMU Yy 95 ENSVI 2 INSVI 0 5 2 920 20 UMHSVI4 JOS ILNSVU 9 5 ISNsval ENS VH ensva lansva SNSVU TNSVH ENSVU TIVH jar vu avi sav L vu gov Sov TOVH gov lt 0 peA YA IT 01 908 NHMOI INSMOT 2060 10 NNASNA pe zT INNASNG WEB 10 a108 gee Yay 502 81458 90 10 gee Yay 55 NOXEH lt 958 18 gt NACV3Y eaves 380 10 WI 090 10 NHOVHE ISB 18 338 Naa 31 9 8I0 50 10 COS 952 0 Nagsn szs naasn Mae 9582 50 2 dgasn W8B VD W8D 90 80 70 8 15 _ 5 NI73S NLINI ASPIBH spp Ase 820 420 930 s30 vad 524 220 124 1220 CNASHINI ggT NONHISLS 1080 90 9ng3m INA3HINI NINIOIH 3z5 NINIOIM NINIGNV2 NINIGNV2 310 90 368 22 380 92 AS N981X3 NSWX3
350. t Intercharacter Space Select Print Mode Select Epson IBM character set Select International Character Set Define Download Characters Select Download Character Mode Copy ROM Characters to Download RAM Select Bit Image Mode Set 9 dot Bit Image Mode Set Single Density Bit Image Mode Set Double Density Bit Image Mode Set Double Speed Double Density Bit Image Mode Set Quadruple Density Bit Image Mode Reassign Graphics Mode Set Scalable Font Ratio original Execute Card Data original Appendix 62 Function Sets n 1 or cancels n 0 double high mode Selects italic printing Cancels italic printing Sets either superscript n 0 or subscript n 1 printing Cancels effect superscript or subscript printing Sets n 1 or cancels n 0 underlined printing including spaces n 0 Left justify n 1 Centering n 2 Right justify n 3 Fully justify Adds n 120 space to each character Allows combinations of attributes to be added to following text Selects either Epson n 0 or IBM n 1 character set Selects character set Defines downloaded characters Selects either downloaded n 1 or internal n 0 character set Copies internal character data to download RAM area Selects and prints bit image data Selects and prints 9 dot bit image data Selects and prints single density bit image data Selects and prints double density bit image data Selects and prints double speed doub
351. t sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 MP and the upper paper Executive A5 ISO B6 and cassette T1 envelope COM 10 Monarch C5 DL and ISO B5 all sources for duplex cut sheet letter legal A4 ISO B5 except printing DX T2 and Executive USER GUIDE FONT CARTRIDGE CARD FLASH MEMORV HDD CARD Installing a Font Cartridge Card Flash Memorv Card and HDD Card This printer has one slot for an optional font cartridge and one slot for an optional font card flash memorv card or HDD card If vou install the optional font cartridge card vou can use the fonts stored in them as well as resident fonts For optional font cartridges cards consult the dealer where vou purchased the printer If vou install the optional flash memorv card or HDD card vou can save macros and fonts on it For flash memorv card and HDD card operation and information see CARD OPERATION in Chapter 4 e Notes e Do not install or remove cards with the printer power on or you may lose all data from the card or may seriously damage the card if you do this For more information about the cards consult the dealer where you purchased the printer Follow these steps to install or remove a cartridge card 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off If the printer is turned on be sure to press the SEL switch to set the printer off line If data remains in the printer memory the DATA lamp stays on Press the FORM FEED switch to print
352. t the list of optional cartridge card fonts PRINT FONTS C To print out the list of permanent download fonts PRINT FONTS P To exit from the test mode exit gt Notes The messages PRINT FONTS or PRINT FONTS P appear only when an optional font cartridge card is installed in the font slot or the permanent download fonts are stored in printer memory respectively f the optional font cartridge card is installed you can print out a list of optional fonts Since the list shows the ID numbers specific to each optional font it helps you to select them with the FONT switch For further information see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 and FONT CARTRIDGE CARD FLASH MEMORY HDD CARD in Chapter 2 If user defined characters alreadv downloaded into the printer memorv as permanent download fonts vou can print out a list of them For further information see FONT Switch in Chapter 4 2 22 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 6 Press the SET switch The printer starts printing the selected test pattern or list When the printer finishes printing it automatically exits to the off line state PRINT CONFIGURAITION 1 2 TEST PRINT TEST PRINT PRINT CONFIG PORTRAIT LIST INTERNAL FONT ABCDefgh123 amp lt gt 012 ABCDefgh123 amp Oc 01 l
353. ted on the inside Envelopes that cannot be arranged uniformly when placed in a pile e Notes e An area 15 mm 0 6 from the edges of the envelope will not be printed e Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed Otherwise your printer will be damaged When feeding film the use of a recommended type for laser printers will ensure optimum printing For detailed information on the specification or purchase please contact your nearest authorized sales representative or the place of purchase PAPER The printer is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper However some paper variables may have an effect on print quality or handling reliability Always test samples of paper before buying to ensure that it provides desirable performance Some important guidelines when selecting paper are 1 Supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes will be used in a laser printer 2 Preprinted papers must use inks that can withstand the temperature of the printers fusing process 200 degrees centigrade 3 If selecting a cotton bond paper paper having a rough surface such as cockle or laid finished paper or paper that is wrinkled or puckered may exhibit degraded performance Appendix 5 USER GUIDE Appendix 6 e Note The manufacturer neither warrants or recommends the use of any particular paper The operator is responsible for the quality of paper used with the print
354. ter Fig 2 14 Removing the Paper Cassette CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 2 Switch the adjustment lever on the back of the paper cassette according to the paper size shown below I Backwards letter legal A4 ISO B5 Executive and 5 II Forwards ISO 10 Monarch C5 and DL Fig 2 15 Switching the Adjustment lever by Paper Size 3 Seta side paper stop at right front corner inside the paper cassette by the paper size to be used so that 2 projectors of the side paper stop are inserted into the guide holes on the base of the paper cassette Legal A4 Executive ISO B5 A5 Side Paper Stop Fig 2 16 Setting the Side Paper Stop 2 138 USER S GUIDE 4 Slightiv lift the edge of the sliding guides and move them separatelv so as to match the size of paper to be used Match the paper length first and then the paper width when setting for larger size paper Match the paper width first and then the paper length when setting for smaller size paper Fig 2 17 Adjusting the Paper Cassette Sizes 5 Load paper into the paper cassette as shown below gt Note Do not load more than 500 sheets of paper 80 g m or 20 Ibs in the cassette or paper jams may occur Paper 80 g m or 20 Ibs should be loaded up to the arrow head marked on the sliding guide Fig 2 18 Loading Paper into the Cassette 6 Install the paper cassette into the printer gt Note You can check the remaini
355. ter exits from the setting mode to the off line state When you select AUTO the tray selection menu for the auto paper feed appears on the display Go to the next step 5 Change the tray combination and priority with the A or W switch For example AUTO T1 gt MP When gt is set both tray 1 and the multi purpose tray are selected but trav 1 will be selected first if the paper size in trav 1 and the page size for the printing job match each other 6 Press the SET switch MP FIRST The displav shows the current setting for the MP FIRST mode for the multi purpose trav with an asterisk MP FIRST OFF k 1 Press the A or W switch to select on or off for the MP FIRST mode in the multi purpose tray 9 Notes e When you want to print the first page on paper such as letterhead in the multi purpose tray and the following pages on paper such as plain paper in another tray place a sheet for the first page on the multi purpose tray and select MP FIRST ON in this menu Then the printer first selects the multi purpose tray regardless of the FEEDER setting and then automatically switches to the feeder selected in the FEEDER menu after the multi purpose tray becomes empty You can use the MP tray as a convenient temporary feeder by setting MP FIRST ON When MP FIRST ON is set if you place paper on MP tray this paper will be printed and if you do not place paper on MP tray
356. the emulation mode in any of the following combinations EPSON IBM Priority EPSON IBM Auto Selection Mode LaserJet HP LaserJet BR Script 2 BR Script 2 HP GL HP GL EPSON FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL Press the SET switch The next sub item KEEP PCL appears on the display I K EP PCL OFF This function is for permanent macros and fonts downloaded in the HP LaserJet mode Turn on or off the function with the A or W switch When you do not need to use the permanent macros and fonts in the HP LaserJet mode turn this function off When you use them you can turn it on CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL If the function is turned on the downloaded macros and fonts are kept in the printer s memory until the printer is turned off so that they are not cleared by switching the emulation to the BR Script 2 mode 9 Note The PCL function reserves free space in the printer s memory and may cause a memory full error If a memory full error occurs expand the memory capacity or turn off this function 10 Press the SET switch The exit message appears on the display 11 Press the SET switch again The printer exits from the setting mode to the off line state 9 Note When you use the automatic emulation selection try it with your application software or network server If the function does not work properly select a particular emulation mode manually You can use the
357. the larger the capacity of the input buffer The squares indicate the level of the capacity but not the size in Mbytes ad The capacity can be set 15 levels a Factory setting LICICICICI After you change the input buffer capacity make sure you press SET switch be sure to turn off the printer and then turn it on again The setting takes effect the next time you turn on the printer e Notes The set capacity is not changed even if the emulation mode is changed The actual capacity of the input buffer varies according to the installed RAM If the RAM capacity is small the input buffer capacity may not be increased When you select duplex printing it requires more memory to run duplex printing If you set a large input buffer and the remaining memory is not enough to run duplex printing the print speed may decrease in duplex printing the 600dpi resolution may decrease to 300dpi or the printer may automatically change duplex printing to simplex printing In such a case you need to install optional SIMM memory or set a smaller input buffer size in this mode CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL INPUT 14M BUFFER 15 SQUARES SIZE 5 SQUARES 4M 100K 51 1 SQUARE 30K 30K 7M 14M 26M RAM SIZE Fig 4 7 Input buffer size SAVE SETTINGS Suppose vou share this printer with others who want different panel switch settings or you use the printer with different settings
358. the mode menu to the on line ready state The settings you have changed with the SET switch are effective after a quick exit CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL FONT Switch PR Pressing the FONT switch allows you to select fonts and symbol character sets e Notes When you use the FONT switch note the following e The FONT switch is effective in the HP LaserJet EPSON FX 850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes However the settings are subject to the current emulation mode Note that the FONT switch does not work in the BR Script 2 mode If the application software supports font and symbol character set selection you do not need to set them with the FONT switch The software or command setting overrides the switch setting If you want to use optional fonts other than the printer s resident fonts be sure to install a font cartridge card that has your desired fonts The printer automatically selects the font that has exactly the same or similar characteristics as those you set through the software or with a command If the installed font cartridge card happens to have a font of similar characteristics the printer will print with an unexpected font You can store the fonts you require on a flash memory card or HDD card only in the HP LaserJet mode or BR Script 2 mode when one is installed See CARD OPERATION Setting the Font and Symbol Set in the HP LaserJet Mode When the HP LaserJet emulation mode has been selected the font and symbo
359. the optional font cartridge card Turn off the printer install the font cartridge card and turn on the printer The CONTINUE switch will allow you to temporarily ignore this message Install the duplex unit correctly See the DX 1200 DX 1600 user s guide Install the duplex paper guide tray into 1 See the DX 1200 DX 1600 user s guide Close the cover See the DX 1200 DX 1600 user s guide Error Messages Error Message 31 PRI 32 BUFFER ERROR 34 MEMORV FULL 40 LINE ERROR 41 PRI INT CHECK Meaning INT OVERRUN Print overrun Input buffer overflow Work memorv overflow Error in the communications circuit Error in communication with the engine controller CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Action Press the CONTINUE switch to start printing the next page Data which overran the print area on the page cannot be printed Check vour page protection setting with the MODE switch Setting page protection to the correct size could solve this problem If printing at 600 dpi vou mav need to add optional SIMM memorv See page 5 7 Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing Data lost in overflow cannot be printed See page 4 46 Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing If the same error should occur after vou press the CONTINUE switch turn off the printer Wait a few seconds then turn it on again Reduce the input buffer size See page 4 46 Turn off
360. ti purpose tray or the paper cassette note the following e If you use the multi purpose tray the paper size has to be manually set in the MP TRAY SETTING mode with the FEEDER switch If your application software supports paper size selection on the print menu you can select it through the software If your application software does not support it you can set the paper size with the MODE switch The paper size has been factory set to letter for 110 120V models or A4 for 220 240V models If you want to use other sizes of paper or envelopes change the paper size in the PAGE FORMAT MODE of the FORMAT MODE with the MODE switch For paper size selection see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 If you use pre printed paper in the cassettes please note that the paper should be loaded with the printed side face down and the top of the paper to the front of the cassette If you use pre printed paper in the multi purpose tray the paper should be loaded with the printed side face up and the top of the paper towards the printer You can set the paper size for the paper cassette with the MODE switch in the PAGE FORMAT mode The printer automatically detects the paper size you set in the paper cassette If you load a different size of paper in the paper cassette from the size selected with the MODE switch or through your application software the printer prompts you to set the proper size of paper as follows LOAD PAPER lt gt jxkxk SIZE
361. tion Fig 3 4 Envelopes gt Note If envelopes get smudged during printing set the print density to a higher value in the ADVANCED MODE with MODE switch for darker printouts To adjust the print density setting see Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page in Chapter 2 Envelope joints that are sealed by the manufacturer should be secure sides should be properly folded without any wrinkles or creases 3 14 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER Cassette Feed The printer can feed paper from the multi purpose tray the upper or the optional lower paper cassette You can select the multi purpose tray as a paper cassette with the FEEDER switch Since the auto paper feed mode has been factory set the printer usually feeds paper from the upper paper cassette When the optional lower paper cassette is installed and the upper paper cassette runs out of paper the printer automatically switches to the lower paper cassette When the lower paper cassette runs out of paper or it is not installed the printer automatically switches to the multi purpose tray T1 gt T2 gt MP and feeds from there as long as they contain paper of the same size When necessary select the feeder with the FEEDER switch For further information see FEEDER Switch in Chapter 4 For information about the lower paper cassette see LOWER TRAY UNIT in Chapter 5 gt Notes When you load paper into the mul
362. tion sensor signal EJECT Figure 2 18 Il 12 Main PCB 4 2 Cassette Feed When the fixing rollers reach the specified temperature while a cassette with paper is in the printer the READY lamp changes from flashing to lighting When the engine controller circuit receives PRNT or PRFD signal from the video controller circuit the paper feed motor starts rotation About 0 2 seconds later the printer actuates the tray1 pick up roller solenoid and the pick up roller makes one rotation This feeds paper to the photosensitive drum Timing chart for the pick up one sheet Main motor Paper empty sensor Paper feed motor Registration sensor Paper ejection sensor Pick up roller solenoid PRNT or PRFD STBY PRINT 1 73 sec gt 3 18 sec 2 17 sec Figure 2 19 Il 13 STBY 4 3 Feed The timing the MP tray feed is identical to the timing of the cassette paper feed except for the following points 1 The paper empty sensors are different Cassette feed Tray1 paper empty sensor MP tray feed MP tray paper empty sensor 2 The pick up roller solenoids are different Cassette feed Travi pick up roller solenoid MP tray feed MP tray pick up roller solenoid PRNT or PRFD STBY PRINT STBY Paper empty sensor Paper feed motor 1 Registration 0 84 sec sensor l Paper ejection pem 1 1 Pick up roller 0 15 sec i 0 15 sec P rt
363. tional device that allows printing on both sides of pages When it is installed vou can select either duplex printing or simplex printing from the control panel or bv software command For more information about the control panel see FEEDER switch in Chapter 4 Be sure to install the following capacitv of RAM to enjov duplex printing or the printer cannot manage all the data for duplex printing at 600 dpi resolution and automaticallv switches to simplex printing or decrease the resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi Duplex printing 300 dpi 600 dpi HP LaserJet 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes BR Script 2 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes e Notes The Duplex unit can handle cut sheet paper of the sizes shown below Weight 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ibs When the duplex unit is installed the capacity of the upper paper cassette decreases as shown below When the duplex unit is installed legal size paper can not be loaded into the upper paper cassette with the standard paper guide Be sure to replace it with the duplex paper guide for the both simplex and duplex printing When the printer automatically changes the setting to the 300 dpi resolution the display temporarily shows 02 PR300 during printing When the printer automatically changes the setting to the simplex printing the display temporarily shows 02 SX during printing USER GUIDE When the duplex unit is installed paper handling and capacitv of the upper paper cassette changes
364. to the printer off line state 9 Note The duplex printing unit can handle letter A4 legal executive and B5 sizes of paper It can not handle shorter sizes of paper than B5 250mm 9 8 inches long CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL COPV Switch You can set the number of copies to print of the same page with the COPY switch The computer will release from a printing job in a shorter time if you use this feature than when you set the copy print quantity with your application software Check the current setting on the display When the number of copies has been set at 1 the display may look as follows 00 READY 001 1 When the number of copies has been set at 3 the display may look as follows 00 READY 003 1 gt Note If you send too many pages to be stored in the printer memory part or all of the set pages or copies may not be printed To set the number of copies follow these steps 1 Press the SEL switch to set the printer off line 2 Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the COPY switch When you enter the setting mode the display first shows the current setting with the asterisk COPY PAGES 1 3 Press the A or W switch until the desired number appears on the display Display Message of Copies to Print Same Pages COPY PAGES 1 1 page COPY PAGES 2 2 pages COPY PAGES 999 999 pages max 4 Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective An asterisk appears at
365. ts the Low level the primary high voltage DC is applied to the primary charging roller The primary high voltage DC changes with developer bias DC according to values of the input signal DNSTY which is for print density adjustment Developer bias When input signal DBAC gets the Low level the developer bias AC is applied to the developer cylinder And when input signal DBDC gets the Low level the developer bias DC is applied to the developer cylinder The developer bias DC changes according to values of the input signal DNSTY which is for print density adjustment like the primary high voltage DC Transfer charging Transfer bias is controlled by the input signals HVT1 4 and HVTFB When the input signal HVTI gets the Low level negative high voltage is applied to the transfer roller When the input signal HVT2 gets the Low level positive high voltage is applied to the transfer roller When the input signal HVT3 gets the Low level positive high voltage about 1100 times that of the input signal HVT4 is applied to the transfer roller The input signal HVTFB has voltage about 1 1100 times the positive voltage generated on the transfer roller Once the engine CPU is informed of this voltage the bias applied to the transfer roller can be known Note The HVT2 signal generates high voltage irrespective of the HVT4 signal Toner sensing Voltage levels of the input signals TONER1 and 2 allow the engine CPU to check if the cartridge is
366. ttings available on this printer 1 User Settings 2 Factory Settings Remember that the user settings override the factory settings The user settings are effective until other settings are made or they are restored to the factory settings User Settings Although the printer settings have been factory set you can change them with the control panel switches Since this printer has a memory you can store the panel switch settings in the memory as User Settings They are recalled every time you turn on the printer In addition to the current settings you can save two more sets of user settings with the MODE switch and restore to them with the RESET switch The current settings are cleared after restoring one of the saved user settings Factory Settings The printer settings have been set at the factory before shipment They are called Factory Settings Although you can operate the printer with these factory settings unchanged you can tailor the printer by making user settings gt Note Changing the user settings does not affect factory settings You cannot modify the preset factory settings The changed user settings can be restored to the factory default settings with the RESET switch For further information see RESET Switch in Chapter 4 3 10 CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER PAPER HANDLING Print Media Paper Size 1 The upper paper cassette Since the paper cassette is a univer
367. ub setting menu Displav Message Wait Time WAIT is Set the wait time for the auto form feed The printer automaticallv prints out the remaining data after the set wait time WAIT TIME 99s The wait time can be set from 1 to 99 seconds Form Feed Suppress You can turn on or off the form feed suppress function in this mode menu as follows Display Message Form Feed Suppress FF SUPPRESS OFF Turn off the form feed suppress function Factory setting FF SUPPRESS ON Turn on the form feed suppress function If pages contain no print data the printer would normally print blank pages When you turn this function on you can suppress printing blank pages When the printer is used in the network environment it may print a blank page at the end of each print job When you turn on this function the printer does not print blank pages 4 43 USER GUIDE 4 44 Toner Low Xou can select the printer s action when TONER is detected Displav Message TONER LOW CONT TONER LOW STOP ERROR PRINT gt Note Network Mode Continue printing if the TONER occurs Factorv setting Stop printing if the TONER EMPTY error occurs The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the BR Script 2 mode It does not appear in any other emulation modes You can turn on or off the error print mode in this mode Display Message
368. uch the sponge rubber roller when replacing the transfer roller the roller with hand grease or clasped too strongly may result in poor printing quality Transfer roller assy Figure 4 57 IV 22 1 31 DC Gear Holder Assv 1 2 3 Remove the DC motor connector then remove the paper delivery holder spring Loosen the 4 screws and remove the DC gear unit from the body Remove the paper delivery gear assy the gears the gear 48 spring and the washer 4 Loosen the 3 screws and remove the DC motor assy from the gear holder p R d Paper deliverv holder spring Paper deliverv gear assv Gear 48 Gear 48 spring GO _ Washer NX Gear 20 50 BA Figure 4 58 Connector Figure 4 59 1 32 PS Switch Wire Remote Switch 1 Pull out the PS switch wire from the remote switch and the switch attachment Lift slightly the wires when pulling them out This is in order to release the chassis caught at 2 places 2 Remove the remote switch from the chassis Switch attachment Remote switch M I E Chassis Figure 4 60 Figure 4 61 Remote SM 23 1 33 High Voltage Power Supplv PCB 1 Loosen the 2 screws 2 Hold the head of 4 resin spacers and lift this side of A 3 Slide the PCB to the opposite side B Resin spacers power supplv 2 The be detached wit
369. ult the dealer where you purchased the printer Before you begin the following steps refer to Installing the Toner Cartridge in Chapter 2 Be sure to review the instructive diagrams To replace the toner cartridge follow these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the top cover of the printer 3 Lift the top of the toner cartridge slightly and pull it out of the printer CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE 4 Clean the anti static teeth with a clean brush gt Note Never touch or clean the transfer roller or print qualitv mav deteriorate Clean Brush Anti Static Teeth 2 Transfer Roller Fig 6 1 Cleaning the Anti Static Teeth 5 Clean the transfer guide referring to Cleaning the Printer Interior in this chapter 6 Open the bag to unpack a new toner cartridge Handle the toner cartridge with care 7 Hold the toner cartridge with both hands Rock it gently several times at a 45 angle This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge Fig 6 2 Rocking the Toner Cartridge 63 USER GUIDE 8 Bend the tab up and down several times until it is detached from the toner cartridge 9 Hold the tab firmly and pull it until the sealing tape comes out all the way 10 Insert the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrows engraved on the cartridge into the side guides until it stops securely in the c
370. ur computer and MS DOS or Windows 95 Windows 3 1 3 Insert the printer User s Guide floppy disk into the floppy disk drive A of your computer It is assumed that A is your floppy disk drive in this description 4 Install the Disk Manual into your computer for DOS user Type A INSTALL and press ENTER key Follow the messages on the screen for Windows 95 user Click Start and choose Run Type A SETUP and press the ENTER key for Windows 3 1 user Choose the RUN command from the FILE menu in the Program Manager Type A SETUP and press the ENTER key Once you installed the Disk Manual into your computer follow the steps below to print out the sections you need to see Print chapters from the Disk Manual for DOS user Type HL1260e or HL1660 HL1660e and press ENTER key You do not need to choose disk drive nor directory Follow the messages on the screen for Windows 95 user Double click the HL1260e or HL1660 Series folder on the screen and then the Disk Manual icon Follow the messages on the screen for Windows 3 1 user Double click the HL1260e or HL1660 group icon sign on the screen and then the Disk Manual icon Follow the messages on the screen Notes You will need a minimum of 6 MB free area on your hard disk drive in order to print any sections of the User s Guide Use 4 or letter size paper for printing USER S GUIDE ABOUT THIS PRINTER Features This printer has the fol
371. urce you must set or W switch to select the paper size in the multi purpose the SIZE manually since the tray cannot sense the size automatically 3 Press the SET switch to make the displayed setting effective Then the display shows the current PAPER IN setting with the asterisk as follows PAP 4 Press the ER IN CONT or W switch to select the printer action to continue or stop during manual feed gt Note Xou can select the printer action either to continue or to stop printing when vou select the manual feed with this switch or bv a command When you set PAPER IN CONTINUE the printer feeds paper from the multi purpose tray When you set PAPER 5 the printer stops feeding paper until the SEL key is pressed If you want to place the paper on the multi purpose tray after you make a print request from the PC select the PAPER 5 so that the printer waits for the paper 5 Press the SET switch to make the setting effective MEDIA TYPE When you use any paper other than ordinary plain paper such as thick bond paper envelope or transparency the appropriate media type must be selected in the media type mode in order to get the best print quality To select a media type follow these steps 1 The display shows the following message MED A TYPE CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL Press the SET switch to enter the media tvpe mode
372. us Copy Pages Emulation Fixed emulation expressed with double figures LJ AUTO HP LaserJet emulation BS AUTO BR Script 2 GL AUTO HP GL emulation AUTO EPSON FX 850 emulation PR AUTO IBM Proprinter XL emulation Fig 4 2 Display 43 USER GUIDE 44 Lamps The lamps light or blink to indicate the current printer status READV LED indication Ready to print Blinking DATA LED indication On Data remains in the printer buffer Pressing the FORM FEED switch prints the data and clears the buffer Blinking Receiving or processing data ALARM LED indication Some problem has occurred in the printer LED indication The printer is on line and ready to print The printer is off line and stops printing CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES IN NORMAL MODE You can control the basic printer operations and change various printer settings in the NORMAL mode Functions available in the NORMAL mode are shown above the panel switches brother D COPY PAGES DUPLEX ONLINE w READY SEL MODE FONT FORMFEED SET comme A m DATA ORIENTATION FEEDER EMULATION ECONOMY FEEDER SHIFT RESET TEST Fig 4 3 Switches in NORMAL Mode gt Note SEL Switch The factory settings are printed in bold in this section Pressing the SEL switch changes the state of the printer between on line and off line When the printer is on line the ON LIN
373. ut thoroughly for cleaning the printer interior e Notes When you clean the printer interior pay attention to the following If your clothes are smeared with toner wipe off toner with a dry cloth and wash clothes in cold water If you wash them in hot water toner gets dissolved inside the material and it will not come out Never touch the hot fuser Never touch or clean the transfer roller or print quality may be adversely affected Be careful not to inhale the toner T 3 1 Z U Transfer Roller Fig 6 5 Fuser and Transfer Roller 6 6 CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE Clean the printer interior as follows 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord 2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge 3 Clean both sides of the paper access cover and transfer guide wiping off toner and paper particles with a dry soft cloth The paper access cover can be lifted up to allow easier access for cleaning e B WA Transfer Guide sZ Paper Access Cover Fig 6 6 Cleaning the Paper Access Cover and Transfer Guide 4 Wipe off toner and paper particles from the top surface of the black plastic paper guide with a dry soft cloth Paper Guide Fig 6 7 Cleaning the Paper Guide 5 Detach the cle
374. vive eoviva FT By oT TO Ty EQUIV 00 1 0 ao 65 1808 36284 tes 1 NUMOI 8 0 0 ar SSA Issa E N TE S9 30 30 vot 22 024 30 32 182 sit TT H f var I TE 983 asi ISSA 30 30 22A 32 32 tT TT vit LIE 80 VIVI 0211 10 NIUHOM 6850 10 QNHONSJ 3LB L0 1440555 IL0 B 000 Sei eeuav H HSV14 000 14919 000 CEHIA 5410459 ILB C0 eeuav Wee HOM Le HEB 1B H HSV3 HOM 608 8vIMW NHMOI 8LO COD 000 7 6 49d UIEN r x pu ddy 1 5 HI9S6Z PETASPA 00018151 4IB 90 020 20 10 20 vOs ela BT B 5 1412851 390 0 1985 310 90 4125 Cee PASH UP 182893 conan 310 90 TNASUSI BES TET 20 90 anassa per 9 TFT ger 360 20 WEB 18 NOTA 5 8 DEB L0 N330 000 10 NONAS 460 20 exe 460 20 NASAOTII Tr2 taz
375. width height CHARACTER SLANT SL tangent_of_angle EXTRA SPACE ES width height STANDARD FONT DEFINITION SD kind value kind value ALTERNATE FONT DEFINITION AD kind value kind value CHARACTER FILL MODE CF fill_mode edge_pen LABEL ORIGIN LO position LABEL LB char char 1 bterm DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR DT bterm model CHARACTER PLOT CP spaces lines TRANSPARENT DATA TD mode DEFINE VARIABLE TEXT PATH DV path line Line and Fill Attributes Group LINE TYPE LT line type pattern length mode LINE ATTRIBUTES LA kind value kind value PEN WIDTH PW width pen PEN WIDTH UNIT SELECTION WU type SELECT PEN SP pen SYMBOL MODE SM char FILL TYPE FT fill_type option 1 option 2 ANCHOR CORNER AC x_coordinate y_coordinate RASTER FILL DEFINITION RF index width height pen_nbr pen_nbr USER DEFINED LINE TYPE UL index gap 1 gap 20 Configuration and Status Group COMMENT CO SCALE 1 x 2 1 y 2 type left bottom or x 1 x factor y 1 y factor 2 INPUT WINDOW IW IxLL yLL xUR y UR INPUT P1 AND P2 IP 1 plyLp2x p2yll INPUT RELATIVE PI AND P2 IR 2 2 DEFAULT VALUES DF INITIALIZE IN ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM RO angle Appendix 58 APPENDICES Printer Job Language Commands Svntax Command Svntax Rules 1 lt gt Specia
376. with the MODE switch For further information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set to ON simply connect the interface cable to the printer When you use the serial interface you need to have the same communications settings on both the printer and computer Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain settings you may be able to simply connect the interface cable to the printer if your computer has the settings listed below Communications Parameters Factory Settings Baud rate data transfer speed 9600 Code type data length 8 bits Parity data error check None Stop bit data separator 1 stop bit Xon Xoff handshake protocol ON DTR ER ON Robust Xon OFF If a commercial interface card has been installed in the MIO card slot it can be selected automatically When necessary select the interface or the serial communications parameters manually with the MODE switch INTERFACE MODE on the printer For further information see MODE Switch in Chapter 4 For the settings on the computer see the manual of the computer or software you are using 3 5 USER S GUIDE gt Notes When you use the automatic interface selection note the following Once the interface is automatically changed it is not changed again for a short period of time This time period is called Time Out and it can be set with the MODE switch The f
377. you can set the number of pages to reprint The printer reprints the same job the number of times you press the switch e Notes The reprint data remains in the printer s memory until the printer is reset or the emulation or some settings are changed After you have reprinted confidential data be sure to reset the printer to clear it from the printer s memory If the printer cannot distinguish the job unit it prints the last page only You can reprint the job unit with using the attached printer driver You cannot use the reprint function in the BR Script 2 emulation mode 4 62 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL CONTINUE Switch If there is a problem with the printer it automaticallv suspends printing and goes off line Pressing the CONTINUE switch may ignore the error and resume printer operation The function of this switch varies according to the CONTINUE mode set with the MODE switch Since the CONTINUE mode has been factory set to MANUAL you need to press the CONTINUE switch to recover from a printer error message If you set the mode to AUTO the printer attempts to resume the operation without pressing the CONTINUE switch For further information see CONTINUE MODE in Chapter 4 gt Note The CONTINUE switch is not a cure all The printer cannot recover from some errors Take corrective action referring to the error message See TROUBLESHOOTING in Chapter 7 4 63 USER GUIDE SWITCHES IN SHIFT
378. zontal 1200 dpi data 1200 dpi Graphic Data Compression Format This compression format consists of blocks of data 64 dots down the page starting from the leading edge of the paper Ex If the graphic data extends over three bands as shown in the following diagram it transfers the data as three blocks of data ESC b W Block 1 gt Block 2 Block 3 Band 1 GA SEU de Block 1 2 Block 2 Band 3 192 bie eta Block 3 Band 4 256 pee Band 5 320 c In mode 1027 the transfer graphic data command byte count does not have a limitation of 32 767 bytes APPENDICES The block data is composed as follows Position Data Description 0 1 Block length n 2 2 3 Horizontal position dots from the left of the page 4 5 Vertical position dots from the leading edge of the page 6 Height dots number of image vertical dots 7 8 Width words number of image horizontal 16 bit words 9 n 1 Compression data compression image data Ex Data is at horizontal position 256 vertical position 64 height 32 dots width 100 x 16 bit words 1600 dots and compression data is 800 bytes ESC b809W 03h 27h O1h 00h 00h 40h 20h 00h 64h Data800Byte LJ LI L b c d e f a Block length 807 b Horizontal position 256 c Vertical position 64 d Height dots 32 e Width words 100 f Compression image data lt Compressed Image Data gt Data compression compres

Caution

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents